Home

Series 2400 SourceMeter User`s Manual

1. ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesinaeeees 5 7 Pulse JIo ececiicccina inn A 5 8 Pulse energy limitations 10A range sseesessseerrssserrrssserereses 5 9 Pulse Mode configuration aeeeeeeeseceesrnsseernnnsrnnnasseennneerenn 5 10 Front panel Pulse Mode configuration n se 5 10 Remote command Pulse Mode configuration 2 08 5 11 Pulse measure considerations eccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeees 5 12 Measurement speed ccceeceeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneaees 5 12 Filter eisai ornare carer eran rece ct er rece E Aer teer rere pier cree eee er 5 12 Auto rango ceccar thine satin Ninbedidieee tiles 5 12 Concurrent measurements ceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 5 12 Ohms source readback cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeecenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 5 12 TOG GIG KEY perrin arne EEEREN ASE EEAS 5 13 Offset compensated ORMS cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 5 13 Source delay Acre 5 13 Trigger delay ecccmunnniscrrenn i A 5 14 Input triggers ooo eee eeeeteeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeetneeeeeseeaees 5 14 Output triggers sacair i AE EE 5 14 Auto output off ere 5 14 Output off State isisi iiaa a 5 15 TUrNINg SOUFCE ON ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeteeates 5 15 SCPI signal oriented measurement commands 5 15 6 Source Measure Concepts Compliance limit icici aidaa inii aiaiai iaa 6 2 Types of complia
2. cccceceeeeeeeseeseeseeneees 16 3 OPC operation complete query eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 3 SAV lt NR gt SAV aaia daada iaia aai 16 3 RCL lt NRf gt recall cccccccecceesceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeesseaeeeees 16 3 RST eset naaa aa aa a aaa 16 4 TRG trigger eececceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetiaeeeeeetneeeeeeres 16 4 TST self test query seesssiseeeriresesrnnsnseernennseinnesenennn 16 4 WAI wait to COntinUe 00 ccc cee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 16 5 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Command SUMMAN rosserie iaa 17 2 Configuring measurement function 0 0 eee cette eeeeettteeeeeeeeaees 17 2 SCONFigure lt fUNCtion gt iesise inaianei 17 2 ACQUIFING readings essrssssnsiia aiaa a 17 3 FETON saninin E 17 3 SENSef 1 DATA LATest cecccececesesteeeeeeeesteeeeeseeaes 17 4 READ sicraent a AR 17 4 MEASuref lt function gt eeeeeeeccecceceeeeceeeeeeceeeceeeaeeeeeeeeess 17 5 18 SCPI Command Reference Reference tables cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeennaeaeeas 18 2 Calculate subsystems eersaiicssarsisrei aie 18 26 CALCulate 1 cccccccccceccssssscceessscaeeessssseeeeesssssaeeeesssceaeeneesses 18 26 Select create math expression name eeeeeeee 18 26 Assign unit SUFFIX oo eee cece cette e rete eect ee eeetaaeeeeeetaeeeeenenaaes 18 28 Define math expression
3. ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeseestenteeeeeees 18 29 Enable and read math expression result 0ceee 18 32 CAL CUlate Z acess sre estates eves E 18 33 Select input path c cc ccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 33 Null feed reading sc2cccvstedees ectaadeestnniadeesehciaeeest niideeeevinne 18 34 Read CAL C2 sicccec ciscie te ccesigetiedensdacess eovtiasts cocsstetieceediaceceseats 18 34 Configure and control limit tests 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 35 Composite testing 00 0 cceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeneaeees 18 39 Clear test TeSUItS sscricisiesiscinna ii etree 18 42 CALCulate3 sss cesccigaceececcekcced ecashes es eoasade cecesstadscdenedasaweesdiedececdcoxe 18 43 Select StatiStC nnana a aa aA 18 43 Acquire statistic cccccecceeeeeeceeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeteesennaeaeees 18 43 DISPlay SUBSYStOM sAcc ccseteeie eatiaees dice ie eedadaaeeeaties 18 44 Control display 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeaeeees 18 44 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table of Contents Read display scaseseidstacevetidiaccneinccccedexerccancaceet ld aeaevebestienependy 18 46 Define TEXT messages 00 2 ececccceeeeeccceeeeeeeeceeereeeecceneneteees 18 46 FORMat subsystem ainaani anani AE A 18 47 Data torimat E E E T 18 47 Data elements cscsnisinia raii GR 18 49 CALC data elements ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeneees 18 53 BE Orde enana ebhdscocn
4. lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify limit 1 fail bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Specify lower Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf NDN bit pat tern Specify upper Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf bit pattern Specify pass pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN bit pattern Specify pass bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Sorting mode only if limits 2 3 and 5 12 dis abled Specify fail bit pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN pattern LIMitX LIMit2 LIMit3 LIMit5 through LIMit12 LIMit4 Contact check option not valid for the Model 2401 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing The programming example in Table 12 4 tests a diode for two sets of upper and lower limits for a diode This example is not valid for the Model 2401 Table 12 4 Limits test programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SENS FUNC CONC OFF Turn off concurrent functions SOUR FUNC CURR Current source function SENS FUNC VOLT DC SOUR CURR TRIG 0 1 SOUR DEL 0 1 CALC2 FEED VOLT CALC2 LIM2 UPP 0 85 CALC2 LIM2 LOW 0 75 CALC2 LIM3 UPP 0 82 CALC2 LIM3 LOW 0 78 CALC2
5. fan runs at low speed with the output off See Cooling fan page 1 12 NUMBERS Select engineering units or scientific notation display ENGR format SCIENTIFIC BEEPER Enable or disable beeper Top level menu choices indicated in bold Indentation identifies each lower submenu level 2 When the remote operation interface selection GPIB or RS 232 is changed the SourceMeter per forms a power on reset To check or change options of the selected interface you must re enter the menu structure 3 Only VIEW DATES is accessible when calibration is locked Password is required to unlock calibra tion 4 Press EXIT key to cancel test 5 Disabling auto zero will reduce measurement accuracy 6 0 65535 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option 1 22 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Rules to navigate menus Many source measure functions and operations are configured from the front panel menus Use the following rules to navigate through these configuration menus NOTE Complete rules to edit source and compliance values are found in the Basic source measure procedure in Section 3 See Editing source and compliance values below for an overview A menu item is selected by placing the cursor on it and pressing ENTER Cursor position is denoted by the blinking menu item or option The EDIT A and V keys control cursor position A displayed arrow on the bottom line indicates there
6. 2 12 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sense and guard selections NOTE When sense or guard settings are changed the OUTPUT will turn OFF Sense selection When using the SENSE HI and LO terminals of the SourceMeter 4 wire remote sensing must be selected When not using these terminals local sensing must be selected Sense selection is explained as follows See Section 3 Operation over view for details on sense NOTE The SourceMeter defaults to the 2 wire local sense mode when the out put is off regardless of the sense setting When the output is turned on the present sense setting will be in effect Front panel sense selection On power up the instrument is automatically set for 2 wire local sense Perform the following steps to check and or change the sense selection 1 Press CONFIG and then the SOURCE V MEAS V or Q key Changing sense in one configuration menu changes it in all of the others 2 For SOURCE V and Q use the s and keys to place the cursor flashing menu item on SENSE MODE and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the present sense selection Two wire indicates that local sense is selected and 4 wire indicates that remote sense is selected To retain the present selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the sense selection place the cursor on 4 wire to select remote sense or on 2 wire to select local sen
7. 3 Use the left and right cursor keys and the SOURCE or RANGE arrow keys to specify the number of readings to store in the buffer 4 Press ENTER The asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate data stor age operation It will turn off when the storage is finished 5 Turn on the output and if necessary trigger the unit to begin taking and storing readings Recalling readings Readings stored in the buffer are displayed by pressing the RECALL key The source measure readings are positioned at the left side of the display while the buffer location number and timestamp are positioned at the right side Buffer location number The buffer location number indicates the memory location of the source measure reading Location 0000 indicates that the displayed source measure reading is stored at the first memory location If limit testing was performed a P or an F will precede the buffer location number to indicate the pass fail result of the test Limit testing is covered in Section 12 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Store 9 3 Timestamp The first source measure reading stored in the buffer 0000 is timestamped at 0000000 000 seconds Subsequent readings can be recalled in absolute or delta timestamp format For the absolute format the timestamp references readings to zero seconds For the delta format the timestamp indicates the time between the displayed reading and the reading before it To set the
8. FORMat lt name gt Specify math format MEAN SDEViation MEAN v MAXimum MINimum or PKPK FORMat Query math format y DATA Read math result of CALC3 v The format ASCII hexadecimal octal or binary for the returned value is set by FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt 18 8 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 2 DISPlay command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Turn on or turn off front panel display Note 1 y ENABIe Query state of display y CNDisplay Return to source measure display state EWINDow 1 Path to locate message to top display v TEXT Control user test message Note 2 v DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 20 y characters DATA Query text message y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode Note 3 v STATe Query text message state v DATA Query data on top portion of display ATTRibutes Query attributes of message characters blinking 1 or not blinking 0 WINDow2 Path to locate message to bottom display y TEXT Control user test message Note 2 y DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 32 v characters DATA Query text message y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode Note 3 v STATe Query text message state v DATA Query data on bottom portion of display AT TRibutes Query attributes of message characters blink
9. HOLDoff lt b gt Enable disable current range holdoff v for source memory sweeps HOLDoff Query current range holdoff state DELay lt NRf gt Set holdoff delay sec 0 to 999 9999 v DELay Query holdoff delay NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 y 0 01 to 10 4 NPLCycles Query integration rate v 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms cannot be enabled using this command This command is invalid error 831 2 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 3 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range is invalid error 831 4 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 004 to 0 100 18 14 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 6 continued SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 VOLTage DC AVERage Path to configure and control digital filter REPeat y TCONtrol lt name gt Specify filter type MOVing or REPeat y y TCONtrol Query filter type y COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 1 10 v y COUNt Query filter count v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter 2 OFF v y STATe Query state of filter v 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode filtering is not used Thi
10. I 1 gt Source Trigger Out I gt Delay Trigger Out I k Pulse Action I 0 15 mseci l l i I MEASURE Bench Default i Acton Output Trigger I g Trigger Out Event gt Measure On Off I Pulse Width 11 22 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 9 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model remote operation See Note Note The following commands place the SourceMeter into idle DCL SDC ABORt RST SYSTem PREset and RCL Idle plate Rn Yang a a eee a Layer ARM SOURce IMMediate BUS ARM COUNt TIMer lt n gt INF MANual 1 TLINk NSTest PSTest BSTest gt NONE TEXit Trigger Layer TRIGger DIRection ACCeptor TRIGger COUNt lt n gt 1 TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Iniggerin TLINK Source SOURce PULSe DELay lt n gt 0 0 sec Trigger In Source Trigger In Source I l SOURCE f gt Source Trigger Out __ Action gt Delay Trigger Out SOURce PULSe WIDTh i GPIB Default lt n gt i i gt Output Trigger 0 0015 sec l lt Pulse Action 1 1 GPIB default parameter for TRIGger OUTPut is NONE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 23 Idle As with DC Mode front panel operation the SourceMeter is taken out of idle by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key For DC Mode remote operation the output must be on and then an initiate com mand must be sent to take the instrument out of
11. Input O utput H I 4 wire Sense HI 4 wire Sense LO Ohms Measurements 4 7 Test Current I Riean Sense Current pA Riean Lead Resistances Resistance Vu Under Test Riean Input O utput LO I Current sourced by SourceM eter Vy Voltage measured by SourceM eter Vp Voltage across resistor Because sense current is negligible Vy Vp x V V and measured resistance E EE press CONFIG then Q select SENSE MODE then 4 8 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Offset compensated ohms NOTE For the Model 2430 the following offset compensated ohms method is not valid in the Pulse Mode However offset compensated ohms is avail able as a math function Section 8 Math operations The presence of thermal EMFs Vey can adversely affect low resistance mea surement accuracy To overcome these unwanted offset voltages use the offset compensated ohms measurement method In general this method measures resistance V I at a specific source level and then subtracts a resistance measurement made with the source set to zero With the source set to zero the source level is Veme Thus the resistance contributed by the presence of Vey is eliminated This two point measurement method is mathematically expressed as Offset Compensated Q AV Al where AV V2 V1 and Al 12 11 V1 is the voltage measurement with the source set to a specific level V2 is the voltage measur
12. Main menu in this section NOTE _ Ifthe Model 2420 2425 2430 or 2440 overheats the output will trip and the cooling fan will run at high speed regardless of the speed option set ting See Section 6 Overheating protection for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 13 Display Display format The SourceMeter display is used primarily to program source and compliance val ues and display measured readings Annunciators which are located along the top of the reading message display indicate various states of operation as cov ered previously in Front panel summary On power up the top primary display is used for measurements when the output is on with the output off OFF is displayed The bottom left display is used for the programmed source value Vsrc or Isrc and the bottom right display is used for the programmed compliance Cmpl limit Reading information can be displayed using either engineering units or scientific notation in either fixed or floating point format Use the GENERAL NUMBERS selection of the main MENU to select the display format as discussed in Menus later in this section Engineering units example 1 23456uA Scientific notation example 1 23456e 6 NOTE The display may be disabled for faster operation See Disabling front panel display page 1 24 EDIT key The SourceMeter must be in the edit mode to set source and compliance va
13. STATus and serves as a path The second level is made up of another path OPERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 11 stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab stat pres In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root com mand stat and moves down the command levels until the command is exe cuted Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example show ing two commands in one program message stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root com mand stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command When the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be executed without having to retype the entire command path Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt enab After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third com mand level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be
14. Set limit to 63V NONE Set limit to 6V Set limit to 63V NONE Specify V Source limit Set limit to 10V Set limit to 20V Set limit to 30V Set limit to 40V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query Description SCPI Command Reference 18 81 50 Set limit to 50V 60 Set limit to 60V 80 Set limit to 80V 81 to 105 Set limit to NONE DEFault Set limit to 105V NONE MINimum Set limit to 10V MAXimum Set limit to 105V NONE 2440 lt n gt 42 to 42 Specify V Source limit 4 Set limit to 4V 8 Set limit to 8V 12 Set limit to 12V 16 Set limit to 16V 20 Set limit to 20V 24 Set limit to 24V 32 Set limit to 32V 33 to 42 Set limit to NONE DEFault Set limit to 42V NONE MINimum Set limit to 4V MAXimum Set limit to 42V NONE LIMit Query limit level LIMit DEFault LIMit MINimum LIMit MAXimum This command is used to set the Over Voltage Protection OVP limit for the V Source The V Source output will not exceed the selected limit An exception to this is a parameter value that exceeds 160V for the Model 2400 500V for the Model 2410 48V for the Model 2420 80V for the Models 2425 and 2430 or 32V for the Model 2440 Exceeding those values allows the V Source to output its maximum voltage The OVP limit is also enforced when in the I Source Mode The limit parameter values are magnitudes and are in effect for both positive and negative output voltage You can express the limit as a positive or
15. TIME Use timestamp reading Valid math operators and their operations are listed as follows Add Subtract Multiply Divide A Exponent log Logarithmic base 10 In Natural log sin Sine cos Cosine tan Tangent exp ex NOTE The log and In operations are performed on the absolute value of the speci fied number For example log 100 2 and log 100 2 18 30 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Expressions are evaluated according to the following precedence rules Enclosed by parentheses Unary operators and exponentiation multiplication and division addition and subtraction Left to right The readings used for the calculation depend on how the SourceMe ter is configured If configured to Source V Measure I the voltage reading for the calculation will be the source value and the current reading will be the current measurement Conversely if configured to Source Measure V the current reading will be the source value and the voltage reading will be the voltage measurement Measure readings take priority over source readings Thus if config ured to Source V Measure V the voltage reading for the calculation will be the voltage measurement not the programmed V Source value Conversely if configured to Source Measure I the current reading for the calculation will be the current measurement The result of a calculation using a reading
16. Use to set the high limit and for the grading mode specify the fail bit pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit e PASS Use this menu item to dictate actions upon a PASS condition DIG I O PATTERN Use this option item to define the digital output bit pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit For the grading mode it is the pass pattern for the all tests pass condition For the sorting mode it is the pass pattern for Limit 1 compliance when all other software limit tests are disabled 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit 12 18 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SRC MEM LOC Use this option with a Source Memory Sweep to select the next memory location point in the sweep when the PASS condition occurs If NEXT is selected the next point in the sweep list will be selected You can also branch to a different point in the sweep by specifying the memory LOCATION 1 to 100 e EOT MODE Use this menu item to control the operation of Digital I O line 4 to act as an end of test EOT or BUSY signal Figure 12 10 BUSY Set Digital I O line 4 HI while unit is busy With BUSY selected the unit behaves as if it is in 3 bit mode Requires SOT as the arm source IBUSY Set Digital I O line 4 LO while unit is busy With BUSY selected the unit behaves as if it is in 3 bit mode Requires SOT as the arm source EOT In 3 bit mode automatically output a HI pulse on Digital I O line 4 at end of test I
17. cols are discussed in this appendix Selecting the 488 1 protocol Perform the following steps to select the 488 1 protocol 1 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU 2 Place the cursor on COMMUNICATION and press ENTER to display the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu 3 Place the cursor on GPIB and press ENTER to display the present GPIB address 4 Press ENTER to display the GPIB PROTOCOL menu 5 Place the cursor on 488 1 and press ENTER 6 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure When switching between the SCPI protocol and 488 1 protocol the instrument does not reset The GPIB protocol setting is saved in EEPROM and the unit will power up with that selected protocol The GPIB protocol cannot be changed over the bus However there is a query command to determine the presently selected protocol When the 488 1 protocol is selected the message exchange protocol MEP disables Therefore if you use the following query to request the state of MEP you will know which protocol is enabled SYSTem MEP STATe If a 1 is returned MEP is enabled and the SCPI protocol is selected A 0 indi cates that MEP is disabled and the 488 1 protocol is enabled To summarize 1 SCPI protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 3 0 488 1 protocol Protocol differences The following information covers the differences between the 488 1 protocol and the SCPI protocol Message exch
18. raw readings CALCulate 1 Calc1 readings or CALCulate2 Calc2 readings Start or stop buffer Name NEXT fill buffer and stop or NEVer disable buffer Select timestamp format Name ABSolute reference to first buffer reading or DELTa time between buffer readings Select buffer statistic name MEAN SDEViation MAXimum MINimum or PKPK Read buffer statistic data If TRACe FEED is set to SENSe 1 this command will return one V I Q and MATH result Data store programming example Table 9 2 summarizes the commands for basic data store operation These com mands set up the SourceMeter as follows Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual e Reading source raw readings Number of points 10 e Acquired data buffer readings mean average and standard deviation NOTE You can determine when the buffer is full by reading the appropriate sta tus register bit See Section 15 for details on the status structure Table 9 2 Data store example Command Description RST SOUR VOLT 10 TRAC FEED SENS TRAC POIN 10 TRAC FEED CONT NEXT TRIG COUN 10 OUTP ON INIT TRACE DATA CALC3 FORM MEAN CALC3 DATA CALC3 FORM SDEV CALC3 DATA Restore GPIB defaults Source 10V Store raw readings in buffer Store 10 readings in buffer Enable buffer Trigger count 10 Turn on output Trigger readings Request raw buffer readings Select m
19. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 15 Questionable Event Register The used bits of the Questionable Event Register shown in Figure 15 7 are described as follows e Bits BO through B7 Not used e Bit B8 Calibration Summary Cal Set bit indicates that an invalid cali bration constant was detected during the power up sequence This error will clear after successful calibration of the instrument e Bits B9 through B13 Not used Bit B14 Command Warning Warn Set bit indicates that a Signal Ori ented Measurement Command parameter has been ignored e Bit B15 Not used Figure 15 7 Questionable event status Questionable Condition Register stat ques cond Warn B15 B14 o B9 B7 B0 Warn re B15 B14 B13 B9 B7 BO Questionable stat ques Event Register To QSB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 Questionable Event Enable Register stat ques enab lt N Rf gt Warn CAL statques enab g15 B14 813 89 88 87 BO Warn Command Warning Logical AND Cal Calibration Summary n Logical OR 15 16 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Condition registers As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set except the Standard Event Regis ter set has a condition register A condition register is a real time read only regis ter that constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions
20. 3 Format set by FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt 18 20 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 8 STATus command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI STATus Note 1 v MEASurement Control measurement event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 v ENABIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 v ENABIe Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register v OPERation Control operation status registers v EVENt Read the event register Note 2 v ENABIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 v ENABIe Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register v QUEStionable Control questionable status registers v EVENt Read the event register Note 2 v ENABIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 v ENABIe Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register PRESet Return status registers to default states v QUEue Path to access error queue v NEXT Read the most recent error message Note 4 v ENABle lt list gt Specify error status messages for error queue Note 5 v ENABIe Read the enabled messages v DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in error queue Note 5 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from error queue Notes 1 Commands in this s
21. 6 Select DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER 7 Enter the desired pulse delay value 0 to 9999 99872 sec then press ENTER 8 Press EXIT to return to the normal display Set pulse measurement speed Once the Pulse Mode is selected the available NPLC values become accessible to set pulse measurement speed 1 Press SPEED to display the pulse speed menu 2 Select the speed setting 0 004 to 0 100 and press ENTER Set pulse count The arm count and trigger count determine how many pulses will be sourced In general the number of pulses to be sourced is the product of the arm count and trigger count For example if the arm count is two and the trigger count is five ten pulses will be sourced when the output is turned on However with the arm count set to infinite the Model 2430 will continuously source pulses when the output is turned on Note that the product of finite value counts cannot exceed 2500 See Section 11 Trigger models for details Perform the following steps to set the arm count 1 Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu 2 Select ARM LAYER from the displayed choices and press ENTER 3 Select COUNT from the displayed choices and press ENTER 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 11 For continuous pulse output select INFINITE press ENTER and proceed to step 6 Otherwise select FINITE press ENTER and proceed to
22. COUNt MINimum Queries lowest allowable count COUNt MAXimum Queries largest allowable count This command is used to specify how many times an operation is performed in the specified layer of the trigger model For example assume the arm count is set to 2 and the trigger counter is set to 10 the SourceMeter is configured to perform 10 source measure operations twice for a total of 20 source measure operations The product of the arm count and trigger count cannot exceed 2500 If for example the arm count is 2 then the maximum trigger count is 1250 NOTE _ INFinite can be used only with ARM COUNt and FETCh READ MEAS CALC1 DATA or CALC2 DATA cannot be used with infinite arm count Only INIT will start measurements and only output enable line over temper ature SDC DCL or ABORt should be used to stop the sweep ARM COUNt INFinite can be used for repetitive source waveforms or for long tests where only the last reading is important For example the limits could be used to drive the output enable to abort a test when some condition is met DATA would then give the answer to the test DELay lt n gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 DELay lt n gt Set trigger layer delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 999 9999 Specify delay in seconds DEFault 0 second delay MINimum 0 second delay MAXimum 999 9999 second delay Query DELay Query the programmed delay DELay DEFault Query the RST default delay DELay MINimum Query the lowest allow
23. Digital I O port BSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital O port is pulsed either high or low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 and Section 13 NOTE NSTest PSTest and BSTest can be used only at the beginning of a sweep and should not be used to trigger each point in a sweep Trigger layer The Trigger Layer uses three event detectors one for each action Source Delay and Measure Event detector bypass As shown in Figure 11 3 there is a bypass TRIGger DIRection for the Source Event Detector This bypass is in effect only if TLINk is the selected Trigger In Source With this event detector bypass set to SOURCce operation will proceed around the Source Event Detector The programmable trigger in sources for the Trigger Layer are described as fol lows IMMediate With Immediate selected event detection for the three detectors is satisfied immediately Operation proceeds through the Trigger Layer to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions TLINk With TLINk selected event detection at each enabled detector occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received A detector is enabled by including its parameter name with the TRIGger INPut command For example to enable the Delay Event Detector and Measure Event Detector the following command must be sent TRIGger INPut DELay SENSe The above com
24. Figure 18 3 Key press codes SCPI Command Reference 18 111 The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent over the bus and the SourceMeter is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed either physically or with KEY is sent to the computer The key press code number for the last key pressed either physi cally or with key is sent to the computer 15 22 29 5 12 19 i KEITHLEY Parameters lt NRf gt 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT A HI mfi 11 POV Sourcemdter m SPEED WODNAUIBWNE LOCAL _ REL 31 3014 13 28 2711 10 RANGE up arrow key 17 SOURCE down arrow key 18 Left arrow key 19 MENU key 20 FCTN key 21 FILTER key 22 SPEED key 23 EDIT key 24 AUTO key 25 Right arrow key 26 EXIT key 27 V SOURCE key 28 LIMITS key 29 ae RE Key 30 MEAS key 31 Yo GGLE key 32 RANGE down arrow key ENTER key SOURCE key TRIG key RECALL key M EAS key LOCAL key ON OFF key not used SOURCE up arrow key SW EEP key CONFIG key Q key REL key DIGITS key FRONT REAR key 18 112 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Read version of SCPI standard VERSion SYSTem VERSion Read SCPI version Description This query command is used to read the version of the SCPI stan dard being used by the SourceMeter Example code 1996 0 The above response message indicates the version of the SCPI
25. Load Line Operating Point 40V V M eter Vu Current Source Load Line 50mA 100mA I Source ls ls Vy R 40V 8009 50mA B I Source In Compliance 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual V Source operating boundaries Source Measure Concepts 6 19 Figure 6 11 and Figure 6 12 show the operating boundaries for the V Source Only the first quadrant of operation is covered Operation in the other three quad rants is similar Limit 1 05A 21mA Source V 21V 1100V B Model 2410 Limit Model 2430 10 5A Pulse Mode YW 3 15A 1 05A Source V 21V 105V D Models 2425 and 2430 Figure 6 11 V Source output characteristics Limit A 1 05A 105mA 4 T gt Source V 21V 210V A Model 2400 Limit 3 15A 1 05A Source V 21V 63V C Model 2420 Limit 5 25A 1 05A T 10 5V gt Source V 42V E Model 2440 6 20 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 12 shows the limit lines for the V Source The voltage source limit line represents the maximum source value possible for the presently selected voltage source range For example if on the 20V source range the voltage source limit line is at 21V The current compliance limit line represents the actual compliance in effect Remember that compliance can be real or range See Compliance limit page 6 2 These limit lines are boundaries that represent the operating lim its of the SourceMeter
26. Parameters ENABIe Read enable register QUEStionable Questionable Event Enable Register ENABIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See Parameters ENABIe Read Measurement Event Enable Register Parameters lt NDN gt Bxx x Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hx Hexadecimal format x 0 to 7FFF Qx Octal format x 0 to 77777 lt NRf gt 0 to 32767 Decimal format Note Power up and STATus PRESet reset all bits of all enable registers to 0 CLS has no effect Programming example program and read register set The command sequence in Table 15 8 programs and reads the measurement register set Registers are read using the binary format which directly indicates 15 18 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual which bits are set The command to select format FORMat SREGister is docu mented in Table 15 2 Table 15 8 Program and read register programming example Command Description FORM SREG BIN Select binary format to read registers STAT MEAS ENAB 512 Enable BFL buffer full STAT MEAS COND Read Measurement Condition Register STAT MEAS Read Measurement Event Register Queues The SourceMeter uses two queues which are first in first out FIFO registers Output Queue Used to hold reading and response messages e Error Queue Used to hold error and status messages See Appendix B The SourceMeter status model Figur
27. REL or Limits is enabled the TOGGLE key is disabled Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily During SourceMeter oper ation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either status or error in nature and are listed in Appendix B Remote display programming The display can also be controlled by various SCPI DISPlay subsystem com mands See Section 18 DISPlay subsystem for more information on using these commands See also Disabling front panel display page 1 24 Front panel tests Use the TEST FRONT PANEL TESTS selection of the main MENU to test various aspects of the front panel See Menus page 1 19 for more information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 15 Default settings By using appropriate menu selections you can save and recall various instrument setups define the power on configuration or restore factory defaults as outlined below Saving and restoring user setups You can save and restore up to five of your own user setups as covered below This feature provides a convenient way to save specific instrument configurations and then recall them as needed Note that you can also set up the SourceMeter to restore a specific user setup at power on See Power on configuration page 1 15 NOTE There are two types of setups Instrument configuration user setups covered here and so
28. Return and clear all errors codes only CCHeck lt b gt Enable or disable contact check Remote sensing must be enabled SYST RSEN ON RES lt Nrf gt Specify resistance threshold for contact check 50ohm default CLEar Clears messages from error queue RSENse lt b gt Enable or disable remote sensing OFF v RSENse Query state of remote sensing KEY lt n gt Simulate key press 1 to 31 See Figure 18 3 KEY Query the last pressed key v GUARd lt name gt Select guard type OHMS or CABLe CABLe v GUARd Query guard type BEEPer Control beeper IMMediate Beep at specified frequency 65 to 2e6 Hz lt freq time gt for specified time period 0 to 7 9 seconds STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper ON STATe Query state of beeper v 1 Clearing Error Queue Power up and CLS clears the error queue RST SYSTem PRESet and STATus PRESet have no effect 18 22 Table 18 9 continued SCPI Command Reference SYSTem command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SYSTem AZERO Control auto zero and NPLC caching v STATe lt name gt Control auto zero OFF disabled ON y ON enabled ONCE force immediate update of auto zero STATe Query auto zero state v CACHing Control NPLC caching STATe lt b gt Enable ON or 1 or disable OFF or 0 OFF NPLC caching
29. The fastest pulses are achieved by disabling measurements With the signal not measured as shown in Figure 5 4 the pulse width can be as short as the 150usec overhead With reference and zero not measured and display disabled the output off time can be as short as the 1 9msec overhead NOTE Measurements cannot be disabled from the front panel For remote oper ation measurements can be disabled by sending the SENSe FUNC tion OFF ALL command See Section 18 for details To disable the display from the front panel press CONFIG then EDIT then select NOW Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time gt j 9ms kooo PD gt Delay Pulse width delay used to achieve pulse width setting 150ps Minimum pulse width overhead 1 90ms Minimum output off time overhead PD Pulse delay setting used to determine time between pulses Pulse jitter Pulse jitter is defined as the variance in the configured pulse on and off times The amount of jitter that can occur depends on how the SourceMeter is set up For the least amount of jitter lt 5usec for pulse on time turn off the display See Section 1 Disabling front panel display With the display on pulse on time jitter depends on the pulse width For pulses lt 1msec wide on time jitter can be up to 20usec For pulses gt 1msec wide on time jitter is 5 40usec 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430
30. be used with a component handler to perform binning operations e Output enable Describes how to use the Digital I O Port as output enable cable Front panel output configuration Details configuration of the Digital O Port as an output enable as well as configuring main output off states e Remote output configuration Summarizes the remote commands used to control the Digital I O Port output enable and main output off states A simple programming example is also provided 13 2 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O port The SourceMeter has a digital input output port that can be used to control exter nal digital circuitry such as a handler that is used to perform binning operations when testing limits NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port If using the Model 2401 ignore all information that pertains to binning operations Port configuration The Digital I O Port is located on the rear panel and is shown in Figure 13 1 NOTE The four digital output lines and the SOT line are primarily intended for limit testing with a device handler See Section 12 Limit Testing for details on performing limit tests and interfacing to handlers and Section 11 Triggering for information on programming the SourceMeter to respond to the start of test SOT pulse from a handler NOTE The Model 2401
31. cleared from the queue CODE ALL SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL Read all errors codes only Description This query command is identical to the ALL command except only the codes are returned The actual messages are not returned All errors are cleared from the queue CLEar SYSTem CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages 18 110 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Simulate key presses KEY SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press Parameters lt NRf gt 1 RANGE up arrow key 2 SOURCE down arrow key 3 left arrow key 4 MENU key 5 FCTN key 6 FILTER key 7 SPEED key 8 EDIT key 9 AUTO key 10 right arrow key 11 EXIT key 12 V SOURCE key 13 LIMITS key 14 STORE key 15 V MEAS key 16 TOGGLE key 17 RANGE down arrow key 18 ENTER key 19 SOURCE key 20 TRIG key 21 RECALL key 22 MEAS key 23 LOCAL key 24 ON OFF key 5 26 SOURCE up arrow key 27 SWEEP key 28 CONFIG key 29 Q key 30 REL key 31 DIGITS key 32 FRONT REAR key Query KEY Query last pressed key Description This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select the voltage measurement function V you can send the following command to simulate pressing the V MEAS key isyst key 15 The parameter listing provides the key press code in numeric order Figure 18 3 also illustrates the key press codes 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual
32. limit tests pass the PASS message is displayed and operation drops down to 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 7 the Binning Control decision block Note that the pass condition can also be determined with the CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL query via remote Immediate binning For immediate binning the testing process stops The SourceMeter outputs the pass pattern via the Digital I O port to the component handler to perform the binning operation End binning For end binning operation drops down to Another Test Cycle decision block If programmed to perform additional tests i e sweep on the DUT package operation loops back up to perform the next source measure action After all programmed test cycles are successfully completed the SourceMeter outputs the pass pattern to the component handler to perform the binning opera tion If configured to test another DUT package the operation loops back to the top of the flowchart and waits for the start of test SOT pulse from the component han dler Fail condition When a failure occurs the FAIL message is displayed and also can be read via remote with CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL and operation proceeds to the Binning Con trol decision block Immediate binning For immediate binning the testing process is terminated when a failure occurs and the fail pattern for that particular failure is sent to the component handler to perform the binning operat
33. lt name gt DC Select DC Mode PULSe Select Pulse Mode Query SHAPe Query selected output mode Description This command is used to select the output mode for the Model 2430 The DC parameter selects the DC Mode of operation and PULSe selects the Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 73 MODE lt name gt SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE lt name gt Select source mode Parameters lt name gt VOLTage Select voltage mode CURRent Select current mode MEMory Select memory mode Query MODE Query selected source Description This command is used to select the source mode With VOLTage selected the V Source will be used and with CURRent selected the l Source will be used With MEMory selected a memory sweep can be performed Operat ing setups up to 100 saved in memory can be sequentially recalled This allows multiple source measure functions to be used in a sweep Select sourcing mode MODE lt name gt SOURcef 1 CURRent MODE lt name gt Select DC sourcing mode for l Source SOURce 1 VOLTage MODE lt name gt Select DC sourcing mode for V Source Parameters lt name gt FlXed Select fixed sourcing mode LIST Select list sourcing mode SWEep Select sweep sourcing mode Query MODE Query DC sourcing mode Description This command is used to select the DC sourcing mode for the speci fied source The three modes are explained as follows FIXed In this DC sourcing mode the s
34. ment e Measure only V or I Display voltage or current measurement Voltage and Current Table 3 1 lists the source and measure limits for the volt age and current functions The full range of operation is explained in Section 6 Overheating protection and Operating boundaries NOTE Output transient recovery The time required for the V source to recover to its original value within 0 1 plus load regulation errors after a step change in load current is lt 250usec This does not include the response time of autoranging or the second order effects on loads that are not purely resistive Load regulation The voltage specification for V source mode load changes is 0 01 1mV This means that on the 200mV range the load current can be changed from zero to full scale with less than 1 02mV of error Calculation error 0 01 x 0 2V 1mV 1 02mV Assuming a 0 to 1A change in current the output impedance equates to 1 02mM Q 1 02mMV 1A 1 02m This level can only be achieved using 4 wire remote sensing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation Table 3 1 Source measure capabilities 2400 2400 LV 2401 2410 Range Source Measure Range Source Measure 200mV 210mV 211mV 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 2V 2 1V 2 11V 20V 21V 21 1V 20V 21V 21 1V 200V 210V 211V 1000V 1 1kV 1 1kV 1pA 1 05uA 1 055pA 1pA 1 05
35. results for the selected math expression are calculated The CALC1 DATA com mand will read the results of the math expression If for example 20 data arrays in the Sample Buffer yield 10 math expression results then CALC1 DATA will acquire 10 readings results CALCulate2 DATA If CALCulate2 is enabled Sample Buffer data and CALC1 math expression results become available to the CALC2 block for limit testing Depending on the selected feed limit testing can be performed on the voltage current resistance or timestamp readings of Sample Buffer data or it can be performed on the CALC1 math expression results If NULL rel is enabled the readings used for limit testing will be the results of the null operation The CALCulate2 DATA command acquires the readings used for limit testing TRACe DATA If the data store is enabled Sample Buffer data CALC1 results and CALC2 read ings become available to the TRACE block for storage The selected feed deter mines which group of readings are stored The TRACe DATA command reads the entire contents of the data store CALCulate3 DATA Statistical information minimum maximum mean standard deviation and peak to peak is available for measure readings stored in the buffer If the readings in the data store came directly from the Sample Buffer then the selected statistic calculation will be performed on all enabled measurement functions The calcula tion results are returned in t
36. standard RS 232 interface LOCal SYSTem LOCal Take SourceMeter out of remote Description Normally during RS 232 communications front panel keys are oper ational However the user may wish to lock out front panel keys dur ing RS 232 communications This action command is used to remove the SourceMeter from the remote state and enables the operation of front panel keys Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface RWLock lt b gt SYSTem RWLock lt b gt Disable or enable front panel keys Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable local lockout 1 or ON Enable local lockout Query RWLock Query state of local lockout Description This command is used to enable or disable local lockout When enabled the front panel keys are locked out not operational when the instrument is in remote When disabled the front panel keys are operational in remote Removing the instrument from remote restores front panel keys operation but does not change the status of the RWLock command Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface Query timestamp TIME SYSTem TIME Query timestamp Query TIME Query timestamp Description This query returns the current timestamp value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 113 Reset timestamp RESet SYSTem TIME RESet Reset timestamp Description This action command is used to reset the absolute timestamp to 0 seconds The timestamp
37. structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the guard selection place the cursor on the alternate selection and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure NOTE Do not use ohms guard with coaxial cabling or oscillations may occur Ohms guard cannot be selected on the 1A or higher range Source or measure Remote command guard selection Use the SYSTem GUARd command Section 18 SYSTem subsystem to choose between cable and ohms guard mode via remote For example send the following command to enable ohms guard SYST GUAR OHMS Conversely send this command to enable cable guard SYST GUAR CABL 3 Basic Source Measure Operation e Operation overview Discusses source measure capabilities compli ance limit and fundamental source measure configuration e Operation considerations Covers warm up auto zero V source pro tection and source delay e Basic source measure procedure Describes the basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for source measure operations including selecting the source function output values and compliance limits choos ing measurement range and function and turning the output on and off e Measure only Covers how to use the SourceMeter for measurements only Sink operation Describes sink operation 3 2 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING CAUTION The SourceMeter uses a
38. use only shielded IEEE 488 cables Available shielded cables from Keithley are Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 Primary address The SourceMeter ships from the factory with a GPIB primary address of 24 When the unit powers up it momentarily displays the primary address You can set the address to a value from 0 to 30 but do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the same GPIB bus controller addresses are usually 0 or 21 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 5 The primary address can be checked and or changed from the COMMUNICA TIONS option of the Main Menu Section 1 Main menu General bus commands General commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same gen eral meaning regardless of the instrument Table 14 1 lists the general bus com mands Table 14 1 General bus commands Command Effect on SourceMeter REN Goes into remote when next addressed to listen IFC Goes into talker and listener idle states LLO LOCAL key locked out GTL Cancel remote restore SourceMeter front panel operation DCL Returns all devices to known conditions SDC Returns SourceMeter to known conditions GET Initiates a trigger SPE SPD Serial polls the SourceMeter Front panel GPIB operation This section describes aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and st
39. 1 While in the normal display mode press CONFIG and then STORE to dis play the timestamp choices 2 Place the cursor on ABSOLUTE or DELTA and press ENTER 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Store 9 5 Buffer considerations From the front panel 2500 source measure readings can be stored and accessed using the method described earlier in this section Over the bus however there are actually two separate 2500 reading buffers for a total of 5000 readings The TRACe buffer is a 2500 reading buffer used by front panel data store bus TRACe commands and to store sweep data and it is battery backed up The READ buffer is a separate 2500 reading buffer that can only be accessed over the bus using the READ command Remote command data store Data store commands Table 9 1 summarizes commands associated with data store operation See Section 18 TRACe subsystem and CALCulate3 for more detailed information on these commands Table 9 1 Data store commands Command Description TRACe DATA TRACe CLEar TRACe FREE TRACe POINts lt n gt TRACe POINts AC Tual TRACe FEED lt name gt TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt TRACe TSTamp FORMat lt name gt CALCulate3 FORMat lt name gt CALCulate3 DATA Read contents of buffer Clear buffer Read buffer memory status Specify buffer size n buffer size Query number of stored readings Specify reading source Name SENSe 1
40. 1 on page 5 4 for details If the SourceMeter is configured to perform additional opera tions e g math calculations relative store sweep this time will be higher Pulse delay The pulse delay PD is set by the user It can be set from 0 to 9999 999sec The total output off time is the addition of the pulse delay auto zero measurement time and the minimum output off time of the instrument Pulse duty cycle Duty Cycle is the percentage of time during the pulse period that the output is on It is calculated as follows Duty Cycle Pulse Width Pulse Width Off time For example if the pulse width is 1msec and the off time is 9msec the duty cycle is calculated as follows 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 7 Duty Cycle 1msec 1msec 9msec 1msec 10msec 0 10 10 Based on the possible output on off times that can be configured the pulse duty cycle can range from lt 1 to 83 5 NOTE Pulse Duty Cycle on the 10A range should be limited to 8 for consistent pulses Please see Pulse energy limitations 10A range page 5 9 Fast pulse output The fastest pulses are achieved by configuring the SourceMeter for the shortest pulse width and shortest output off time This is accomplished by setting the mea surement speed to 0 004 PLC setting the pulse delay to Osec disabling auto zero and making sure that no other operations i e relative math calcul
41. 10 20 30 40 and so on The following vector math expression to calculate offset compen sated ohms demonstrates proper syntax calc math volt 1 volt O curr 1 curr 0 Notes 1 Use nested parentheses to force math operations that are imbedded in the calculation see example in Vectored math page 18 30 2 Acalculation expression can be up to 256 characters in length including parentheses and white spaces 3 When using the filter the measured readings used in the calcu lation are filtered NOT the result of the calculation 4 For vector math it is recommended that only the REPEAT filter be used For the repeat filter the calculations use only the fil tered readings of the vector points If you instead use the MOV ING filter each vector point will reflect the filtered average of all the previous readings in the vector array 5 The data format ASCII or binary for calculation results is selected using the FORMat DATA command See FORMat 18 32 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual subsystem page 18 47 The RST and SYSTem PRESet default is ASCII 6 When brackets are left out of an expression it is assumed that it is referencing the first vector point in the array i e VOLT is the same as VOLT O Enable and read math expression result STATe lt b gt CALCulate 1 STATe lt b gt Control CALC1 Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable CALC1 c
42. 105 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 3 15A or 105V MAXimum 3 15A or 105V 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Set l Source level amps 105 to 105 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 10 5A or 105V MAXimum 10 5A or 105V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 85 Query Description 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Set l Source level amps 42 to 42 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 5 25A or 42V MAXimum 5 25A or 42V STARt Query start level for sweep STARt DEFault Query RST default level STARt MINimum Query lowest allowable level STARt MAXimum Query highest allowable level STOP Query start level for sweep STOP DEFault Query RST default level STOP MINimum Query lowest allowable level STOP MAXimum Query highest allowable level These commands are used to specify the start and stop levels for a sweep If using a fixed manual source range the sweep will be per formed using a source range that will accommodate all source val ues Best Fixed Range You can use source auto range if sweeping through one or more source ranges When the sweep is started the source will output the specified start level and after the delay period of the SDM cycle a measurement is performed NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The delays in a Pulse Mode sweep are pulse width and pulse delay See Section 5 and Sec
43. 18 99 Likewise with BUSY enabled in the 4 bit mode the unit behaves if it were in 3 bit mode by ignoring all attempts to drive Digi tal I O line 4 BSTate lt b gt SOURce2 TTL4 BSTate lt b gt Control BUSY and EOT polarity Parameters lt b gt 1 Set EOT BUSYpolarity high Set EOT BUSY polarity low Query BSTate Query EOT BUSY polarity Description This command sets the polarity of the EOT or BUSY signal in the 3 bit mode BSIZe lt n gt SOURce2 BSIZe lt n gt Set Digital I O bit size Parameters lt n gt 3 Set 3 bit size 4 Set 4 bit size Query BSIZe Query Digital I O port bit size Description This command sets the Digital I O bit size to 3 or 4 In the 3 bit mode Digital I O line 4 becomes EOT EOT BUSY or BUSY based on the SOUR2 TTL4 MODE and SOUR2 TTL4 BST commands above In 4 bit mode Digital I O line 4 is controlled manually if SOUR2 TTL4 MODE is set to EOT If SOUR2 TTL4 MODE is set to BUSY operation is identical to the 3 bit mode 16 bit size is available with the 2499 DIGIO option Clearing digital output IMMediate SOURce2 CLEar IMMediate Clear digital output lines Description This action command is used to immediately restore the digital out put lines to the output pattern defined by the TTL LEVel command 18 100 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual AUTO lt b gt SOURce2 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto clear for digital output Parameters Query Descripti
44. 1nA to 1 05A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 210V 21V for 2400 LV and 2401 2410 Current limit can be set from 1nA to 1 05A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 1 1kV 2420 Current limit can be set from 10nA to 3 15A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 63V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode Current limit can be set from 10nA to 3 15A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 105V 2430 Pulse Mode Current limit can be set from 10nA to 10 5A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 105V 2440 Current limit can be set from 10nA to 5 25A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 42V NOTE For the following discussion measurement range refers to the mea surement function that is the opposite of the source function When sourcing voltage the current measurement range is the point of discus sion Conversely when sourcing current the voltage measurement range is the point of discussion Types of compliance There are two types of compliance real and range Depending upon which value is lower the output will clamp at either the displayed compliance setting real compliance or at the maximum possible compliance value for the fixed mea surement range range compliance This clamping action effectively limits the power that can be delivered to the device When the SourceMeter is acting as a current source the voltage is clamped at the compliance value co
45. 2425 and 2430 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only 3 165A DC mode 2425 and 2430 10 55A Pulse mode 2430 only Compliance limit When sourcing voltage the SourceMeter can be set to limit current Conversely when sourcing current the SourceMeter can be set to limit voltage The SourceM eter output will not exceed the compliance limit Table 3 2 summarizes compli ance limits according to range See Section 6 for more details on compliance limit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 7 Table 3 2 Compliance limits 2400 2400 LV 2401 2410 2420 Maximum Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 20V 21V 20V 21V 200V 210V 1000V 1 1kV 60V 63V 1pA 1 05yA 14A 1 05uA 10yuA 10 5pA 10A 10 5pA 10A 10 5pA 100A 105yA 100A 105yA 100A 105yA 1mA 1 05mA 1mA 1 05mA 1mA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 20mA 21mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 3 15A 2425 2430 2440 Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 10V 10 5V 100V 105V 40V 42V 10A 10 5pA 10A 10 5pA 100A 105yA 100uA 105yA 1mA 1 05mA 1mA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 1
46. 603 Power on state lost EE Standard Event 3 604 DC calibration data lost EE Standard Event 3 605 Calibration dates lost EE Standard Event 3 606 GPIB communication language lost EE Standard Event 3 Communication errors 700 Invalid system communication EE Standard Event 3 701 ASCII only with RS 232 EE Standard Event 3 Additional command execution errors Illegal with storage active 800 Insufficient vector data EE Standard Event 4 801 OUTPUT blocked by output enable EE Standard Event 4 802 Not permitted with OUTPUT off EE Standard Event 4 803 Expression list full EE Standard Event 4 804 Undefined expression exists EE Standard Event 4 805 Expression not found EE Standard Event 4 806 Definition not allowed EE Standard Event 4 807 Expression cannot be deleted EE Standard Event 4 808 Source memory location revised EE Standard Event 4 809 OUTPUT blocked by Over Temp EE Standard Event 4 810 EE Standard Event 4 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 7 Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 811 Not an operator or number EE Standard Event 4 812 Mismatched parenthesis EE Standard Event 4 813 Not a number of data handle EE Standard Event 4 814 Mismatched brackets EE Standard Event 4 815 Too many parenthesis EE Standard Event 4 816 Entire expression not parsed EE Standard Event 4 817 Unknown token EE Standard Event 4 8
47. 8 Data to Talk 8 Lines DAV NRFD Handshake NDAC IFC ATN Bus SRQ Management REN EO 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 5 Bus lines The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and commands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts representing a logic 1 true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses eight data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bidirectional The data lines operate with low true logic Bus management lines The five bus management lines help to ensure proper interface control and man agement These lines are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN line is one of the more important management lines The state of this line determines how information on the data bus is to be inter preted IFC Interface Clear As the name implies the IFC line controls clearing of instruments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to place the instrument on the bus in the remote mode EOI End or Identif
48. 9 of digital I O port to simulate closed switch 14 Remote Operations Differences remote vs local operation Summarizes remote opera tion enhancements and local to remote and remote to local transitions Selecting an interface Describes how to select between the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces GPIB operation Covers GPIB bus standards bus connections and pri mary address selection General bus commands Describes general bus commands used for fundamental GPIB control Front panel GPIB operation Summarizes GPIB error messages status indicators and using the LOCAL key Programming syntax Describes the basic programming syntax for both common and SCPI commands RS 232 interface operation Outlines use of the RS 232 interface to control the SourceMeter via remote 14 2 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Differences remote vs local operation Operation enhancements remote operation There are some source measure operations you can do over the IEEE 488 bus and RS 232 interface that you cannot do from the front panel these are summa rized below Math expressions There are five math expressions available from the panel All except the Percent Deviation are available as pre defined math expressions for remote operation However remote operation allows you to create up to five user defined math expressions for a total of nine expressions An example program shows how t
49. Auto Off to generate very quick pulsed voltage waveforms For example with Output Auto Off enabled you can generate 0 to 5V pulses While in this relatively low impedance output off state the SourceMeter will be able to quickly dissipate sink current caused by high input capacitance i e cable capacitance or an external source This results in fast settling time If you instead used the NORMAL output off state for this application current would dissipate very slowly slow set tling time resulting in distorted pulses WARNING Hazardous voltages 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when generating quick pulsed waveforms using the ZERO AUTO OFF output state To elimi nate this shock hazard connect the LO terminal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connection can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 13 11 GUARD With this output off state the current source is selected and set to 0A Voltage compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range This output off state should be used when performing 6 wire guarded ohms measurements or for any other load that uses an active source NOTE When changing the output
50. CLIM PASS SOUR2 1 CALC2 LIM2 UPP SOUR2 2 CALC2 LIM2 LOW SOUR2 2 CALC2 LIM3 UPP SOUR2 3 CALC2 LIM3 LOW SOUR2 3 CALC2 CLIM BCON IMM CALC2 LIM1 STAT 0 CALC2 LIM2 STAT 1 CALC2 LIM3 STAT 1 OUTPUT ON INIT OUTP OFF CALC2 LIM2 FAIL CALC2 LIM3 FAIL Volts sense function Output 100mA when triggered 100ms source delay Use voltage for limits comparison Limit 2 upper value 0 85V Limit 2 lower value 0 75V Limit 3 upper value 0 82V Limit 3 lower value 0 78V Digital I O port 0001 1 when test passes Digital I O port 0010 2 when upper Limit 2 fails Digital I O port 0010 2 when lower Limit 2 fails Digital I O port 0011 3 when upper Limit 3 fails Digital I O port 0011 3 when lower Limit 3 fails Update Digital I O port immediately after test Turn off Limit 1 test Turn on Limit 2 test Turn on Limit 3 test Turn on source output Trigger reading and limits test Turn off output Query Limit 2 test results 1 discard diode Query Limit 3 test results 1 send diode to QA 12 23 13 Digital VO Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration e Digital I O port Discusses the various input output lines on the Digital O Port as well as the 5V line that can be used to power external logic cir cuits NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port Since the Model 2401 does not have a handler interface it cannot
51. DIRection lt name gt Control arm bypass TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure DIRection lt name gt Control trigger bypass Parameters lt name gt SOURce Enable control source bypass ACCeptor Disable control source bypass Query DIRection Query state of bypass Description This command is used to enable SOURCe or disable ACCeptor control source bypass When enabled operation will loop around the control source on the first pass in the layer After that repeat passes in the layer are held up and will wait for the programmed control source event INPut lt event list gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure ASYNchronous INPut lt event list gt Enable event detectors Parameters lt event list gt SOURceEnable Source Event Detector DELayEnable Delay Event Detector SENSeEnable Measure Event Detector NONEDisable all event detectors in Trigger Layer NOTE Each event in the list must be separated by a comma i e trigger input source delay sense Query INPut Query enabled event detectors in Trigger Layer Description When TLINk is the selected Trigger Layer control source and an event detector in the Trigger Layer is enabled operation will hold up at that detector until an input trigger is received via the Trigger Link When the event detector is disabled operation will not hold up It continues and performs the appropriate action A Trigger Layer event detector is enabled by including the parameter name in the event l
52. Enabled message and the filter count are briefly displayed The FILT annunciator is on while the filter is enabled Pressing FILTER a second time disables filter 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 11 Figure 7 1 Moving average and repeating filters Conversion Conversion eee Reading Reading Reading 1 2 3 Conversion Conversion 10 9 8 1 l Reading Reading 10 11 Conversion Conversion A Type Moving Average Readings 10 Conversion 10 Conversion Conversion 30 9 8 1 Reading Reading Reading 1 2 3 3 2 Conversion 1 Conversion Conversion 21 B Type Repeating Readings 10 Response time The filter parameters have speed and accuracy trade offs for the time needed to display store or output a filtered reading These affect the number of reading con versions for speed versus accuracy and response to input signal changes Figure 7 2 Filter configuration menu tree CONFIG FILTER AVERAGE MODE REPEAT Remote filter programming AVERAGE COUNT Filter commands Table 7 4 summarizes filter commands See Section 18 SENSe1 subsystem Configure and control filter for more details Table 7 4 Filter commands Command Description SENSe AVERage TCONtrol lt type gt Select filter type type REPeat or MOVing SENSe AVERage COUNt lt n gt Set filter count n count 1 to 100 SENSe AVERage lt state
53. Figure 11 7 Trigger link output pulse specifications Meter Complete TTL High 3 84V typical when sink current lt 4mA TTL Low 0 33V typical when current source is lt 4mA Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 Triggering for the Model 2430 is similar to triggering for the DC Mode However in order to accomplish fast pulse output triggering is simplified for the Pulse Mode The following information covers the triggering differences between the DC Mode and Pulse Mode Trigger models The front panel trigger model for the Pulse Mode is shown in Figure 11 8 while the trigger model for remote operation is shown in Figure 11 9 These trigger mod els are simplified versions of their DC Mode counterparts Figure 11 1 and Figure 11 3 NOTE The following trigger model information assumes that you are already familiar with the basic DC Mode trigger model operation presented earlier in this section 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 21 Figure 11 8 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model front panel operation Idle Bypass Arm Event No Detector 2 Immediate Never rom oe Counter Arm a 1 Layer Manual e A Stest NUStest Arm Out Event gt On Off WUStest Cor ome MMMM once er aa M p a aM a aa ee ee eo Trigger Layer Another Trigger Trigger Counter 1 Immediate Tri Trigger Link oo Source 0 0 sec Trigger In Source rigger In Source
54. MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 5 25 to 5 25 42 to 42 DEFault MINimum SCPI Command Reference Set current compliance Set voltage compliance Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 1 05A 210V 1 05A 210V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 1 05A 21V 1 05A 21V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 1 05A 1100V 1 05A 1100V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 3 15A 63V 3 15A 63V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 3 15A 105V 3 15A 105V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 10 5A 105V 10 5A 105V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 5 25A 42V 18 68 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual MAXimum 5 25A 42V Query LEVel Query compliance value LEVel DEFault Query RST default compliance LEVel MINimum Query minimum allowable compliance LEVel MAXimum Query maximum allowable compliance Description This command is used to set compliance limits A current compliance limit is set for the V Source and a voltage compliance limit is set for the I Source The SourceMeter cannot source levels that exceed these specified limits The SENSe CURRent PROTection LIMit command is used to set th
55. MEMory INITialize Initializes battery backed RAM Description When this command is used the following actions to initialize battery Control beeper backed RAM occur TRACe data store data is lost buffer size is reset to 100 and timestamp is set to the absolute format e SOURce1 LIST CURR and VOLT are reset to OA and OV respectively e Deletes all user defined math expressions See CALCulate 1 subsystem e All 100 memory locations for a memory sweep are initialized to the present setup configuration of the SourceMeter with CALC 1 disabled User defined math expressions are replaced with the Power math expression e The four standard save setups SAVO SAV4 are initialized to the present setup configuration of the SourceMeter e All CALCulate1 user defined math expressions are deleted MMediate lt freq time gt SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate lt freq time gt Parameters freq 65 to 2e6 Specify frequency in Hz time 0 to 7 9 Specify time duration NOTE The frequency and time values must be separated by a comma i isyst beep 100 3 Description The beeper of the SourceMeter can be used to provide an audible signal at a specified frequency and time duration up to 7 9 seconds 65Hz This beeper can for example be used to signal the end of a lengthy sweep Example SYSTem BEEPer500 1 Beep at 500Hz for 1 second The correlation between the duration and frequency of the beep is expressed
56. Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 39 FAIL lt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 FAIL Read LIMIT 1 test result CALCulate2 LIMitx FAIL Read LIMIT x test result x 2 3 5 12 Description These commands are used to read the results of LIMIT 1 LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests 0 Limit test passed 1 Limit test failed The response message 0 or 1 only tells you if a limit test has passed or failed For Limit 2 Limit 3 and Limit 5 12 it does not tell you which limit upper or lower has failed To determine which limit has failed you will have to read the Measurement Event Register See STATus subsystem page 18 101 Reading the results of a limit test does not clear the fail indication of the test A failure can be cleared by using a CLEar command Composite testing PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt NDN CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify composite pass pattern NOTE The above command to set the composite pass pattern for the Model 2401 is invalid and will cause an undefined header error Parameters Query Description lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt 0 to b111 3 bit Binary value O to 61111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value SOURce2 Query programmed source value This command is used to define the 3
57. Math commands Command Description CALCulate MATH NAME lt name gt CALCulate STATe lt state gt CALCulate DATA Select match expression name POWER OFFCOMPOHM VOLTCOEF VARALPHA Enable disable math state ON or OFF Query math data User defined math functions In addition to the pre defined math functions you can also define your own func tions by using appropriate remote commands user defined math functions are not available from the front panel The following paragraphs summarize the basic commands for user defined functions and also list a basic programming example See Section 18 Calculate subsystems for more details on user defined math functions Commands for user defined math functions Table 8 4 summarizes the commands for user defined math functions To define a math function 1 If desired assign units to the calculation result using CALC MATH UNIT Units is stored for the calculation 2 Assign a name to the expression using up to 10 ASCII characters using the CALC MATH NAME user name command 3 Define the expression using the CALC MATH DEFine or CALC MATH EXPRession command The new expression is the one that will be presently selected 4 Enable the math function by sending CALC STATE ON 5 Turn on the output by sending OUTP ON then send INIT to trigger the unit 6 Request the data with the CALC DATA query 8 8 R
58. NPLC caching CONT CHK Enable disable contact check DISABLE Disable contact check ENABLE Enable contact check select 2Q 15Q or 50Q resis tance CONFIG TRIG Configure triggering CONFIGURE TRIGGER ARM LAYER Configure arm layer TRIG LAYER Configure trigger layer HALT Return to idle CONTACT CHECK Configure contact check event detection DISABLE Disable contact check event detection ENABLE Enable contact check event detection program con CONFIG SOURCE V or CONFIG MEAS Q SENSE MODE 2 WIRE 4 WIRE tact check timeout 0 00000 to 999 99990 Configure 4 wire sense mode for contact check Select sense mode 2 wire sensing 4 wire sensing use for contact check See Section 1 for complete menu listings Factory defaults shown in boldface Using contact check and Section 11 and Section 12 for triggering and limit tests 1 Make connections to the DUT Figure F 2 2 Press the MENU key select A D CTRL then choose CONT CHK and press ENTER 3 Select ENABLE then press ENTER 4 Atthe CONT CHK RESISTANCE prompt select the desired contact check threshold resistance 2Q 15Q or 50Q then press ENTER See Table F 1 for recommendations 5 Use EXIT to back out of the menu structure 6 Press CONFIG then Q then select SENSE MODE and press ENTER Alternately you can press CONFIG V SOURCE and select SENSE MODE or 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 13 g by pressin
59. PATTERN then press ENTER Set the output fail pattern as desired for when the contact check Limit 4 fails O to 7 3 bit or O to 15 4 bit Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display Press LIMIT to enable limit testing and observe the display for a PASS or FAIL message when the contact check passes or fails respectively F 14 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote contact check operation Contact check remote commands Table F 3 summarizes contact check remote commands Commands specific to contact check operation are covered in detail later in this appendix while remain ing commands are covered in Section 18 Table F 3 Contact check remote commands Command Description OPT SOURce2 BSIZe 3 4 BSIZe CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE GRADING SORTING MODE BCONtrol IMMEDIATE END BCONtrol LIMit4 STATe ON OFF Queries installed options Response message indicates the presence or absence of options For example 0 No options present CONTACT CHECK Contact check board present Set digital I O port bit size 3 or 4 Query bit size of digital I O port Selects limit testing mode grading or sorting Figure F 4 and Figure F 5 Query limit testing mode Selects binning control for grading mode immediate at fail ure or end of sweep Query binning control mode Bit 10 of the Measurement Event Register represents the result of the LIM
60. Parameters Query Description STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 LIMitx STATe lt b gt Parameters Query Description lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit 0 to b111 3 bit O to 61111 4 bit 0 to q7 3 bit 0 to q17 4 bit 0 to h7 3 bit O to hF 4 bit lt NDN gt SOURce2 Decimal value Decimal value Binary value Binary value Octal value Octal value Hexadecimal value Hexadecimal value Query programmed source value This command is used to define the 3 bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when a test limit 2 3 5 12 for the sorting mode passes Note that the output value can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal format Use the table provided in the Description for the SOURce command to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern Control LIMIT 1 test Control LIMIT x test x 2 3 5 12 lt b gt 1 or ON Enable specified limit test 0 or OFF Disable specified limit test STATe Query state of specified limit test These commands are used to enable or disable LIMIT 1 LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests Any limit test not enabled is simply not performed When a limit test is enabled the Digital I O port comes under control of limit tests That is the result of the testing process updates the output pattern on the I O port 2400 Series SourceMeter User s
61. See Section 3 NPLC caching for details Current range holdoff Current range holdoff adds the ability to speed up low current measurements when sourcing voltage and measuring current This feature is only available when doing source memory sweeps It will momentarily set the measure range to the compliance range to overcome the effects of capacitance by quickly charging the capacitance on the higher range but return to the lower measurement range to obtain a good low current measurement This avoids being limited by range com pliance which would require either a longer delay time or having to take the mea surement on a higher current range This feature is available only by remote but both parameters are saved for each memory location 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 7 Sweep configuration The user specifies the number of memory location points to sweep and where to start the sweep For example you can specify a six point sweep that starts at memory location 98 When the sweep is started the setups at memory location points 98 99 100 1 2 and 3 are recalled When sweeping past point 100 the sweep automatically wraps back to memory location point 1 The default and typi cal scenario is starting the source memory sweep at location 1 NOTE These and other components of the sweep are configured from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu See Configuring and running a sweep later in this section Setups
62. TTL 5 Table 13 1 Digital output line settings Decimal OUT 4 OUT3 OUT 2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V 0 7 in 3 bit mode which is controlled by CONFIG LIMIT menu See Section 12 0 65535 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option 13 6 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output enable line NOTE The output enable line can be used by all Series 2400 SourceMeters The digital I O port provides an output enable line for use with a test fixture output enable switch When properly used the OUTPUT of the SourceMeter will turn OFF when the lid of the test fixture is opened See Section 2 Connections for important safety information when using the test fixture switch When the output enable is turned on see Front panel output configuration page 13 7 the output of the SourceMeter cannot be turned on unless the output enable line is pulled low through a switch to ground as shown in Figure 13 4A If the lid of the test fixture opens Figure 13 4B the switch opens and the output enable line goes high turning the OUTPUT of the SourceMeter OFF high imped ance The output can only be turned back on by first closing the lid of the test fix ture and the
63. UPPer SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX PASS SOURce2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 95 where X 2 3 and 5 through 12 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation TRIGger DELay Model 2430 in DC Mode Contact check commands Appendix F After saving the desired setups in consecutive memory locations unless branching see CALC2 CLIM PASS SML use the POINts command to specify how many sweep points to perform and the STARt command to specify where to start from POINts lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory POINts lt NRf gt Specify number of sweep points to execute Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Number of sweep points Description This command is used to specify the number of points for the sweep For example if you saved setups in memory locations 1 through 12 for a sweep specify a 12 point sweep using this command STARt lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory STARt lt NRf gt Select Source Memory Sweep start location Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command is used to set the starting location of a Source Mem ory Sweep For example for setups saved in memory locations 98 through 5 specify a starting location of 98 RECall lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory RECall lt NRf gt Return to specified setup Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command
64. User s Manual Set measurement speed NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 VOLTage DC NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Parameters lt n gt 0 01 to 10 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 01 to 0 1 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Query NPLCycles NPLCycles DEFault NPLCycles MINimum NPLCycles MAXimum SCPI Command Reference 18 69 Set speed PLC Set speed PLC Set speed PLC Power line cycles per integration 1 0 01 10 Power line cycles per integration 0 1 0 01 0 1 Query programmed PLC value Query RST default PLC Query minimum PLC Query maximum PLC Description This command is used to set the integration period speed for mea surements NPLC Number of Power Line Cycles expresses the integration period by basing it on the power line frequency For example for a PLC of 1 the integration period would be 1 60 for 60Hz line power which is 16 67 msec Note that this is a global command Thus if you set the speed for voltage measurements to 10 PLC then current and resistance will also set to 10 PLC NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode speed can be set from 0 004 to 0 100 PLC 18 70 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configure and control filter NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode filtering is not used Therefore the follow ing filter commands are not valid for t
65. ZERO Zero output off state GUARd Guard output off state Query SMODe Query output off mode Description This command is used to select the output off state of the SourceMe ter With HIMPedance selected the output relay opens when the source is turned off This disconnects external circuitry from the SourceMeter Input Output NOTE To prevent excessive wear on the output relay do not use the HIMPedance mode for tests that turn the output on and off frequently 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 57 With NORMal selected the V Source is selected and set to OV when the output is turned off Compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range In the ZERO output off state when the V Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is set to OV and current compliance is not changed When the I Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source mode is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to the programmed Source value or to 0 5 full scale of the present current range whichever is greater The ZERO output off state is typically used with the V Source and Output Auto On see the SOURce1 CLEar AUTO command to gen erate voltage waveforms that alternate between OV and the pro grammed output on voltage With GUARd selected the I Source is selected and set to OA Volt age compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range This output off state should be used when performing 6 wire
66. allows you to make accurate resis tance measurements on resistor networks and hybrid devices in cases where internal resistance connection nodes are not accessible The combination of 4 wire Kelvin connections and guarded ohms features eliminates the effects of inter nal parallel resistances that could degrade measurement accuracy and reduce measurement speed The basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for 6 wire ohms measurements is covered below NOTE See Figure 2 5C for 6 wire ohms connections See also Section 2 n SOE ANOaARWN gt Ohms guard and Section 6 Guard Press CONFIG then Qto display the CONFIG OHMS menu Select SENSE MODE then press ENTER Select 4 WIRE then press ENTER From the CONFIG OHMS menu select GUARD then press ENTER Select OHMS then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display Press MEAS then Qto select the ohms measurement function Select the appropriate measurement range or use autoranging if desired Turn on the output by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Take readings from the display Turn the output off when done by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 13 Remote ohms programming The following paragraphs summarize those basic commands necessary for remote ohms programming and also give a programming example for a typical ohms measurement situation Remote ohms commands Table 4 2 summariz
67. also resets to 0 seconds every time the Source Meter is turned on Auto reset timestamp RESet AUTO lt b gt SYSTem TIME RESet AUTO lt b gt Reset timestamp when exiting idle Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto timestamp reset 0 or OFF Disable auto timestamp reset Query AUTO Query enabled disabled auto timestamp reset state Description RES AUTO enables or disables auto timestamp reset When enabled the timestamp will be automatically reset when exiting the idle layer of the trigger model This command is intended for use with READ INIT when taking more than one reading Auto range change mode RCMode lt name gt SYSTem RCMode lt name gt Control auto range change mode Parameters lt name gt SINGle Single mode MULTiple Multiple mode Query RCMode Query auto range change mode Description This command controls the auto range change mode In the SINGle mode the SourceMeter will auto range only after first taking a read ing In the MULTiple mode the SourceMeter will auto range up on compliance in the Delay phase of the Source Delay Measure cycle thereby minimizing the chance of a SourceMeter being in compliance in a multiple SourceMeter system A SourceMeter can downrange only once a reading has been taken In the MULTiple mode you can control the soak time using the SOUR SOAK command See SOURce subsystem Note that you can use the LLIMIT and ULIMIT commands to control auto range limits See SENSe1 sub s
68. and device action and front panel trigger configuration Remote trigger operation Details the remote trigger model and sum marizes trigger commands Trigger link Discusses the trigger link including input triggers and output triggers Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 Explains the triggering differ ences between the DC Mode and Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 11 2 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel trigger operation Front panel trigger model NOTE For the Model 2430 the following discussion on the trigger model per tains explicitly to the DC Mode of operation The trigger model operates a little differently for the Pulse Mode These differences are covered in Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 later in this section NOTE For instruments with the contact check option see Appendix F for details on trigger operation The flowchart in Figure 11 1 summarizes triggering for front panel operation The trigger model is modeled after the remote commands used to control triggering See Remote trigger commands page 11 18 Key trigger model settings are included in the flowchart Note that the BENCH defaults are denoted by the symbol The primary actions of the trigger model are Source Delay and Measure The source action outputs the programmed voltage or current value and the pro grammed delay provides a settling period for the source before the measurement is performe
69. and trade names are the property of their respective companies KENT HLEY A GREATER MEAS URE O F CONFIDENCE Keithley Instruments Inc Corporate Headquarters 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY www keithley com 12 06
70. are cleared reset to 0 and the two queues are empty Commands to reset the event and event enable registers and the Error Queue are listed in Table 15 1 In addition to these commands any enable register can be reset by sending the 0 parameter value with the individual command to program the register NOTE SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on status structure registers and queues Table 15 1 Common and SCPI commands to reset registers and clear queues Commands Description Ref To Reset Registers CLS Reset all bits of the following event registers to 0 Note 1 Standard Event Register Operation Event Register Measurement Event Register Questionable Event Register STATus PRESet Reset all bits of the following enable registers to 0 Note 1 Operation Event Enable Register Measurement Event Enable Register Questionable Event Enable Register To Clear Error Queue CLS Clear all messages from Error Queue Note 2 STATus QUEue CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Note 3 SYSTem ERRor CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Note 3 Notes 1 The Standard Event Enable Register is not reset by STATus PRESet or CLS Send the 0 param eter value with ESE to reset all bits of that enable register to 0 see Status byte and service request commands page 15 10 2 STATus PRESet has no effect on the Error Queue 3 Use either of the two clear commands to clear the Error Queue 2400 Series SourceM
71. are enabled 18 60 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual ALL SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON ALL Enable all measurement functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF ALL Disable all measurement functions Description This command is used to enable or disable all measurement func tions When enabled ON ALL amps volts and ohms measurements will be performed simultaneously if concurrent measurements are enabled See CONCurrent lt b gt page 18 58 If concurrent mea surements are disabled only the ohms function will be enabled The OFF ALL command disables all measurements NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode only one function can be enabled Sending FUNCtion ALL results in error 831 COUNt SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON COUNt Query number of functions enabled SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF COUNt Query number of functions disabled Description This query command is used to determine the number of functions that are enabled or disabled When ON COUNt is sent the response message will indicate the number of functions that are enabled When OFF COUNt is sent the response message will indicate the number of functions that are disabled STATe lt name gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion STATe lt name gt Query state of specified function Parameters lt name gt CURRent DC Amps measurement function VOLTage DC Volts measurement function RESistance Ohms measurement function NOTE The function name m
72. are listed in Table 15 3 Serial polling and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set bit B6 and generate an SRQ service request In your test program you can periodically read the Sta tus Byte to check if an SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for example branch to an appropriate subroutine that will ser vice the request Typically SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the SourceMeter If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the Status Byte Register will remain cleared and the program will simply proceed normally after the serial poll is per formed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the Status Byte Register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the Status Byte Register This allows subsequent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all Status Byte summary bits are reset SPE SPD serial polling The SPE SPD General Bus Command sequence is used to serial poll the SourceMeter Serial polling obtains the serial poll byte status byte Typically serial polling is used by the controller to determine which of sever
73. are saved in battery backed up memory and they remain and can be recalled even if the SourceMeter looses external power Saving and restoring source memory setups Source memory setups are saved in memory and restored from the SAVESETUP SOURCE MEMORY option of the MAIN MENU See Section 1 Main menu NOTE Source memory setups are different from the power on and user defined setups which are programmed from the SAVESETUP GLOBAL MAIN MENU option See Section 1 for details Saving source memory setups Perform the following steps to save source memory setups 1 Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure and or math expression operation 2 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU e Select SAVESETUP e Select SOURCE MEMORY e Select SAVE e Use the SOURCE arrow keys and the cursor keys to display the desired memory location and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure 3 Configure the SourceMeter for the next point in the sweep and repeat Step 2 to save that setup in the next memory location 4 Repeat Step 3 for all points in the sweep 10 8 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Restoring source memory setups In addition to automatically sweeping through source memory locations see Configuring and running a sweep later in this section you can also recall them individually as follows 1 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU Select SAVESETUP t
74. as follows Maximum Time 512 Frequency For example at a frequency of 512Hz the maximum beep time is one second You can set the time greater than one 1 second but it will only beep for one second Note that in order to use this command the beeper must be enabled See next command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 107 STATe lt b gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable beeper 0 or OFF Disable beeper Query STATe Query state of beeper Description This command is used to enable or disable the beeper When Control auto zero enabled a short beep is provided to signal that a front panel key has been pressed STATe lt name gt SYSTem AZERo STATe lt name gt Control auto zero Parameters lt name gt ON Enable auto zero OFF Disable auto zero ONCE Force immediate auto zero update Query STATe Query state of auto zero Description This command is used to enable or disable auto zero or to force an immediate one time auto zero update if auto zero is disabled When auto zero is enabled accuracy is optimized When auto zero is dis abled speed is increased at the expense of accuracy Control NPLC caching CACHing SYSTem AZERo CACHing STATe lt b gt Enable disable NPLC caching SYSTem AZERo CACHing REFResh Update NPLC cache values SYSTem AZERo CACHing RESet Clear NPLC values from cache SYSTem AZERo CACHing NPLCycles Return l
75. automatically performed for the memory locations using 4 wire remote sense but not for loca tions using 2 wire local sense 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 7 Limit test sequence When enabled the contact check limit test Limit 4 is performed before all other limit tests as shown in Figure F 3 Figure F 4 shows a flowchart for grading mode limit testing with contact check limit testing enabled while Figure F 5 shows a flowchart for sorting mode limit testing again with contact check limit testing enabled See Section 12 for complete details on other limit tests Figure F 3 Contact check limit test sequence Limit 4 Test Pass or Fail on Contact Check Contact Check Limit 1 Test Pass or Fail on Compliance Compliance Limit 2 Test Coarse Limits Limit 3 5 12 Tests Fine Limits F 8 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure F 4 Grading mode contact check limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Wait for SOT pulse from handler Perform Contact Check Perform Source Measure action Yes No Binnin Immediate Output Limit 4 5 Control Fail Pattern Pattern in Memory No Yes No Display Immediate Output Limit 1 FAIL Fail Pattern aS Yes End Yes imi Store Limit 1 Fail Pattern in Memory No Immediate Binnin Control Output Limit 2 3 5 12 Fail Pattern Store Limit 2 3 5 12 Fai
76. be used until you go back into the DC Mode See Section 11 for details on triggering For remote oper ation the delay set by TRIGger DELay lt n gt is ignored in the Pulse Mode Input triggers In the DC Mode you can enable the source delay or measure input event detec tors See Section 11 for details on triggering In the pulse mode you can enable the source delay or measure input event detectors However these event detectors do not correlate to source delay and measure actions as in DC mode In pulse mode all three event detectors occur prior to the pulse action Please refer to Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 page 11 20 for more details Output triggers In the DC Mode you can configure the SourceMeter to output a trigger after the source delay and or measure operation See Section 11 for details on triggering In pulse mode you can enable the source delay and or measure output triggers The source and delay triggers occur consecutively at the start of the pulse output This was synchronized beginning with firmware revision C27 Prior to this revi sion the source and delay output triggers would occur before the source action In all firmware revisions the measure output trigger occurs after the pulse action has been completed Please refer to Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 page 11 20 for more details Auto output off For the DC Mode with auto output off enabled the output will turn on at th
77. ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees F 11 Menu SCIECHONS i cascastsnsadatidessaadkivessaaiadatenteanccaceasnelacteas sseaduees F 11 Using contact check cccccececcccceeeesecceeeeeseeceeeeensneeeeeeenssaes F 12 Remote contact check operation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees F 14 Contact check remote Commands ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee F 14 Contact check programming example ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee F 15 Contact check command reference ceeceeeeeeeeeeetteeteees F 17 Configure and control contact check eeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteee F 17 Configure and control contact check limit test F 17 Configure and control contact check event detection F 19 Contact check defaults cecceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneaeeeeeeeeeeeeees F 20 Introduction arcticeatee seis ctl Dean nnadddeas ia a a a Aa ia G 2 Selecting the 488 1 protocol aaessseesssssssessssesessrrssrsnnneessennaeseens G 2 Protocol differentes sa sieccsdandscccd vended cecssnrncdadiaraadaceedevaundsteanmvanaceedss G 3 Message exchange protocol MEP sesser G 3 Using SCPl based programs ececccceeeeesceeeeeeeettteeeeeeeeaaes G 4 NRE DO hold of oss secccctess ocen cdectsecesatesssacundacachecceddesthaceiddensncancesca G 4 NDAG NOId Off ccosscsatstiavvas donissssatndtiesued daveusisausacdsaisadartiaavandianes G 4 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggeron talk ssccutenc
78. center to be 10V and the span to be 4 volts 12 8 Use the STEP or POINts command to specify the number of source measure points in the sweep CENTer and SPAN are coupled to STARt and STOP Thus when center and span values are changed the values for start and stop are affected as follows Start Center Span 2 Stop Center Span 2 Query center point for sweep Query RST default level Query lowest allowable level Query highest allowable level Query span for sweep Query RST default level Query lowest allowable level Query highest allowable level Specify step size current sweep Specify step size voltage sweep 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 Set l Source level amps 420 to 420 Set V Source level volts 42 to 42 2400 LV and 2401 DEFault OA or OV MINimum 2 1A or 420V 42V 2400 LV and 2401 MAXimum 2 1A or 420V 42V 2400 LV and 2401 2410 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 Set l Source level amps 2200 to 2200 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 2 1A or 2200V MAXimum 2 1A or 2200V 18 88 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query Description 2420 lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 Set l Source level amps 128 to 128 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 6 3A or 128V MAXimum 6 3A or 128V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 Set l Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV
79. compensation Description This command is used to enable or disable offset compensated ohms When using the auto ohms measurement mode the current source level is automatically set When using the manual ohms mea surement mode you must set the source V or I output level See Section 4 Offset compensated ohms for details on making offset compensated ohms measurements NOTE _ Offset compensated ohms will disable when the MEASure command for the resistance function or the CONFigure RESistance command is sent NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms cannot be enabled using this command Sending this command results in error 831 18 62 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select measurement range Notes 1 You cannot select a current measurement range if sourcing current Con versely you cannot select a voltage measurement range if sourcing voltage Also autorange cannot be enabled for those source measure configurations The programmed source range determines measurement range You cannot select an ohms measurement range if in manual ohms you must be in auto ohms The highest current measurement range that can be selected is limited by the current compliance range For example if current compliance is set for 5 0mA 100mA range then the highest available current measurement range is 100mA Similarly the highest voltage measurement range is limited by the volt age
80. compliance range Measurement range limitations 2400 With the 200V source range selected the highest current measure ment range is 100mA With the 1A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2400 LV and 2401 With the 20V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the highest volt age measurement range is 20V 2410 With the 1kV source range selected the highest current measurement range is 20mA With the 1A or 100mA source range selected the highest volt age measurement range is 20V 2420 With the 60V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the highest voltage measure ment range is 60V With the 3A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode With the 100V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the high est voltage measurement range is 100V With the 3A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2430 Pulse Mode With the 100V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 10A With the 10A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 100V Auto range cannot be used in the Pulse Mode 2440 With the 40V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range
81. display oeUa Auto clear timing The following timing diagram example Figure 12 9 and discussion explain the relationship between the digital output lines for auto clear Figure 12 9 Digital output auto clear timing example SOT OO BUSY Line 1 lt Meas gt i i Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 10 k Del k 10 EOT ps elay ps With the SOT line being pulsed low as shown STEST must be the selected event for the trigger model If the SOT line is instead pulsed high by the handler T STEST must be the selected arm event For high or low pulses select T STEST Initially the four digital output lines are cleared in this case they are all set high Limit tests start when the start of test SOT pulse is received from the component handler When the testing process is finished the pass or fail pattern is applied to the digital output As shown in the diagram lines 2 3 and 4 go low while line 1 remains high 12 16 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The pulse width delay of the pass fail pattern can be set from 0 to 60sec 10usec resolution as required by the component handler Note that the delay specifies the pulse width of line 4 The pulse width of lines 1 2 and 3 is actually 20sec longer Line 4 is skewed because it is used as the end of test EOT strobe by cat egory register component handlers Lines 1 2 and 3 establish the bit pattern an
82. e SCPI subsystems Provides detailed information on all commands in each SCPI subsystem 18 2 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Reference tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 summarize the commands for each SCPI subsystem The following list includes the SCPI subsystem table number where each command is summarized and the page number where detailed reference information begins Summary table Subsystem Reference page Table 18 1 CALCulate page 18 26 Table 18 2 DISPlay page 18 44 Table 18 3 FORMat page 18 47 Table 18 4 OUTPut page 18 55 Table 18 5 ROUTe page 18 57 Table 18 6 SENSe page 18 58 Table 18 7 SOURCce page 18 71 Table 18 8 STATus page 18 101 Table 18 9 SYSTem page 18 103 Table 18 10 TRACe page 18 114 Table 18 11 TRIGger page 18 116 Invalid CALCulate2 commands for the Model 2401 are listed in Table 12 2 All SOURce2 commands are invalid for the Model 2401 and are listed in Table 12 3 They will cause undefined header errors General notes Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional char acters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the program message Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message The Boolean parameter lt b gt is used to enable or disable an instrument opera tion 1 or ON enables the operation and 0
83. each buffer reading TRIGger subsystem The Trigger subsystem is made up of a series of commands and subsystems to con figure the Trigger Model These commands and subsystems are summarized in Table 18 11 NOTE See Section 11 Triggering for more details on triggering and the trigger model Clear input triggers CLEar TRIGger CLEar Clear pending input triggers Description When this action command is sent any pending latched input trig gers are cleared immediately When the SourceMeter is being trig gered by another instrument it may inadvertently receive and latch input triggers that do not get executed These pending triggers could adversely affect subsequent operation When using external triggering it is recommended that TRIG ger CLEar be sent after sending the ABORt command and at the beginning of a program before sending an initiate command See INITiate command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 117 Initiate source measure cycle INITiate INITiate IMMediate Take SourceMeter out of idle state Description This command is used to initiate source measure operation by taking the SourceMeter out of idle The READ and MEASure com mands also perform an initiation Note that if auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF the source output must first be turned on before an initiation can be performed The MEASure command automatically turns the output source
84. for this quadrant of operation The operating point can be anywhere inside or on these limit lines The limit line boundaries for the other quadrants are similar Figure 6 12 V Source limit lines Current Compliance Limit Line Measure Voltage Source Limit Line V Source Current compliance boundaries Where within the boundaries the SourceMeter operates depends on the load DUT that is connected to the output Figure 6 13 shows operation examples for resistive loads that are 2kQ and 800Q respectively For these examples the SourceMeter is programmed to source 50V and limit 50mA In Figure 6 13A the SourceMeter is sourcing 100V to the 2kQ load and subse quently measures 25mA As shown the load line for 2kQ intersects the 50V volt age source line at 25mA Figure 6 13B shows what happens if the resistance of the load is decreased to 8009 The DUT load line for 800kQ intersects the current compliance limit line placing the SourceMeter in compliance In compliance the SourceMeter will not be able to source its programmed voltage 50V For the 800kQ DUT the SourceMeter will only output 40V at the 50mA limit Notice that as resistance decreases the slope of the DUT load line increases As resistance approaches infinity open output the SourceMeter will source virtually 50V at OmA Conversely as resistance increases the slope of the DUT load line decreases At zero resistance shorted output the SourceMeter will so
85. gt soak time s 0 000 to 9999 999s Query SOAK Query multiple mode soak time Description With SYST RCMode set to MULTiple SOUR SOAK specifies the amount of time after the first point of a sweep that the unit will sit in a loop actively autoranging up and down to allow a multiple SourceMe ter configuration to settle See SYSTem subsystem page 18 103 This process will be done only once per INIT READ or MEAS command The soak time is especially useful for low current mea surements when multiple down range changes from the higher ranges are required NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode soak time is not used for sweeps 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 97 Pulse Mode delays Model 2430 only WIDth lt n gt SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh lt n gt Specify pulse width Parameters lt n gt 0 00015 to 0 00500 Specify pulse width in sec onds MINimum 0 00015 seconds MAXimum 0 00500 seconds DEFault 0 00015 seconds Query WIDTh Query pulse width WIDTh DEFault Query RST default pulse width WIDTh MINimum Query lowest allowable pulse width WIDTh MAXimum Query highest allowable pulse width Description This command is used to set the pulse width for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode The pulse width is the time that the output remains on including the signal measurement The valid range of pulse width periods is from 0 15ms to 5ms The pulse width can be set to lt 0 15ms however 0 15ms is the mi
86. gt Enable disable filter state ON or OFF For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the filter cannot be enabled 8 Relative and Math e Relative Discusses the relative REL mode that can be used to null off sets or subtract a baseline value from readings e Math operations Provides detailed information on the following math FCTN operations power offset compensated ohms varistor alpha volt age coefficient and percent deviation 8 2 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative The rel relative feature can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings With REL enabled subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input value and the rel value as follows Displayed Reading Actual Input Rel Value Once a rel value is established for a measurement function the value is the same for all ranges For example if 5V is set as a rel value on the 20V range the rel value is also 5V on the 2V and 200mV ranges Selecting a range that cannot accommodate the rel value does not cause an over flow condition but it also does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range For example on 20V range the SourceMeter still overflows for a gt 21 1V input NOTE When rel is enabled the REL annunciator turns on Changing measure ment functions disables rel Front panel rel Enabling and disabling rel Rel can be used to
87. gt Set digital output pattern SOURce2 TTL LEVel AC Tual Query actual output pattern Parameters lt NRf gt lt NDN gt 0 to 7 3 bit Specify digital output value 0 to 15 4 bit Query TTL Query default digital output value ACTual Query actual digital output value Description This command is used to set the logic levels of the output lines of the Digital I O port When set high the specified output line will be at approximately 5V When set low the output line will be at OV Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern Decimal OUT 4 OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V 0 7 in 3 bit mode 0 to 65535 with 2499 DIGIO option 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 99 MODE lt name gt SOURce2 TTL4 MODE lt name gt Control Digital I O port line 4 mode Parameters lt name gt EOTest Use line 4 as EOT signal BUSY Use line 4 as BUSY signal Query MODE Query Digital I O line 4 mode Description This command controls the operation of Digital I O line 4 to act as either an End of Test or Busy signal in the 3 bit output mode EOT is not automatically controlled in 4 bit mode See BS IZe lt n gt page
88. guard Note that the test fixture chassis is connected to In Out LO to reduce noise 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 9 Figure 2 4 High impedance guarding cable guard Guard Shield Test Fixture Connect to earth safety ground using 18 AWG wire or larger WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA GUARD SSR 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FII Ohms guard Use the guarded ohms connection schemes shown in Figure 2 5 for the following source measure operation e In circuit resistance measurements on the DUT where other parasitic leak age devices are present Note that ohms guard must be selected for this connection scheme Ohms guard is not available for the 1A range source or measure See Guard selection page 2 13 to select ohms guard and Section 4 6 wire ohms measurements 2 10 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 2 5 shows how to make connections to measure the resistance of a single resistor DUT in a resistor network See Section 6 Guard for more information on guarded ohms measurements The basic connection scheme for guarded ohms measurements is shown in Fig ure 2 5A If the guard resistance path Re is lt 1kQ IR drop in the GUARD test lead could be high enough that the guard voltage at the resistor network is signifi cantly less
89. guard MOJE sissa ne 18 105 Initialize Memory sosisini innana inna aiaa a 18 106 Control beeper sisigiiiiiigi iinan aiii 18 106 Contool AUTO ZO wysccteccvevsadseedaevandanedvvand ctetvedideanevevaebeatinas 18 107 Control NPLC Caching sorserien anO 18 107 Select power line frequency setting eects 18 108 Err r QUOUC omessi ii i a aaia 18 109 Simulate key presses cceeccceceeessseceseseseneeeeeesseneeeeeeseneees 18 110 Read version of SCPI standard s es 18 112 RS 232 IMEraACE osadenia aa AAE aA 18 112 Query timestamp cceeeeteececeeesteeeeseestaeeeeessstteeessesaaes 18 112 RESEUUIMESTAMP wise decccnsrdanctedsvarercteeseendsceceuaandd cecsevandaatenns 18 113 Auto reset timestamp cecceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeteeeeeesseentnaeeees 18 113 Auto range Change mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 18 113 TRACO s bSystem eironi AELE ANARE 18 114 Read and clear buffer eeesssessessssesrerrnssesrnnanrennnaaseennaanes 18 114 Configure and control buffer 0 2 eect eeeeentteeeeeeenaaees 18 114 Select timestamp format eeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeee 18 116 TRIGQGer SUDSYSIOMD a8 nestle seeeiesli dades nan ANni nanana 18 116 Clear input triggers osesrsssasireiiserian 18 116 Initiate source measure cycle ooo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeentteeeeeeeee 18 117 Abort source Measure cycle ooo ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeee 18 117 Program trigger model 0 eeecceceeeeeecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeenenes
90. guarded ohms measurements or for any other load that uses an active source NOTE For more information on output off states see Section 13 Output off states For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off state is always NOR Mal ROUTe subsystem The ROUTe subsystem is summarized in Table 18 5 Select input jacks TERMinals lt name gt ROUTe TERMinals lt name gt Select front or rear panel in out jacks Parameters lt name gt FRONt Front panel in out jacks REAR Rear panel in out jacks Query TERMinals Query state of front rear switch setting Description This command is used to select which set of input output terminals to enable front panel or rear panel 18 58 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SENSe1 subsystem The Sense subsystem is used to configure and control the measurement functions of the SourceMeter Many of the commands are global where a single command affects all functions Some commands are unique to a specific function For example you can program a unique range setting for each basic function amps volts and ohms A function does not have to be selected before you can program its various configura tions Whenever a programmed function is selected it assumes the programmed states The commands for this subsystem are summarized in Table 18 6 Select measurement functions CONCurrent lt b gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion CONCurrent lt b gt Control concurrent measure
91. idle For Pulse Mode remote operation the output is turned on and initiation is satisfied when INITiate READ or OUTPut 1 STATe ON is sent Pulse delay Instead of a Trigger Delay used in the DC Mode the Pulse Mode uses a Pulse Delay This delay is set by the user and is part of the pulse off time After event detection operation proceeds to the Pulse Delay However for the ini tial pass through the trigger model the Pulse Delay is bypassed as shown in Fig ure 11 8 This initial loop around the delay allows the pulse to be sourced as soon as the output is turned on Source action The source action turns on the output to source the pulse Pulse width The pulse width is the time duration that the output is on Depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width can be as short as 0 25msec or as long as 5msec In general the pulse width is made up of a delay and the signal measurement See Section 5 for details on pulse width timing Measure action With Auto Zero enabled a reading consists of three measurements signal refer ence and zero These three measurements are then used to calculate an accurate pulse reading The signal is measured first while the output is on After the signal measurement is completed the output turns off and the reference and zero mea surements are performed With Auto Zero disabled the reference and zero measurements are not per formed This allows a faster pulse train by s
92. instrument did not contain a recognizable command name The most likely causes for this error are e Missing space between the command and its parameter There must be one or more spaces blanks between the command and its parameter For example SENS VOLT DC RANGIOO Incorrect no space between command and parameter SENS VOLT DC RANG 100Correct Improper short or long form Check the command list in Section 18 of this manual e Blanks spaces within the command name For example SYST ERR Incorrect space between SYST and ERR SYST ERR Correct 410 Query INTERRUPTED This error occurs when you have sent a valid query to the instrument and then send it another command or query or a Group Execute Trigger GET before it has had a chance to send the entire response message including the line feed EOI terminator The most likely causes are e Sending a query to the instrument and then sending another command or query before reading the response to the first query For example the fol lowing sequence of commands will cause an error 410 SYST ERR OPC This sequence generates an error because you must read the response to SYST ERR before sending the OPC query 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 9 Incorrectly configured IEEE 488 driver The driver must be configured so that when talking on the bus it sends line feed with EOI as the terminator and wh
93. is always enabled ENABLE Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the output enable line of the Digital output This line is used as an output enable for a test fixture See Digital I O port page 13 2 e OFF STATE Use to select the OFF state of the output See Output off states page 13 9 for details HIGH IMPEDANCE When the OUTPUT is turned OFF the output relay opens This disconnects external circuitry from the input output of the SourceMeter NORMAL When the OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range ZERO When the V Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is set to OV and current compliance is not changed When the I Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source mode is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to the programmed Source value or to 0 5 full scale of the present current range whichever is greater Measure ments are performed and displayed while the OUTPUT is off GUARD When OUTPUT is turned OFF the current source is selected and set to 0A Voltage compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range e AUTO OFF Use to ENABLE or DISABLE auto output off When enabled the OUTPUT will turn off after the measurement phase of every SDM cycle The OUTPUT turns back on at the beginning of the next SDM cycle When disabled the OUTPUT stays on as long as the SourceMeter
94. is tested Remote limit testing Limit commands Table 12 1 summarizes remote commands to control limit testing parameters while Table 12 2 summarizes commands to control the Digital I O port bit parame ters for limit testing See Section 18 CALCulate2 and SOURce2 for more details on these commands NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port and does not have a component handler interface The commands in Table 12 2 and Table 12 3 are not valid for the Model 2401 and will cause undefined header errors NOTE For instruments with the contact check option see Appendix F for more information Table 12 1 Limit commands Command Description CALCulate2 FEED lt name gt CALCulate2 DATA CALCulate2 LIMit COMPliance FAIL lt name gt CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer lt n gt CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer lt n gt Select limit test input path name CALCu late 1 VOLTage CURRent or RESistance Acquire limit test data Set Limit 1 fail condition Name IN fail into compliance or OUT fail out of compliance Specify lower Limit X X 2 3 5 12 n limit Specify upper Limit X X 2 3 5 12 n limit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 12 1 cont Limit commands Limit Testing 12 21 Command Description CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX _LOWer SOURce2 lt
95. math function CALCulate1 subsystem can be performed in the Pulse Mode From the SENSe subsystem offset compensated ohms cannot be performed The SENSe RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt command which enables disables offset compensated ohms causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Source delay In the DC Mode the source delay is a delay that occurs between the source and measure operations The delay period can be manually set or auto delay can be used With auto delay the delay is automatically set according to function and range See Section 3 Operation considerations and Source delay for details For the Pulse Mode source delay is not used For front panel operation the menu items to set source DELAY and select AUTO DELAY are replaced by menu items to set pulse DELAY and PULSE WIDTH when the Pulse Mode is selected There fore you cannot set source delay while in the Pulse Mode For remote operation you can set the source delay however the setting will be ignored in the Pulse Mode The ignored commands for source delay include SOURce DELay lt n gt and SOURce DELay AUTO lt b gt 5 14 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Trigger delay In the DC Mode the trigger delay is a user set delay that occurs between the trig ger and pulse operations In the Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used You can set the trigger delay while in the Pulse Mode but it will not
96. measure voltage only by setting it to source OA and measure voltage CAUTION V Compliance must be set to a level that is higher than the mea sured voltage Otherwise excessive current will flow into the SourceMeter This current could damage the SourceMeter Also when connecting an external voltage to the I Source set the output off state to the high impedance mode See Section 13 Output off states In Figure 6 16B the SourceMeter is configured to measure current only by setting it to source OV and measure current Note that in order to obtain positive read ings conventional current must flow from IN OUT HI to LO 6 26 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 16 Measure only V or l O IN OUT HI l Source DUT V Source 0 00000uA IN OUT LO O A Measure Voltage O nly Positive Current IN OUT HI V Source DUT l Source 000 000mV IN OUT LO Note Positive current flowing out of IN OUT HI results in positive measurements B Measure Current O nly Note Use 2 wire local sensing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 27 Guard WARNING GUARD is at the same potential as output HI Thus if hazard ous voltages are present at output HI they are also present at the GUARD terminal NOTE See Section 2 Guarding methods for details on guarded test connec tions as well as information on sel
97. memory sweep as well as other pertinent command descriptions in this section for details NOTE Auto zero should be disabled with the SYST AZER OFF command for maxi mum source memory sweep speed otherwise the cache is of little use With auto zero enabled new A D reference and zero values are taken for every reading and saved into the cache slowing down sweep operation However with auto zero disabled measurements may drift and become erroneous To minimize drift when using NPLC caching with auto zero disabled periodically send SYST AZER ONCE to force an immediate auto zero update Select power line frequency setting LFRequency lt freq gt SYSTem LFRequency lt freq gt Select line frequency Parameters lt freq gt 50 50Hz or 400HZ setting 60 60Hz setting Query LFRequency Query line frequency selection Description Use this command to manually select the line frequency setting 50 or 60Hz For 400Hz operation select 50Hz AUTO lt b gt SYSTem LFRequency AUTO lt b gt Control auto line frequency selection Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable and line frequency selection 0 or OFF Disable auto line frequency selection Query AUTO Query state of auto line frequency selection Description This command is used to enable or disable auto line frequency detection When enabled the SourceMeter will sense the line fre quency on power up and select the appropriate line frequency set ting Manually setting the li
98. messages 2 Behavior of SourceMeter when the address is set outside 3 Behavior of SourceMeter when valid address is entered b Queries that return more than one response message 10 Device to device message transfer that does not follow See Appendix D Cannot enter an invalid address Address changes and bus resets Determine by SYSTem POSetup Section 18 2048 bytes None All queries Common Commands and SCPI None See Table E 2 Contained in SCPI command sub systems tables see Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 Block display messages 32 characters max See Section 14 Programming syntax See Section 14 Programming syntax None See Section 18 FORMat subsystem See Section 16 Common Commands See Service Manual Not applicable Not applicable See Section 16 Common Commands Not applicable Not applicable See Section 16 Common Commands See Section 16 Common Commands See Section 15 Status Structure All are sequential except INIT OPC OPC and WAI see Section 16 Common Commands E 4 IEEE 488 amp SCPI Conformance Information Table E 2 Coupled commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command Also changes SENSe RANGe UPPER SENSe NPLC SOURGce RANGe SOURCe STARt SOURCe STOP SOURCe SOURCe SOURCe STEP POINts CENTer SOUR
99. n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage PROTection LEVel lt n gt Parameters SCPI Command Reference 18 79 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 105V 3 15A or 105V Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 10 5A or 105V 10 5A or 105V 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 42 to 42 DEFault MINimum MAXimum TRIGgered TRIGgered DEFault TRIGgered MINimum TRIGgered MAXimum This command performs the same as the IMMediate AMPLitude command except that the amplitude is not updated immediately With this command the amplitude is updated when the SourceMeter is triggered to perform a source measure operation For example if the instrument is waiting in the trigger layer for an external trigger the amplitude of the source will not update until that external trigger is received by the SourceMeter See Section 11 Trigger models for details on trigger model operation The MINimum and MAXimum parameters are only valid if the highest source range is presently selected Sending the MINimum or MAXimum parameters on a lower source range will generate error 221 Setting Conflict Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 5 25A or 42V 5 25A or
100. name gt LINear Linear scale LOGarithmic Logarithmic scale Query SPACing Query scale for sweep Description This command is used to select the scale for the sweep With LINear selected the source measure points in the sweep will be performed 18 84 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual on a linear scale With LOGarithmic selected the source measure points will be performed on a logarithmic scale STARt lt n gt STOP lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent STARt lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage STARt lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent STOP lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage STOP lt n gt Specify start current level current sweep Specify start voltage level voltage sweep Specify stop current level current sweep Specify stop voltage level voltage sweep Parameters 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set l Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts 21 to 21 2400 LV and 2401 DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 210V 21V 2400 LV and 2401 MAXimum 1 05A or 210V 21V 2400 LV and 2401 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set l Source level amps 1100 to 1100 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 1100V MAXimum 1 05A or 1100V 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Set l Source level amps 63 to 63 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 3 15A or 63V MAXimum 3 15A or 63V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Set l Source level amps 105 to
101. negative value If you specify a value that is less than the lowest limit the lowest limit will be selected If you specify a value that is between limits the lower limit will be selected For example if you specify a value of 110 for the Model 2400 the 100V limit will be selected Query RST default limit Query lowest allowable limit Query highest allowable limit SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING Even with the voltage protection limit set to the lowest value 20V NEVER touch anything connected to the terminals of the SourceM eter when the OUTPUT is ON Always assume that a hazardous voltage gt 30V rms is present when the OUTPUT is ON To prevent damage to DUT devices under test or external cir cuitry DO NOT program the V Source to levels that exceed the voltage protection limit Set delay NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used Therefore the fol lowing commands for source delay are ignored DELay lt n gt SOURce 1 DELay lt n gt Manually set source delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 999 9999 Specify delay in seconds MINimum MAXimum DEFault 0 seconds 999 9999 seconds 0 seconds Query DELay DELay DEFault DELay MINimum DELay MAXimum This command is used to manually set a delay settling time for the source After the programmed source is turned on this delay occurs to allow the source level to settle before a measurement i
102. null out zero offsets or to establish a zero baseline by pressing the REL key The reading which becomes the rel value is subtracted from itself As a result a zero reading is displayed Pressing REL a second time disables rel Defining a rel value A unique rel value can be established for the selected measurement function from the front panel as follows 1 Press CONFIG and then REL The present rel value will be displayed 2 Set the desired rel value See Section 1 Rules to navigate menus for details 3 With the desired rel value displayed press ENTER The SourceMeter will return to the normal source measure display with rel enabled The reading will reflect the defined rel value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative and Math 8 3 Remote rel programming Rel commands Table 8 1 summarizes rel commands See Section 18 CALCulate2 subsystem for additional information Table 8 1 Rel commands Command Description CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet lt n gt Define null rel value n rel value CALCulate2 NULL STATe lt state gt Enable disable rel state ON or OFF CALCulate2 NULL ACQuire Automatically acquire rel value must have non overflowed reading Rel programming example Table 8 2 lists commands for setting up and enabling rel These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows e Rel value 5 e Rel state enabled Table 8 2 Rel programming example Command Des
103. of the instrument For example while the SourceMeter is in the idle state bit B10 Idle of the Operation Condition Register will be set When the instrument is taken out of idle bit B10 clears The commands to read the condition registers are listed in Table 15 5 For details on reading registers see Reading registers page 15 6 Table 15 5 Condition register commands Command Description STATus OPERation CONDition Read Operation Condition Register STATus MEASurement CONDition Read Measurement Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Read Questionable Condition Register Event registers As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set has an event register When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset Reading an event register clears the bits of that reg ister CLS resets all four event registers The commands to read the event registers are listed in Table 15 6 For details on reading registers see Reading registers page 15 6 Table 15 6 Event register commands Command Description Default ESR Read Standard Event Status Register Note STATus OPERation EVENt Read Operation Event Register STATus MEASurement EVENt Read Measurement Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read Questionable Event Register Note Power up and CLS resets all bits of all event registers to
104. one hour to achieve rated accuracies See Appendix A for specifications Auto zero Every A D conversion reading is calculated from a series of zero reference and signal measurements With auto zero enabled all three of these measurements are performed for each reading to achieve rated accuracy With auto zero dis abled zero and reference are not measured This increases measurement speed but zero drift will eventually corrupt accuracy With auto zero disabled periodically change measurement speed Temperature changes across components within the instrument can cause the reference and zero values for the A D converter to drift due to thermo electric effects Auto zero acts to negate the effects of drift in order to maintain measure ment accuracy over time Without auto zero enabled measurements can drift and become erroneous Front panel auto zero Set the auto zero from the front panel as follows 1 Press the MENU key Select A D CTRL from the main menu then press ENTER Select AUTO ZERO then press ENTER Select ENABLE or DISABLE as appropriate then press ENTER Press EXIT as necessary to return to normal display ak wn Remote command auto zero Use the SYSTem AZERo command to enable or disable auto zero via remote See Section 18 SYSTem subsystem For example send the following com mand to disable auto zero SYST AZER ON Conversely send this command to disable auto zero SYST AZER OFF 2400 Serie
105. only 5 9 Jitter for pulse off time can be as high as 1msec depending on the integration rate auto zero and on time In general the higher the off time the higher the jit ter Pulse energy limitations 10A range Energy for pulses are provided by an internal bank of capacitors Each pulse con sumes energy from the capacitors After a pulse is generated the capacitors begin to recharge The next pulse will occur at the configured time as long as the capacitors have had enough time to recharge If the capacitors are not charged enough to provide the pulse the instrument will wait until the necessary charge energy is available Charge energy consumption by a pulse depends on the pulse current and pulse width and is expressed as follows Q Ixt Where Q is the charge energy consumed by the pulse is the pulse current t is the output on time pulse width From the above equation high current and or long output on time results in high energy consumption and therefore longer charge time for the capacitors On all but the 10A range source or measure charge energy consumption is low enough to allow the capacitors to recharge before the next pulse is due This fast recharge process allows the configured pulse period to be consistent jitter free On the 10A range source or measure the configured pulse period will be consis tent as long as the pulse duty cycle is 8 or less Above 8 the capacitors will not be able to rech
106. passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common Commands 16 5 WAI wait to continue Wait until previous commands are com Effectively the WAI command is a No Op no operation for the SourceMeter and thus does not need to be used Two types of device commands exist e Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to fin ish before the next command is executed e Overlapped commands A command that allows the execution of subse quent commands while device operations of the Overlapped command are still in progress The WAI command is used to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous Overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for Sequential commands 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Command summary Summarizes those commands used to configure and acquire readings Configuring measurement function Provides detailed information on commands to configure the measurement function Acquiring readings Describes commands to acquire post processed readings both trigger and acquire readings and to perform a single mea surement 17 2 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command summary The signal oriented measurement commands are used to acquire readings You can use these high level instructions to co
107. pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 1 test OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 1 test y FAIL Returns result of Limit 1 test 0 pass or v 1 fail LIMit2 Path to control LIMIT 2 test v UPPer Configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v v 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 v lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 y v 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 v lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v v lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 2 test OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 2 test y FAIL Return result of Limit 2 test 0 pass or v 1 fail 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 5 Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CAL Culate2 LIMIt3 Pa
108. presently programmed to source measure Measure readings take priority over source readings and functions not sourced or measured are assigned the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 17 4 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual For example assume that voltage current and resistance readings are selected as data elements and the instrument is programmed to Source V and Measure A reading string acquired by FETch will include the programmed V Source value and the I Measure reading The reading for resistance will be NAN since resistance was not measured If the SourceMeter is instead programmed to Source V and Measure V the voltage reading will be the V Measure reading not the programmed V Source value Both current and resistance readings will be NANs current is not measured or sourced NOTE The FETCh command is automatically asserted when the READ or MEASure command is sent See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data SENSe 1 DATA LATest Description This command works exactly like FETCh except that it returns only the most recent reading READ Description This command is used to trigger and acquire readings The num ber of readings depends on how the trigger model is config
109. range n range Select V source range n range Set I source amplitude n amplitude in amps Set V source amplitude n amplitude in volts Select measure function function VOLTage or CURRent Set current compliance n compliance Set voltage compliance n compliance Set current measure range n range Set voltage measure range n range Select output state state ON or OFF Trigger and acquire reading 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 19 Source measure programming example Table 3 6 summarizes the command sequence for a basic source measure proce dure Note that the steps correspond to those listed previously in Front panel source measure procedure These commands set up the SourceMeter as fol lows e Source function and range volts 20V e Source mode fixed e Source output level 10V e Current compliance 10mA e Measure function and range current 10mA Table 3 6 Basic source measure programming example Step 4 5 6 Action Select source function mode Set source range level compliance Set measure function range Turn on output Read data Turn off output Commands RST SOUR FUNC VOLT SOUR VOLT MODE FIXED SOUR VOLT RANG 20 SOUR VOLT LEV 10 SENS CURR PROT 10E 3 SENS FUNC CURR SENS CURR RANG 10E 3 FORM ELEM CURR OUTP ON READ OUTP OFF Comments Restore GP
110. resistors exhibit a change in resistance with a change in applied voltage This effect is known as voltage coefficient The voltage coeffi cient is the percent change in resistance per unit change in applied voltage and is defined as follows AR R2x AV Coefficient x 100 where AR R2 R1 AV V2 V1 R1 is the resistance measurement at the first source point R2 is the resistance measurement at the second source point V1 is the voltage measurement at the first source point V2 is the voltage measurement at the second source point 8 6 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual If sourcing voltage you will be prompted to enter the two V source values If sourcing current you will be prompted to enter the two I source values See Front panel math operations page 8 6 Percent deviation This calculation provides the percent deviation between the normal display read ing and the user set reference value Deviation Box 100 where X is the normal display measurement reading V 1 or Q Y is the reference value When prompted to enter the reference value Y you can enter the value or have the SourceMeter acquire the reference value To acquire the reference value turn on the output and press AUTO The SourceMeter will perform a measurement and display that reading as the reference Front panel math operations Perform the steps below to select and enable a math expression 1 Select t
111. select the ohms function See Section 18 SENSe1 subsystem Select measurement functions for details on concurrent measurements Ohms source readback For DC Mode operation ohms source readback can be enabled The instrument measures the actual source value for ohms measurement and then uses that 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 13 measured value for the reading calculation For the Pulse Mode ohms source readback cannot be enabled Section 4 covers Ohms source readback NOTE Make sure that the source is not in compliance when taking pulse ohms readings Toggle key For the DC Mode the TOGGLE key manipulates display readings while the output is on For the Pulse Mode the output is only on for very short periods of time pulse width Therefore the TOGGLE key is disabled in the Pulse Mode Offset compensated ohms From the front panel there are two methods to perform offset compensated ohms measurements For one method which is enabled from the CONFIG OHMS menu the 2 point measurement process is performed at a user set source level and at OV or OA This method is not available while in the Pulse Mode The other method which is a math function FCTN the user sets both source levels for the 2 point measurement process This method is valid in the Pulse Mode See Section 8 Math operations for details For remote operation offset compensated ohms as a
112. selected the highest voltage measure ment range is 42V With the 5A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 10 5V The highest measurement range for the Models 2400 LV and 2401 is 20V Selecting a higher range over the bus will generate error 222 Parameter data out of range The SourceMeter will go to the 20V range 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 63 UPPer lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt UP DOWN Select range for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt UP DOWN Select range for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe UPPer lt n gt UP IDOWN Select range for ohms Parameters 2400 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Expected reading in amps 210 to 210 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e8 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 1 05 amps 210 volts O ohms MAXimum 1 05 amps 210 volts 2 1e8 ohms UP Select next higher measure range DOWN Select next lower measure range 2400 LV and 2401 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Expected reading in amps 21 to 21 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e8 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 1 05 amps 21 volts O ohms MAXimum 1 05 amps 21 volts 2 1e8 ohms UP Select next higher measure range DOWN Select next lower measure range 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Expected reading in amps 1100 to 1100 Exp
113. shielded cables Cable guard is used to drive the shields of cables and test fixtures Guard is extended to a test fixture using a safety banana plug such as the Model 8008 BAN Inside the test fixture the guard can be connected to a guard plate or shield that surrounds the DUT 6 28 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING To prevent injury or death a safety shield must be used to pre vent physical contact with a guard plate or guard shield that is at a hazardous potential gt 30Vrms or 42 4V peak This safety shield must completely enclose the guard plate or shield and must be connected to safety earth ground Figure 6 17B shows the metal case of a test fixture being used as a safety shield Inside the test fixture a triaxial cable can be used to extend guard to the DUT The center conductor of the cable is used for In Out HI the inner shield is used for guard and the outer shield is used for In Out LO and is connected to the safety shield which is connected to safety earth ground A coaxial cable can be used if the guard potential does not exceed 30Vrms 42 4V peak The center conductor is used for In Out HI and the outer shield is used for guard For higher guard potentials use a triaxial cable as previously explained Figure 6 17 shows how cable guard can eliminate leakage current through the insulators in a test fixture In Figure 6 17A leakage current I flows through the insulators R a
114. status structure discussed in Section 15 16 2 Common Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command summary Common commands summarized in Table 16 1 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Most of these commands are described in detail in this section NOTE _ The following common commands associated with the status structure are covered in Section 15 CLS ESE ESE ESR SRE SRE and STB Table 16 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and Error Queue ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the Standard Event Enable Register ESE Event enable query Read the Standard Event Enable Register ESR Event status register query Read and clear the Standard Event Enable Register IDN Identification query Returns the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete command Set the Operation Complete bit in the Standard Event Register after all pending commands have been executed OPC Operation complete query Places an ASCII 1 into the Output Queue when all pend ing selected device operations have been completed OPT Options Query Queries installed options Response message indi cates the prescence or absence of options For exam ple if response messa
115. structure 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all points in the sweep 10 18 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows 1 2 3 4 7 Press CONFIG then SWEEP Select TYPE then press ENTER Select SRC MEMORY then press ENTER Use the menu selections to enter the desired START memory location and POINTS for the source memory sweep From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 3 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on Step 4 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 5 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 19 Remote sweep operation Staircase sweep commands Table 10 3 summarizes remote commands used for linear and log staircase sweep operation See Section 18 Configure voltage and current sweeps for more details on these commands Table 10 3 Linear and log staircase s
116. sweep The display will disable as soon as sweep is started The display will auto matically re enable after the sweep is completed STORE Select this option if you want the display to disable when storing source measure readings in the buffer The display will disable as soon as the buffer is enabled The display will automatically re enable after the storage pro cess is completed Note that with this option the display will disable while per forming a sweep Sweep readings are automatically stored in the buffer Remote command programming Use the following SCPI commands to enable or disable the front panel display cir cuitry DISPlay ENABle OFF Disable the display DISPlay ENABle ON Enable the display Configuration menus There are a number of configuration menus that can be accessed by pressing the CONFIG key followed by the appropriate function or mode key For example you can configure the voltage source by pressing CONFIG then SOURCE V Configu ration menus are available for the following operating modes e Measure functions V Q FCTN 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 25 e SOURCE V SOURCE and RANGE REL FILTER and LIMIT e TRIG e SWEEP DIGITS SPEED and STORE e ON OFF OUTPUT and Display EDIT or TOGGLE 2 Connections Connection overview Discusses front rear terminal selection and using output enable Connections to DUT Covers various methods for mak
117. sweep trigger count should equal number of points in sweep Points Stop Start Step 1 You can use SOUR SWE POIN query to read the number of points 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 21 Custom sweep commands Table 10 5 summarizes remote commands used for custom sweep operation See Section 18 Configure list for more details on these commands Table 10 5 Custom sweep commands Command Description SOURce CURRent MODE LIST SOURce VOLTage MODE LIST SOURce LIST CURRent lt list gt SOURce LIST CURRent APPend lt list gt SOURce LIST CURRent POINts SOURce LIST VOLTage lt list gt SOURce LIST VOLTage APPend lt list gt SOURce LIST VOLTage POINts SOURce SWEep RANGing lt name gt Select current list custom sweep mode Select voltage list custom sweep mode Define I source list 11 12 In Add l source list value s list I1 12 In Query length of l source list Define V source list list V1 V2 Vn Add V source list value s list V1 V2 Vn Query length of V source list Select source ranging name BEST AUTO or FlXed Custom sweep programming example Table 10 6 summarizes the basic remote command sequence for performing a custom sweep Table 10 6 Custom sweep programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SENS FUNC CONC OFF Turn off concurrent functions SOUR FUNC VOL
118. that is not sourced or mea sured will be the invalid NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 For example using a current reading in a calculation for Source V Mea sure V will cause a NAN result Example using Source Measure V configuration calc math volt curr Calculate power using voltage measurement and I Source value After a calculation is configured and enabled the results are dis played when source measure operations are performed See STATe lt b gt page 18 32 Use the data command to send the results to the computer Vectored math By incorporating vectors you select which readings to use for the math calculation After all programmed source measure operations are completed the math calculation s are performed using readings indicated by the specified vectors Vector numbers are enclosed in brackets and start at 0 Thus vector 0 is the first reading in the array vector 1 is the second read ing in the array and so on The largest vector number in the expres sion defines the vector array size For example assume the SourceMeter is programmed to perform 10 source measure operations and the following vectored math calcu lation is used volt 3 volt 9 DaN 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 31 The above expression defines a vector array that is made up of 10 readings Since the SourceMeter is programmed to perform 10 source measure operatio
119. the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal of the SourceMeter Therefore hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on that LO terminal Typically this can occur when the SourceMeter is operating in any mode where the output changes rapidly such as quick pulsed waveforms that can be generated using the ZERO AUTO OFF output state or fast pulse sweep operations To prevent this from occurring if your application allows it connect the INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal to earth ground You can connect the LO terminal to the chassis ground screw ter minal on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Note that the front panel terminals are isolated from the rear panel terminals Therefore if you are using the front panel ter minals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal 2 6 Connections NOTE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 2 2 Two wire connections local sense gt INPUT OUTPUT 4 WIRE SENSE Aa TERMINALS FRONT REAR DUT ON OFF OUTPUT Sense Selection 2 wire SourceM eter Front Panel Figure 2 3 Four wire connections remote sense Di INPUT OUTPUT is 4WIRE SENSE ON OFF DUT TERMINALS FRONT REAR OUTPUT Sense Selection 4 wire SourceM eter Front Panel Connections alone do not determine sense mode For local sensing Fig ure 2 2 2 wire sensi
120. the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 the valid NPLC range is 0 01 to 0 1 PLC The speed setting affects both the NMRR normal mode rejection ratio and CMRR common mode rejection ratio Normal mode noise is the noise signal between the HI and LO input terminals while common mode noise is the noise signal between LO and chassis ground See Appendix A for NMRR and CMRR specifications Setting speed Speed is set from the Speed Accuracy menu and is structured as follows Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change the speed setting NOTE For the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 speed is set from Pulse Speed menu This menu structure is located after the Speed Accuracy menu Use the Rules to navigate menus in Section 1 to check and or change the speed setting Front panel speed control Press SPEED or CONFIG SPEED to display the menu FAST Sets speed to 0 01 PLC and sets display resolution to 3Hdigits MED Sets speed to 0 10 PLC and sets display resolution to 4Hdigits e NORMAL Sets speed to 1 00 PLC and sets display resolution to 5Hdigits e HI ACCURACY Sets speed to 10 00 PLC and sets display resolution to 6Hdigits e OTHER Use to set speed to any PLC value from 0 01 to 10 Display res olution is not changed when speed is set with this option 7 8 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE After setting speed display resolution can be changed
121. the desired value with the numeric keys while the cursor is blinking Again the source or compliance value will be updated immediately Toggling the source and measure display fields Normally the measured reading value will appear in the upper main display line while the source and compliance values appear in the left and right fields respec tively of the lower display line You can toggle the source and measure display fields by pressing the TOGGLE key to place the source and measure values in the desired positions Disabling front panel display Front panel display circuitry can be disabled to allow the instrument to operate at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen with the following message FRONT PANEL DISABLED Press LOCAL to resume As reported by the message all front panel controls except LOCAL TRIG and OUTPUT ON OFF are disabled Front panel control Front panel display circuitry is controlled from the DISABLE DISPLAY configura tion menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then EDIT or TOGGLE To select an option NOW NEVER SWEEP or STORE use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cursor on the desired option then press ENTER The options for DISABLE DISPLAY are explained as follows NOW Select this option to disable the display now NEVER Select this option if you do not want the display to disable SWEEP Select this option if you want the display to disable while performing a
122. the stop source level is reached With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting Note that the delay cannot change once a sweep is configured and running and is the same for all steps 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 3 Figure 10 1 Linear staircase sweep l lt Delay gt l i Stop Step lt Delay gt l lt Delay gt Start gt o M easure M easure M easure M easure X Measurement point 10 4 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Logarithmic staircase sweep This sweep is similar to the linear staircase sweep The steps however are done on a logarithmic scale as shown in the example sweep in Figure 10 2 This is a 5 point log sweep from 1 to 10V As with the staircase sweep the delay period is the same for all steps Figure 10 2 Logarithmic staircase sweep example 5 point sweep from 1 to 10 volts Log Scale 10 5 6234 Volts 3 1623 1 7783 Log Points 5 Bias fF tf ft do Measure 1 Measure 2 Measure 3 Measure 4 Measure 5 X Measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 5 The programmable parameters for a log sweep include the start and stop levels and the number of measurement points for the sweep The specified start stop and point parameters determine the logari
123. to SYSTem PRESet defaults Description This command returns the instrument to states optimized for front panel operation SYSTem PRESet defaults are listed in the SCPI tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 POSetup SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Program power on defaults Parameters lt name gt RST Power up to RST defaults PRESet Power up to SYSTem PRESet defaults SAVO Power up to setup stored at memory location 0 SAV1 Power up to setup stored at memory location 1 SAV2 Power up to setup stored at memory location 2 SAV3 Power up to setup stored at memory location 3 SAV4 Power up to setup stored at memory location 4 Query POSetup Query power on setup 18 104 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Description This command is used to select the power on defaults With RST selected the instrument powers up to the RST default conditions With PRES selected the instrument powers up to the SYStem PRE Set default conditions Default conditions are listed in the SCPI tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 With the SAVO 4 parameters specified the instrument powers on to the setup that is saved in the specified location using the SAV com mand Control remote sensing CCHeck lt b gt SYSTem CCHeck lt b gt Enable or disable contact check Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable contact check 1 or ON Enable contact check Query CCHeck Query state of contact check Description This command is us
124. to BNC trigger cable Lets you connect Trigger Link lines one Voltmeter Complete and two External Trigger of the SourceMeter to instru ments that use BNC trigger connectors The Model 8503 is 1m long Model 8505 trigger link cable The Model 8505 is a male to dual female trigger link cable Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 single fixed rack mount kit Mounts a single SourceMeter in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 side by side rack mount kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 2015 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 6430 6517 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 3 side by side rack mount kit Mounts a SourceMeter and a Model 199 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 4 side by side rack mount kit Mounts a SourceMeter and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 196 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775 etc side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 5 dual fixed rack mounting kit Mounts a SourceMeter and another 3H inch high instrument Model 182 428 486 487 2000 2010 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 6430 or 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 padded carrying case A carrying case for a SourceMeter Includes handles and a shoulder strap 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 5 Product overview The SourceMeter combines a precise low noise
125. to set trigger delay NOTE Forlinear staircase log staircase and custom sweeps source delay trigger delay and NPLC settings are global and affect all sweep points simultaneously For source memory sweep only both the source delay and NPLC settings can be set to different values for each point in the sweep Trigger count and sweep points The trigger count and number of sweep points should be the same or multiples of one another For example with five sweep points and a trigger count of 10 the sweep will run twice See Section 11 for details on trigger count Performing sweeps Procedures for the various sweep types are covered below NOTE For the Model 2430 the following procedure assumes that the DC mode of operation is selected Vsrc or Isrc displayed in source field If in the Pulse Mode Vpls or Ipls displayed you can return to the DC Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 15 by pressing CONFIG V or I selecting the SHAPE menu item and then selecting PULSE Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already con nected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 WARNING Hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when performing fast pulse sweep operations To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO ter minal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the
126. trigger model consists of two layers Arm Layer and Trigger Layer to provide versatility Programmable counters allow operations to be repeated and various input and output trigger options are available to provide source measure synchro nization between the SourceMeter and other instruments via the Trigger Link Idle and initiate The instrument is considered to be in the idle state ARM annunciator off when it is not operating within the trigger model layers While in the idle state the instru ment cannot perform any measurements An initiate command is required to take the instrument out of idle The following commands perform an initiate operation INITiate READ e MEASure Conversely if the unit is taking readings most commands except DCL SDC IFC and ABORt are queued up and will not be executed until the unit returns to idle When auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF you must first turn the source output on before sending the INITiate or READ command The MEASure command will automatically turn the output on Note that after the instrument returns to the idle state the output will remain on When auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON any of the above three commands can be used to initiate operation The source output will auto matically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each measurement is completed 11 12 Triggering
127. typed in without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not included in the program message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root level and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur Command path rules e Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional e g SENSe If the root is optional simply treat a command word on the next level as the root For fastest operation do not send optional data e The colon at the beginning of a program message is optional and need not be used However eliminating the first colon will result in fastest opera tion Example e stat pres stat pres e When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next com mand level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which is used to separate commands within the program message see next rule 14 12 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual e When the path pointer detects a colon that immediately follows a semi colon it resets to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Exe cuting a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Using common and SCPI commands in the same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same mes sage as long as they are
128. voltage See Section 6 for more details Battery discharging To discharge the battery program the SourceMeter to output OV In this configuration the SourceMeter operates as a sink to discharge the battery Current from the battery flows into the HI terminal of the SourceMeter resulting in negative current measurements As the bat tery discharges current will gradually decrease until it reaches zero bat tery discharged NOTE When using the V Source to charge and discharge batteries use the HIGH IMPEDANCE output off state Section 13 This output off state opens the output relay when the OUTPUT is turned off This open circuit 3 24 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual condition keeps the external battery from discharging while the output is off CAUTION If using the I Source to charge and or discharge batteries the following precautions must be observed Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the SourceMeter that is not covered by the warranty Make sure the external voltage NEVER exceeds the voltage compliance setting of the I Source This will cause excessive current to be drawn from the external battery or source Make sure the output off state of the I Source is set for HIGH IMPEDANCE This setting opens the output relay when the OUTPUT is turned OFF With the NORMAL output off state selected turning the output off sets voltage compliance to zero This
129. when the Pulse Mode is selected If the speed setting is lt 0 10 PLC that setting will be retained when the Pulse Mode is selected If the Pulse Mode speed setting is lt 0 01 it will change to 0 01 when the DC Mode is selected For remote operation the parameter value for the SENSe NPLC lt b gt com mands is limited to a maximum value of 0 10 Details are provided in Section 7 Speed Filtering cannot be used while the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode You can con figure the filter but you cannot enable it Pressing the FILTER key displays the Invalid in Pulse Mode message For remote operation the SENSe AVER age STATe lt b gt command which is used to enable the filter causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Auto range Measurement auto range cannot be used enabled while in the Pulse Mode Pressing the AUTO range key displays the Invalid in Pulse Mode message For remote operation the SENSe RANGe AUTO lt b gt commands which are used to enable disable auto range cause error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Concurrent measurements For remote operation more than one function can be measured simultaneously while in the DC Mode However in the Pulse Mode only one function can be measured for each pulse The SENSe FUNCtion CONCurrent lt b gt command which enables disables concurrent measurements causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode The SENSe FUNCtion ON ALL command will
130. 0 STATus PRESet has no effect 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Event enable registers Status Structure 15 17 As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set has an enable register Each event register bit is logically ANDed amp to a corresponding enable bit of an enable regis ter Therefore when an event bit is set and the corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register The commands to program and read the event enable registers are listed in Table 15 7 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 15 5 and Reading registers page 15 6 NOTE The bits of any enable register can be reset to 0 by sending the 0 parameter value with the appropriate enable command i e STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Table 15 7 Event enable registers commands Command Description Default ESE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Standard Event Enable Register See Note Parameters ESE Read Standard Event Enable Register STATus STATus Subsystem OPERation Operation Event Enable Register ENABIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See Parameters ENABle Read enable register MEASurement Measurement Event Enable Register ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See
131. 0 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 7 SWEEP Start configured sweep left right arrows Move through parameter values or selections within functions and operations DIGITS Change number of digits of display resolution SPEED Change measurement speed by selecting accuracy or specifying NPLC STORE Set buffer size and enable reading storage RECALL Display stored readings and timestamp CONFIG Press CONFIG and then appropriate key to configure function or operation MENU Access and configure Main Menu selections When entering numeric data use to clear reading to minimum absolute value EXIT Cancels selection Use to back out of menu structures ENTER Accepts selection RANGE keys A Moves to next higher range increments digit moves to next selection V Moves to next lower range decrements digit moves to previous selection AUTO Enables or disables measurement auto range Annunciators EDIT Instrument in edit mode ERR Questionable reading invalid cal step REM Instrument in GPIB remote mode TALK Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB LSTN Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB SRQ Service request over GPIB REAR Rear input output connectors selected REL Relative measure reading displayed FILT Digital filter enabled MATH Math function enabled 4w Remote sensing enabled AUTO Autoranging enabled ARM Source measure operations being performed TRIG External trigger source selected i Reading being stored Input outp
132. 05A or 210V 105mA Model 2400 LV 2401 21V 1 05A Model 2410 2410 C 21V 1 05A or 1100V 21mA Model 2420 2420 C 21V 3 15A or 63V 1 05A Model 2425 2425 C 21V 3 15A or 105V 1 05A Model 2430 2430 C 105V 1 05A or 105V 10 5A pulse mode Model 2440 2440 C 10 5V 5 25A or 42V 1 05A When charging a battery the SourceMeter is operating as a source When dis charging a battery the SourceMeter is operating as a sink Use the V Source to charge and discharge batteries Perform the following steps for both charging and discharging 1 2 3 Connect Input Output HI to the positive terminal of the battery and Input Output LO to the negative terminal of the battery Configure the SourceMeter to source voltage and measure current Set I compliance to the current level at which the battery is to be charged or discharged Select an appropriate current measurement range or use AUTO range Battery charging To charge the battery program the SourceMeter to out put a voltage that is equivalent to the voltage rating of the battery For example to charge a 10V battery set the SourceMeter to source 10V As the battery fully charges current will decrease until it reaches zero or near zero battery charged CAUTION When the SourceMeter goes into compliance the V source becomes an I source or the I source becomes a V source For this reason make sure the voltage compliance is higher than the battery
133. 05mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 10A ia 5A 5 25A 2400 only 3 15A 2425 and 2430 DC mode 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only 3 8 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Setting the compliance limit Front panel compliance limit Set the compliance limit from the front panel as follows 1 Select the desired source and measure functions using the MEAS and SOURCE keys 2 Press the EDIT key until the cursor flashes in the compliance Compl dis play field 3 Select the desired compliance range using the RANGE arrow keys 4 Toincrement or decrement the compliance value use the EDIT arrow keys to place the cursor over the digit to be changed then press the SOURCE arrow keys to increment or decrement the compliance value 5 To change the compliance value directly simply enter the value using the numeric keys while the cursor is flashing in the compliance display field Compliance range synchronization Enabling this feature will force the measurement range to follow the compliance range setting when autoranging is off When the compliance value is set the mea surement range will be on the same range as the compliance setting You can enable range synchronization by pressing CONFIG then MEAS V for voltage or MEAS for current Select CMPL RANGE SYNC then ON to enable or OFF to disable range synchronization Remote compliance limit Table 3 3 summarizes basic commands to program the c
134. 0V PEAK PEAK N PEAK 4 WIRE INPUT 250v CATI SENSE OUTPUT cae Model 2400 2400 C WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT i f e 1100v 1 I PEAK poh H PEAK Opi GUARD SENSE 4 WIRE INPUT 250v CATI SENSE OUTPUT PEAK i Model 2410 2410 C WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT a 4 WIRE INPUT 250v SENSE OUTPUT PEAK D Model 2425 2425 C 2430 2430 C WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT Or otf 5V 50V PEAK l4 PEAK PEAK PEAK GUARD SENSE 4 WIRE Le SENSE INPUT 250v OUTPUT PEAK Model 2401 WARNING NO INTERNAL OPERAT OOo 75V 75V PEAK PEAK Opi m GUARD SENSE 4 WIRE INPUT 250v SENSE OUTPUT PEAK Model 2420 2420 C WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT O eat 4 WIRE INPUTS oy SENSE OUTPUT PEAK Model 2440 2440 C 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 5 NOTE To avoid redundancy generic SourceMeter drawings will be used in this section A generic drawing excludes the labeling for the terminal voltage differentials Sensing methods Basic source measure operations are performed using either 2 wire local sense connections Figure 2 2 or 4 wire remote sense connections Figure 2 3 The factory default sense selection is local See Sense selection page 2 12 to check and or change the sense selection Also see Section 4 for Ohms sensing issues WARNING There is no internal connection between earth ground and
135. 0V compliance condition will cause excessive cur rent to be drawn from the external battery or source See Section 13 Front panel output configuration to select the high impedance output off state Sink programming example Table 3 8 lists a command sequence to program the SourceMeter for sink opera tion Table 3 8 Sink programming example Command RST SOUR FUNC VOLT SOUR VOLT MODE FIXED SENS FUNC CURR SENS CURR RANG AUTO ON SENS CURR PROT 100E 3 OUTP ON READ Description Restore GPIB defaults V source function Fixed source mode Current measure function Auto measure range 100mA compliance discharge current Turn on output Trigger and acquire reading 4 Ohms Measurements Ohms configuration menu Outlines the ohms configuration menu that allows you to set up various ohms measurement aspects Ohms measurement methods Discusses auto and manual ohms mea surement methods and how to select them Ohms sensing Covers 2 wire and 4 wire ohms sensing Offset compensated ohms Describes offset compensated ohms which can be used to overcome the effects of offsets when making low resistance measurements Ohms source readback Covers enabling and disabling ohms source readback 6 wire ohms measurements Describes the basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for 6 wire ohms measurement which can be used for measuring resistor networks a
136. 1 are placed in the buffer With CALCulate2 selected Calc2 readings are placed in the buffer TRACe FEED cannot be changed while buffer storage is active See Section 9 Data Store for more information CONTrol lt name gt TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt Start or stop buffer Parameters lt name gt NEXT Fills buffer and stops NEVer Disables buffer storage Query CONTrol Query buffer control 18 116 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Description This command is used to select the buffer control When NEXT is selected the asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate that the buffer is enabled The storage process starts when SourceMeter is taken out of idle to perform source measure operations After the buffer stores the specified number of reading arrays as set by the POINTs command the asterisk annuciator turns off to indi cate that storage is done With NEVer selected storage into the buffer is disabled Select timestamp format FORMat lt name gt TRACe TSTamp FORMat lt name gt Select timestamp format Parameters lt name gt ABSolute Reference to first buffer reading DELTa Time between buffer readings Query FORMat Query timestamp format Description This command is used to select the timestamp format for buffer read ings With ABSolute selected each timestamp is referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer With DELTa selected timestamps provide the time between
137. 18 117 Accuracy CalCUlAtlOMS sessiossa a A 2 Measure ACCURACY ocrni a T A 2 DOUNCS ACCULAGCY sesaat aa A EA AEEA A 2 Source Delay Measure SDM cycle timing c n A 3 DeTINIMIONS assassina a vied A 3 TIMING diagrams ese A 4 WO JUCNOM orioa E E S sbededucnepndcacezs punts B 2 Status and error MESSAGES ssssssesrssssesernesessinnesertnnnestannnaaaennn B 2 Eliminating common SCPI errors ssssssesssssseserreserernnareerrneersennaae B 8 TO DU CUON ese cei ceeees osputeesvesneceenannpeeecasneesedevenss eacetene ness C 2 FETCH cohorts part aetna ee sedtecevn chad eae teed olden C 3 CALCulate 1 DATA ccc cccccceteeseceeceuesseneceveessecederensseeedeveseeess C 4 CAL Culate2 DATA stcccsestedccdsrvensceacyvendecagerspantcacndveueacdaarystads C 4 TRACE DATA c2cctect passe cues seztecssvesrecveaes Raai Ea EEE C 4 CALCulate3 DATA ciiccccisccciecestieccdecceteeedsedentetededentbantdecetnnneds C 4 UMTOCU CMON sess oh eeetedes payee llbhd peteesied peededede eetedall hee D 2 BUS CESCIIPUON srcani naii a aaia saadsavedsenanadadananaes D 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table of Contents BUSTINE Siinain A a a ada D 5 Data INOS iercesecacees nii aea e a E D 5 Bus management lines aaeesseeessssseseernassenrnnnnssnnnaaeeennenerananas D 5 Handshake lines sisisi inga i aa D 5 BUS commands wiicccssecdastedsscasasedssanadadeesnsainadida seta dacteavanasanausesndeveens D 6 Addressed multiline COMMANAS ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeete
138. 18 Error parsing mantissa EE Standard Event 4 819 Error parsing exponent EE Standard Event 4 820 Error parsing value EE Standard Event 4 821 Invalid data handle index EE Standard Event 4 822 Too small for sense range EE Standard Event 4 823 Invalid with source read back on EE Standard Event 4 824 Cannot exceed compliance range EE Standard Event 4 825 Invalid with auto ohms on EE Standard Event 4 826 Attempt to exceed power limit EE Standard Event 4 827 Invalid with ohms guard on EE Standard Event 4 828 Invalid on 1 amp range EE Standard Event 4 829 Invalid on 1kV range EE Standard Event 4 830 Invalid with INF ARM COUNT EE Standard Event 4 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode EE Standard Event 4 900 Internal System Error EE Standard Event 3 1 EE Error Event SE Status Event SYS System Error Event 2 Use following queries to read status registers Standard Event ESR Operation Event STAT OPER Measurement Event STAT MEAS Questionable Event STAT QUES B 8 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Eliminating common SCPI errors There are three SCPI errors that occur more often than any others e 113 Undefined header e 410 Query INTERRUPTED e 420 Query UNTERMINATED The following paragraphs discuss the most likely causes for these errors and methods for avoiding them 113 Undefined header This error indicates that the command you sent to the
139. 20V 21V 20V 21V 20V 21V 200V 210V 1000V 1 1kV 60V 63V 1pA 1 05yA 1pA 1 05yA 10yuA 10 5yA 10yA 10 5uA 10A 10 5pA 100A 105yA 100A 105yA 100A 105yA imA 1 05mA imA 1 05mA 1mA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 20mA 21mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 3 15A 6 4 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 6 1 cont Compliance limits 2425 2430 2440 Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 10V 10 5V 100V 105V 40V 42V 10uA 10 5uA 10A 10 5uA 100uA 105yuA 100yuA 105yuA 1mA 1 05mA 1mA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 10A id 5A 5 25A 2400 only 3 15A 2425 and 2430 DC mode 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only Compliance examples When the SourceMeter goes into real compliance the Cmpl label for the compli ance display will flash When the SourceMeter goes into range compliance the units label mA will flash instead For the following examples labels in boldface type indicate that they are flashing Measurement Range 100mA Compliance Setting C mpl 075 000 mA Flashing Cmpl indicates that real compliance has occurred The output is clamped at 75mA Measurement Range 10uA Compliance Setting Cmpl 075 000 pA Flashing mA indica
140. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 17 Contact check command reference Configure and control contact check CCHeck lt b gt SYSTem CCHeck lt b gt Enable or disable contact check Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable contact check 1 or ON Enable contact check Query CCHeck Query state of contact check Description This command is used to enable or disable contact check When using contact check remote sensing must be enabled SYST RSEN ON RESistance lt NRf gt SYSTem CCHeck RESistance lt NRf gt Set contact check threshold resistance Parameters lt NRf gt 0 60 29 159 or 50Q threshold resistance 0 to 2 20 gt 2 to 15 15Q gt 15 to 60 502 Query RESistance Query contact check threshold resistance Description This command sets the contact threshold resistance value Factory default 509 The contact check function will indicate a failure when the connection path resistance is greater than the programmed value Configure and control contact check limit test STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 LIMit4 STATe lt b gt Control LIMIT 4 test Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable Limit 4 test 0 or OFF Disable Limit 4 test Query STATe Query state of Limit 4 test Description This command enables or disables the LIMIT 4 contact check test When the limit test is enabled the Digital I O port bit pattern can be controlled by the results of the test See SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt N
141. 3 13 Source measure procedure 3 15 Speed control 7 7 Sweep 10 12 Terminals selection 2 2 Triggering 11 2 V source protection 3 12 Front panel summary 1 6 Front panel tests 1 14 Front rear terminals selection 2 2 Fuse replacement 1 11 Getting started 1 1 GPIB Connections 14 4 Front panel operation 14 5 Operation 14 4 Primary address 14 4 Protocol differences G 3 Protocol selection G 2 Reading speed comparisons G 5 Standards 14 4 Status indicators 14 5 GPIB protocol G 1 Grading mode limits operation 12 4 Guard 6 27 Cable 2 8 6 27 Methods 2 8 Ohms 2 9 6 28 Selection 2 13 Sense 6 32 Sense selection 2 12 Handler Interface 12 10 Types 12 12 IEEE 488 bus Commands D 6 Description D 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Interface function codes D 12 Lines D 5 Overview D 1 Inspection 1 3 Interlock see Output Enable 13 6 I Source operating boundaries 6 15 Limit 1 test compliance 12 3 Limit 2 course limits 12 2 Limit testing 12 1 Binning 12 4 Configuring 12 16 Data flow 12 3 Front panel operation 12 19 Grading mode 12 4 Modes 12 3 Operation 12 4 Pass fail information 12 2 Programming example 12 22 Remote operation 12 20 Sorting mode 12 7 Types 12 2 Limits 3 5 12 fine limits 12 2 Line power Connection 1 9 Frequency 1 11 Linear staircase sweep 10 2 LOCAL key 14 6 Logarithmic staircase sweep 10 4 Long form and short form versions 14 9 Manual ranging 7 2 Math 8 4 Built in functions 8 4 Front p
142. 4 fail Bit 10 CC Hi Limit test 5 fail Lo Limit test 5 fail Hi Limit test 6 fail Lo Limit test 6 fail Hi Limit test 7 fail Lo Limit test 7 fail Hi Limit test 8 fail Lo Limit test 8 fail Hi Limit test 9 fail Lo Limit test 9 fail Hi Limit test 10 fail Lo Limit test 10 fail Hi Limit test 11 fail Lo Limit test 11 fail Hi Limit test 12 fail Oo of of gt of of gt Of of BJ Of ol o S of lolo of ol Of Of Of Of GO Of Of Of CO CO Oo alo of of o ol of of o gt gt lol olol Of Of ol of ol o of o ol o Of lol o ol of of o of o ol o ol of lol Of o I Lo Limit test 12 fail 1 Limit 4 test available only with contact check option Appendix F 2 See Section 15 Measurement Event Register and Figure 15 6 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 53 Example reading string The example ASCII reading string shown in Figure 18 1 shows a measurement of a 10kQ resistor with the SourceMeter configured to Source Measure V The voltage reading is the voltage measure ment 1 000236V the current reading is the current source value 1009 and the operation was performed 72 826 seconds after the SourceMeter was turned on or after timestamp was reset The
143. 42V Query triggered amplitude for fixed source Query RST default amplitude Query lowest allowable amplitude Query highest allowable amplitude Set voltage limit for V Source 2400 lt n gt 210 to 210 20 40 60 Specify V Source limit Set limit to 20V Set limit to 40V Set limit to 60V 18 80 SCPI Command Reference 2401 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 80 100 120 160 161 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 40 to 40 20 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1100 to 1100 20 40 100 200 300 400 500 501 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 63 to 63 6 12 18 24 49 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 lt n gt 105 to 105 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set limit to 80V Set limit to 100V Set limit to 120V Set limit to 160V Set limit to 210V NONE Set limit to 210V NONE Set limit to 20V Set limit to 210V NONE Specify V Source limit Set limit to 20V Set limit to 40V NONE Set limit to 20V Set limit to 40V NONE Specify V Source limit Set limit to 20V Set limit to 40V Set limit to 100V Set limit to 200V Set limit to 300V Set limit to 400V Set limit to 500V Set limit to NONE Set limit to 1100V NONE Set limit to 20V Set limit to 1100V NONE Specify V Source limit Set limit to 6V Set limit to 12V Set limit to 18V Set limit to 24V Set limit to 30V Set limit to 36V Set limit to 48V Set limit to NONE
144. 6 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms sensing Ohms measurements can be made using either 2 wire or 4 wire sensing See Section 2 for information on connections and sensing methods Note that resis tance measurement accuracy specifications are based on using 4 wire sensing The 2 wire sensing method has the advantage of requiring only two test leads However as shown in Figure 4 2 test lead resistance can seriously affect the accuracy of 2 wire resistance measurements particularly with lower resistance values The 4 wire sensing method shown in Figure 4 3 minimizes or eliminates the effects of lead resistance by measuring the voltage across the resistor under test with a second set of test leads Because of the high input impedance of the SourceMeter voltmeter the current through the sense leads is negligible and the measured voltage is essentially the same as the voltage across the resistor under test Figure 4 2 2 wire resistance sensing SourceM eter Input O utput Test Current I 1 HI Rieap 7 Resistance Resistances Under Test Riean I Current sourced by SourceM eter Vm Voltage measured by SourceM eter Vk Voltage across resistor Measured resistance u R 2 x Riean V Actual resistance r R 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 4 3 4 wire resistance sensing SourceM eter Sense selection To select sensing mode choose 2 wire or 4 wire
145. A Gassaudav a 0 OO 0 ETITI T V N lt oO Tt tt W T o t t a gt CO Eo a a e z EIET z Z f O T p j T A A 6 l 6 6 6 T Oo Oo T x x 8 H 8 8 8 o o o t M M L 9 L L L TITE A 9 d 9 9 9 GE E 0 n n S E S S S LIOI T O 2 l v a v v v o o t o s S 3 T T o 1 Y Zz q Zz Zz Zz o r o o b 0 T v T T on L9 T TIO O o n d d 0 0 0 0 00 rz MZ MZ a wea a v a Z vw z aT WT uwun d td lt a a Ge xe Ss bu a x T a g T g o T oD o o S amp T ae 3 ol 2 0 8 x a x 2a x 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE command groups IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 11 Command groups supported by the SourceMeter are listed in Table D 3 Common commands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table D 3 IEEE command groups LISTEN TALK HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUE
146. A 1 05A A Model 2400 2400 LV Limit 63V 21V Source 105A 3 15A C Model 2420 Limit V 42V 10 5V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit V 1100V 21V Source 21mA 1 05A B Model 2410 Limit V Model 2430 Pulse Mode 105V VA I 21V l DC Mode I i 1 05A 3 15A 10 5A D Models 2425 and 2430 Source 5 25A E Model 2440 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 17 Figure 6 9 shows the limit lines for the Source The current source limit line rep resents the maximum source value possible for the presently selected current source range For example if on the 100mA current source range the current source limit line is at 105mA The voltage compliance limit line represents the actual compliance that is in effect Remember that compliance can be real or range see Compliance limit page 6 2 These limit lines are boundaries that represent the operating limits of the SourceMeter for this quadrant of operation The operating point can be anywhere inside or on these limit lines The limit line boundaries for the other quadrants are similar Figure 6 9 l Source limit lines Voltage Compliance Limit Line V Measure Current Source Limit Line Source Voltage compliance boundaries Where within the boundaries the SourceMeter operates depends on the load DUT that is connected to its output Figure 6 10 shows operation examples for resisti
147. A UWUNBE Caution must be used when branching since infinite memory loops can inadvert ently be created Also a single Source Memory Sweep will always sweep the number of points specified regardless of how many branches were taken Memory sweep branching option is set from the PASS SRC MEM LOC item of the CONFIG LIMITS MENU See Section 12 Limit Testing and Configuring limit tests for details Via remote use the CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLoca tion command See Configuring and running a sweep in this section NOTE Branch on fail is available via remote only with CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML See Section 18 for details 10 12 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configuring and running a sweep Front panel sweep operation Sweep configuration menu The sweep configuration menu is structured as follows and shown in Figure 10 4 Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the sweep menu and dashes indi cate the options of each menu item Using Section 1 Rules to navigate menus go through the following menu to select and configure the desired sweep CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu Press CONFIG then SWEEP to display the sweep configuration menu TYPE Use this menu item to select the type of sweep STAIR When the linear staircase sweep is selected you will be prompted to enter the START STOP and STEP levels LOG When the logarithmic staircase sweep is selected you will be pr
148. AY Action This programmable delay is used to allow the source to settle before a measurement is performed It can be manually set from 0 00000 to 9999 99900 seconds or Auto Delay can be enabled With Auto Delay enabled the SourceMeter automatically selects a nominal delay period based on the selected function and range 11 6 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE The Delay Action is set from the CONFIGURE V SOURCE or CONFIG URE I SOURCE menu See Section 3 Source delay In MULTIPLE mode the soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 7 Auto range change mode MEASURE Action During this phase of the SDM cycle the measurement pro cess takes place If the repeat filter is enabled as shown in the blow up drawing for Measure Action the instrument samples the specified number of reading con versions to yield a single filtered reading measurement If using the moving filter or if the filter is disabled only a single reading conversion will yield a reading Counters Programmable counters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model layers For example if performing a 10 point sweep the trigger counter would be set to 10 Operation will stay in the Trigger Layer until the 10 source delay mea sure points of the sweep are performed If you wanted to repeat the sweep three times the arm counter would be set t
149. B remote You can restore either of these default conditions as follows 1 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 2 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 3 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select RESET then press ENTER 4 Select BENCH or GPIB defaults as desired then press ENTER to complete the process Table 1 2 Factory default settings BENCH or GPIB Setting default A D Controls Auto zero On Line frequency No effect Beeper On Contact check mode Disabled Contact check threshold resistance S0ohms Contact check event detection Disabled Contact check timeout 0 Data Store No effect Digital output HI HI HI HI Digits 5 Fan 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Output on FCTN Power off Filter Off Averaging type Repeat Count 10 GPIB address No effect Guard Cable Limit tests DigOut Size 4 bit Mode Grading Binning control Immediate Auto clear Disabled Delay 0 00001 sec 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 1 2 cont Factory default settings Getting Started Clear pattern 157 H W limits Control Disabled Fail mode In compliance Cmpl pattern 15 S W limits Lim 2 3 5 12 Control Disabled Low limit 1 0 Low pattern 15 High limit 1 0 High pattern 15 Pass all tests Pass pattern 15 Source memory Next location EOT mode EOT Numbers No effect Ohms source mode Auto Offset compensated ohms Off Output Off Output enable Disabled Of
150. CAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to normal if a user defined message was displayed If the LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inopera tive For safety reasons the OUTPUT key will still be active in LLO Programming syntax The information in this section covers syntax for both common commands and SCPI commands For information not covered here see the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards See Section 16 and Section 18 for more details on common and SCPI commands respectively Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 7 Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter NRf required RST No parameter used CALCulate1 STATe lt b gt Parameter lt b gt required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used NOTE Atleast one space between the command word and the parameter is required Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brack ets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in the program message For example INITiate IMMediate These brackets indicate that IMMediate is implied optional and does not have to be used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways INITiate or INITiate MMed
151. DN gt page F 18 F 18 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual FAIL CALCulate2 LIMit4 FAIL Read LIMIT 4 test result Description This command is used to read the results of the LIMIT 4 test 0 Limit 4 test passed 1 Limit 4 test failed NOTE Reading the results of the limit test does not clear the fail indication of the test A failure can be cleared by sending a SYSTem CLEar command SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit4 SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify pattern LIMIT 4 failure Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt 0 to b111 3 bit Binary value 0 to 01111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value Query SOURce2 Query source value for specified limit Description This command is used to define the digital output fail patterns for the Limit 4 test 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 19 Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern For non decimal parame ters convert the decimal value to its binary octal or hexadecimal equivalent Decimal OUT 4 OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L
152. Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 LIMIt5 12 Path to control LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests v see Note UPPer Configure upper limit y DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v v 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 v lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v v 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 v lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v v lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 5 to 12 tests OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 5 to 12 tests v FAIL Return result of Limit 5 to 12 tests v 0 pass or 1 fail CLIMits Composite limits for Limit 1 through Limit 12 BCONtrol lt name gt Specify when to send binning info to IMM handler A limit test is performed IMMediate or after a sweep list or memory sequence END BCONtrol Query binning control MODE lt name gt Set how limit results control Digital I O GRAD MODE lines GRADing or SORTing Quer
153. E or FIXED as appropriate 7 Press EXIT to return to normal display 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 17 Step 3 Set delay Set the source delay as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or SOURCE depending on the selected source function 2 Select DELAY then press ENTER 3 Set the delay to the desired value then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The SourceMeter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 6 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information Performing a source memory sweep Step 1 Store setups in source memory Store instrument setups in source memory as follows 1 Configure the SourceMeter for various desired operating modes such as source measure delay and or math expression operation See Table 10 2 for settings that can be stored in each source memory location 2 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU e Select SAVESETUP e Select SOURCE MEMORY e Select SAVE e Use the and f keys and the cursor keys to display the desired mem ory location and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu
154. Event Status Status Enable Register Register Logical Operation Complete OR Query Error E Device Specific Error OSB OSB Execution Error STB SRE Command Error SRE User Request M s s MSS Power On Logical aster Summary Status OR MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit MAV Message Available ESB Event Summary Bit RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Staus OSB Operation Summary Bit Always Zero Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte MSS bit is in STB response Measurement Operation Measurement Measurement Event Operation Operation Event Condition Event Enable Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Register Register Register Limit 1 Fail g Calibrating Cal Cal Cal Low Limit 2 Fail High Limit 2 Fail Low Limit 3 Fail Sweeping High Limit 3 Fail u hae Waiting for Limits Pass Trigger Reading Available Logical Waiting for Arm Logical Reading Overflow OR OR Buffer Available Buffer Full Contact Check Output Enable Over Temperature Over Voltage Protection Compliance Always Zero Idle 15 4 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Clearing registers and queues When the SourceMeter is turned on the bits of all registers in the status structure
155. Figure 11 3 Remote trigger model See Note O ARM DIRection ARM SOURce IM Mediate ACCeptor BUS Arm Event Detector ARM OUTPut TIM er MANual TLIN k N STest PSTest BSTest ARM OUTPut E gt NONE TENTer SOURce TRIG ger DIRection ACCeptor Source Event Detector Trigger Delay SOURCE Action TRIG ger O UTPut H gt SOU Rce Delay Event Detector DELAY Action TRIG ger IN Put SOURce 0 0 sec TRIG ger SO U Rce IM Mediate TLINk TRIG ger IN Put Trigger In Source SO U Rce D ELay lt n gt AUTO 0 001 sec TRIGger O UTPut gt DELay Measure Event Detector MEASU RE Action TRIG ger O UTPut gt SEN Se TRIG ger IN Put SEN Se GPIB Default Output Trigger GPIB default parameter for TRIGG ER O U TPut is NONE 4x In SYSTem RCM ode MULTiple the soak time programmed with SO U Rce 1 SO AK takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 17 for details Another Trigger 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Note The following commands lace the SourceM eter into idle DCL SDC ABORt RST SYSTem PREset and RCL Idle Arm Layer ARM COUNt lt n gt INF 1 NONE TEXit Trigger Layer TRIGger COUNt lt n gt 1 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 13 While o
156. For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the instrument is taken out of the idle state when the output is turned on 18 56 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output enable line STATe lt b gt OUTPut 1 IENABle STATe lt b gt Control output enable Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable output enable 1 or ON Enable output enable Query STATe Query state of output enable line Description This command is used to enable or disable the output enable When enabled the source cannot be turned on unless the output enable line pin 8 of the rear panel OUTPUT ENBLE connector is pulled to a logic low state When the output enable line goes to a logic high state the source turns off See Section 13 Digital I O port and Output enable line for details about using output enable with a test fixture When disabled the logic level on the outlook enable line has no effect on the output state of the source TRIPped OUTPut 1 ENABle TRIPped Description This query command is used to determine output enable has been tripped The tripped condition 1 means that the source can be turned on output enable line at logic low level A 0 will be returned if the source cannot be turned on output enable line at logic high level Output off states SMODe OUTPut 1 SMODe lt name gt Select output off mode Parameters lt name gt HIiMPedance Disconnect Input Output NORMal Normal output off state
157. H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V OUT 4 not used in 3 bit mode values 0 to 7 Configure and control contact check event detection SOURce lt name gt TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce lt name gt Enable disable event detection Parameters lt name gt _ IMMediate Disable contact check event detection CCHeck Enable contact check event detec tion Query SOURce Query state of contact check event detec tion Description This command enables or disables the contact check event detec tion When event detection is enabled the unit will wait the specified timeout period TOUT lt NRf gt page F 20 before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to the next measurement F 20 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TOUT lt NRf gt TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT lt NRf gt Specify contact check timeout Parameters lt NRf gt 0 00000 to 999 99990 sec Contact check timeout Query TOUT Query contact check timeout Description This command programs the contact check timeout interval When contact event detection is enabled SOURce lt name gt page F 19 the SourceMeter will wait the specified timeout period before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to the next measurement If the timeout interval is set to 0 with contact event detection enabled the unit will wait indefinitely Contact ch
158. IB defaults Select voltage source Fixed voltage source mode Select 20V source range Source output 10V 10mA compliance Current measure function 10mA measure range Current reading only Output on before measuring Trigger acquire reading 1 Steps correspond to front panel steps listed previously in Front panel source measure procedure 2 Commands must be sent in order given 3 Instrument must be addressed to talk after READ to acquire data 3 20 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Measure only Front panel measure only In addition to being used for conventional source measure operations the SourceMeter can also be used to measure only voltage or current Perform the following steps to use the SourceMeter to measure voltage or current 1 Select source measure functions Measure voltage only voltmeter Press SOURCE to select the I Source and press MEAS V to select the voltage measurement function Measure current only ammeter Press SOURCE V to select the V Source and press MEAS to select the current measurement function Set source and compliance levels Use the editing procedure provided in step 2 of the Basic source measure procedure to edit the source and compliance levels as follows a Select the lowest source range and set the source level to zero 0 00000UA or 000 000mV b Set compliance to a level that is higher than the expec
159. If the queue becomes full the message 350 Queue Overflow will occupy the last memory location On power up the Error Queue is empty When empty the mes sage 0 No Error is placed in the queue Messages in the Error Queue are preceded by a code number Negative num bers are used for SCPl defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The messages are listed in Appendix B As shown in Table 15 7 there are commands to read the entire message code and message or the code only On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue As listed in Table 15 9 there are commands to enable and or disable messages For these commands the lt list gt parameter is used to specify which messages to enable or disable The messages are specified by their codes The following examples show various forms for using the lt list gt parameter lt list gt 110 Single message 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 220 Range entry and single entry separated by a comma When you enable messages messages not specified in the list are disabled When you disable messages each listed message is removed from the enabled list NOTE _ To prevent all messages from entering the Error Queue send the enable command along with the null list parameter as follows STATus QUEue E
160. M TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental command Examples are ARM TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value ARM TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value ARM TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case and any case combination Examples RST rst DATA data SYSTem PRESet system preset NOTE Using all upper case will result in slightly faster command response times Long form and short form versions A SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command subsystem tables in Section 18 provide the long form version How ever the short form version is indicated by upper case characters Examples SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRES long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in long form or short form and not some thing in between For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed 14 10 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the shor
161. MINimum 6 3A or 210V MAXimum 6 3A or 210V 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 21 to 21 Set l Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 21A or 210V MAXimum 21A or 210V 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Set l Source level amps 42 to 42 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 10 5A or 84V MAXimum 10 5A or 84V STEP Query step size for sweep STEP DEFault Query RST default level STEP MINimum Query lowest allowable level STEP MAXimum Query highest allowable level This command is used to specify a step size for a linear sweep When the sweep is started the source level changes in equal steps from the start level to the stop level A measurement is performed at each source step including the start and stop levels NOTE This command cannot be used for a logarithmic sweep Use the POINTs command to set the source measure points for a log sweep To avoid a setting conflicts error make sure the step size is greater than the start value and less than the stop value The number of source measure points in a linear sweep can be cal culated as follows Points Stop Start Step 1 Points Span Step 1 An alternate way to set the source measure points in a linear sweep is to simply specify the number of source measure points in the sweep using the POINts command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 89 Note that the S
162. NABle 15 20 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 15 9 Error queue commands Command Description Default STATus STATus Subsystem QUEue Read Error Queue Note 1 NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for Error Queue Note 2 ENABIe Read the enabled messages DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 2 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem ERRor Read Error Queue Note 1 NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message ALL Read and clear all errors status code and message COUNt Read the number of messages in queue CODE Code numbers only NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code only ALL Read and clear all errors status codes only CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Notes 1 Power up and CLS empties the Error Queue STATus PRESet has no effect 2 Power up enables error messages and disables status messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect Programming example read error queue The following command reads the error queue STAT QUE 16 Common Commands Command summary Lists the IEEE 488 2 common commands used by the SourceMeter Command reference Provides a detailed reference for all common commands except for those associated with the
163. NOTE Buffer statistics for V Q and MATH are calculated and displayed sepa rately For example if ohms readings are displayed all buffer statistics displayed are based on ohms readings Minimum and maximum This mode displays the minimum and maximum readings stored in the buffer The buffer location number and timestamp are also provided for these readings If desired you can go to those buffer locations to obtain more data about the read ings 9 4 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Peak to peak This mode displays the peak to peak reading peak to peak Maximum Mini mum Average The average mode displays the mean average of all measured readings stored in the buffer The following equation is used to calculate mean where yis the average X is a stored reading nis the number of stored readings Standard deviation This mode displays the standard deviation of buffered readings The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation AE n l1 where yis the standard deviation X is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings Timestamp format Buffer readings can be recalled using the absolute timestamp format or the delta format For the absolute format readings are referenced to zero seconds For the delta format the timestamp indicates the time between the displayed reading and the previous reading Perform the following steps to set the timestamp format
164. NOTE When using SourceMeter autoranging it is recommended that you use measure output triggers to avoid erroneous results Arm Layer Output Trigger The SourceMeter can also be programmed to output a trigger when operation enters the Trigger Layer or after operation leaves the Trigger Layer and enters back into the Arm Layer This output trigger is typically sent to another instrument to signal the end of a scan or sweep Bench defaults The bench defaults are listed as follows They are also denoted in Figure 11 1 by the symbol Arm In Event Immediate e Trigger In Source Immediate e Arm Count 1 e Trigger Count 1 Trigger Delay 0 0 sec e Delay Action 0 001 sec e Source Trigger In Event On e Delay Trigger In Event Off e Measure Trigger In Event Off e Trigger Out Events All Trigger Out Events are disabled off e Arm Out Event Off e Event Detection Bypasses Never both layers When the output is turned ON the SourceMeter will run in a continuous loop around the trigger model After each Measure Action operation will continue at the top of the trigger model The SourceMeter can be returned to idle by turning the output OFF Configuring triggering Trigger configuration menu Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu which is outlined below and shown in Figure 11 2 Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the menu while dashes and slashes indicate o
165. NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe lt state gt CALCulate2 LIMitX STATe lt state gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 FAIL CALCulate2 LIMitX FAIL CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation lt location gt CALCulate2 CLIMitis FAIL SMLocation lt location gt CALCulate2 CLIMits BCONtrol lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar AUTO lt state gt CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE lt name gt Specify limit 1 fail bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Specify lower Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf NDN bit pat tern Specify upper Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf bit pattern Specify pass pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN bit pattern Enable disable Limit 1 test state ON or OFF Enable disable Limit X test X 2 3 5 12 state ON or OFF Query Limit 1 test result 0 pass 1 fail Query Limit X test result X 2 3 5 12 0 pass 1 fail Specify pass bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Sorting mode only if limits 2 3 and 5 12 dis abled Specify fail bit pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN pattern Specify pass source memory location Location NRf memory o
166. OLTage DC Volts measurement function RESistance Ohms measurement function NOTE Each function in the list must be enclosed in quotes double or single and separated by a comma i e func on volt curr Query ON Query functions that are enabled OFF Query functions that are disabled Description When concurrent measurements are enabled these commands are used to enable or disable functions to be measured The ON com mand is used to include enable one or more measurement func tions in the list and the OFF command is used to remove disable one or more functions from the list Note that each function specified in the list must be enclosed in sin gle or double quotes and functions must be separated by commas Examples FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent Enable volts and amps functions FUNCtion OFF VOLTage CURRent Disable volts and amps functions Note that there is a stand alone command that can be used to enable or disable all three measurement functions see ALL page 18 60 If concurrent measurements see CONCurrent lt b gt page 18 58 are disabled the ON command can only turn on one function at a time NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode only one function can be enabled Trying to enable more than one function results in error 108 NOTE The function selected with the SENSE FUNC command will not be displayed on the front panel if concurrent measurements
167. OLTagelncludes voltage reading CURRentIncludes current reading RESistance Includes resistance reading TIMEIncludes timestamp STATusIncludes status information NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma i e ELEMents VOLT age CURRent RESistance Query ELEMents Query elements in data string This command is used to specify the elements to be included in the data string in response to the following queries FETCh READ MEASure TRACe DATA You can specify from one to all five elements Each element in the list must be separated by a comma These elements shown in Figure 18 1 are explained as follows NOTE An overflow reading reads as 9 9E37 VOLTage This element provides the voltage measurement or the programmed voltage source reading If sourcing voltage and mea suring voltage this element will provide the voltage measurement measure reading takes priority over source reading If voltage is not 18 50 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual sourced or measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used CURRent This element provides the current measurement or the programmed current source reading If sourcing current and measur ing current this element will provide the current measurement mea sure reading takes priority over source reading If current is not sourced or measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used RESistance This e
168. OURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify pattern LIMIT 1 failure CALCulate2 LIMitx LOWer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitx UPPer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify pattern for grading mode lower LIMIT x failure x 2 3 5 12 Specify pattern for grading mode upper LIMIT x failure x 2 3 5 12 NOTE The above commands to set failure patterns for compliance and limits are invalid for the Model 2401 and will cause undefined header errors Parameters Query Description lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt 0 to 6111 3 bit Binary value O to 61111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value O to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value SOURce2 Query source value for specified limit These commands are used to define the digital output fail patterns for the specified tests 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit Note that the fail patterns for Limits 2 3 5 12 apply only to the grading mode Tests are performed in the following order Limit Test 4 contact option only see Appendix F Limit Test 1 Limit Test 2 Lower Limit 2 Upper Limit 2 Limit Test x where x 3 5 12 in ascending numerical order Lower Limit x b Upper Limit x The first failure in the test sequence determines the bit pattern for the digital output port Subsequent failures in the test sequence will not change the d
169. Otherwise the first limit test band that passes will output its LOW SOUR2 pattern UPP SOUR2 patterns will be ignored If LIMIT1 or LIMIT 4 fails their SOUR2 patterns will be output If no LIMIT2 3 5 12 limit passes the CALC2 CLIM FAIL SOURZ2 pattern will be output Clear test results IMMediate CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar IMMediate Clears test results and resets Digital I O Port Description This command clears the test results pass or fail of the limit tests and resets the output lines of the Digital I O port back to the SOURce2 TTL settings See SOURce2 page 18 98 subsystem AUTO lt b gt CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto clear for test results Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto clear 0 or OFF Disable auto clear Query AUTO Query state of auto clear Description With auto clear enabled test results will clear and the output lines of the Digital I O port will reset when the INITiate command is sent to start a new test sequence When disabled you must use IMMediate to perform the clear actions 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 43 CALCulate3 Provides statistical data on buffer readings Select statistic FORMat lt name gt CALCulate3 FORMat lt name gt Specify CALC3 format Parameters lt name gt MEAN Mean value of readings in buffer SDEViation Standard deviation of readings in buffer MAXimum Largest reading in buffer MINimum Lowest re
170. R drop in the GUARD test lead and or switch contacts on a switching card Figure 6 18 was modified to create Figure 6 19A by changing the value of R3 to 100Q and showing the 19 resistance R1 of the GUARD test lead Since the resistance path from GUARD to LO is less than 1kQ the IR drop in the guard test lead Ry becomes significant The guard voltage applied to the bottom of R2 is now significantly lower than the In Out HI voltage of the SourceMeter As a result leakage current I flows through R2 adversely affecting the resistance measure ment of R1 The guard test lead IR drop is compensated for by connecting GUARD SENSE as shown in Figure 6 19B Sensing allows the guard voltage to be sensed mea sured at the resistor network for better guard voltage regulation If the remotely sensed guard voltage is less than the output voltage of the SourceMeter the guard voltage will be increased until the sensed guard voltage equals the output HI voltage Note that in order to ensure that guard current I in Figure 6 19 does not exceed 50mA output voltage from the SourceMeter must not exceed 5V 50mA x 100Q 5V NOTE Guard sense operation is automatic There is no menu selection to enable or disable guard sense For 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD output off state For details on the GUARD output off state see Section 13 Output off states 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 33 Fi
171. RCE RANGING Use this menu item to control source ranging ignored in source memory BEST FIXED With this option the SourceMeter will select a single fixed source range that will accommodate all of the source levels in the sweep For example if the minimum and maximum source levels in the sweep for the Model 2400 are 1V and 30V the 200V source range will be used AUTO RANGE With this option the SourceMeter will select the most sensitive source range for each source level in the sweep For exam ple for a 1V source level the 2V source range will be used and fora 3V source level the 20V source range will be used Note that the range changing process of AUTO RANGE may cause transients in the sweep If these transients cannot be tolerated use the BEST FIXED source range FIXED With this option the source remains on the range presently on when the sweep is started For sweep points that exceed the source range capability the source will output the maximum level for that range For example if the source is on the 2V range when the sweep is started it will remain on the 2V range for the entire sweep If the config ured sweep points are 1V 2V 3V 4V and 5V the sweep will be 1V 2V 2 1V 2 1V and 2 1V COMPLIANCE ABORT Use this option to control abort on compliance which will abort a sweep in progress if compliance is detected NEVER This selection disables abort on compliance EARLY Abort sweep if comp
172. ST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END D 12 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part of the IEEE 488 standards define an instrument s ability to support various interface functions and should not be con fused with programming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the SourceMeter are listed in Table D 4 Table D 4 SourceMeter interface function codes Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker serial poll unaddressed to talk on LAG L4 Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen on TAG SR1 Service Request capability RL1 Remote Local capability PPO No Parallel Poll capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability Co No Controller capability E1 Open collector bus drivers TEO No Extended Talker capability LEO No Extended Listener capability IEEE 488 amp SCPI Conformance Information E 2 IEEE 488 amp SCPI Conformance Information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction The IEEE 488 2 standard requires specific information about how the SourceMe ter implements the standard Paragraph 4 9 of the IEEE 488 2 standard Std 488 2 1987 lists the documentation requirements Table E 1 provides a summary of the requirements and provide
173. STATe Query NPLC caching state REFResh Force an immediate update for all NPLC values in cache RESet Clear the cache of all NPLC values NPLCycles Return a list of NPLC values in the cache from oldest to newest LFRequency lt freq gt Select line frequency 50 or 60 Hz AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto frequency Note 1 AUTO Query state of auto frequency LFRequency Query line frequency TIME Timestamp RESet Reset timestamp to zero seconds AUTO lt b gt Enable disable timestamp reset when OFF exiting idle TIME Query timestamp MEMory Initialize memory INITialize Initialize battery backed RAM y LOCal Take unit out of remote RS 232 only v RWLock lt b gt Enable or disable local lockout RS 232 only RCMode lt name gt Set auto range on compliance mode SINGle SINGle or MULTiple RCMode Query auto range on compliance mode MEP Path to 488 1 protocol Appendix G STATe Query protocol 1 SCPI 0 488 1 HOLDoff lt b gt Enable disable NDAC hold off OFF 1 The auto line frequency setting is not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 23 Table 18 10 TRACe command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI TRACe DATA Use TRACe or DATA as root command Note v DATA Read the contents of the buffer data store v CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query bytes available and by
174. See Section 18 MEASURE Action During this phase of the SDM cycle the measurement pro cess takes place If the repeat filter is enabled as shown in Figure 11 4 the instru ment samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield a single filtered reading measurement If using the moving filter or if the filter is disabled only a single reading conversion will yield a reading 11 16 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 4 Measure action MEASU RE Action Filter Process O ffsest Comp Ohms Autorange CALC1 CALC2 Repeat CONV Reading Conversion Counters Programmable counters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model layers For example if performing a 10 point sweep the trigger counter would be set to 10 TRIGger COUNt 10 Operation will stay in the Trigger Layer until the 10 source delay measure points of the sweep are performed If you wanted to repeat the sweep three times the arm counter would be set to three ARM COUNt 3 Three 10 point sweeps can then be performed for a total of 30 source delay measure actions The maximum buffer size for the SourceMeter is 2500 readings The product of the finite values of the two counters cannot exceed 2500 For example if you set an arm count of two the maximum trigger count will be 1250 2500 2 1250 How ever you can set the arm count to infinite INF With an infinite arm count the max imum trigger coun
175. Select output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 2 OLINe Query output trigger line OUTPut lt event list gt Output trigger after SOURce DELay SENSe NONE or not NONE at all OUTPut Query when output trigger is going to occur 18 26 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Calculate subsystems There are three Calculate Subsystems The CALC1 Subsystem is used for math expressions CALC2 is used for limit tests and CALC3 provides statistical data on readings stored in the buffer The commands in these subsystems are summarized in Table 18 1 CALCu late 1 Configure and control math expressions NOTE Percent deviation DEV is included in the catalog as a built in math expression but is only available from the front panel However percent devi ation can be added as a user defined math expression for remote operation DELete SELected lt name gt Select create math expression name CATalog CALCulate 1 MATH EXPression CATalog Query list of expression names Description This query command is used to list the math expression names This list includes the built in expression names as well as the names of expressions defined by the user The names for the built in expres sions are as follows POWER OFFCOMPOHM VOLTCOEF VARALPHA DEV Thus the CATalog command will return the above names as well as the names of any user defined expression
176. Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 20 Data flow front panel Measurement Conversions A Math FCTN and Limit Tests D isabled M easurement Conversions VL 2 Math FCTN or Limit Tests B Math FCTN or Limit Tests Enabled M easurement Conversions V 1 Q Math FCTN C Both Math FCTN and Limit Tests Enabled Source Measure Concepts 6 35 Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Readings Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Math or Limits Results Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Math and Limits Results 6 36 Source Measure Concepts Buffer considerations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual When the SourceMeter is in the process of storing readings configuration changes affect what gets stored in the buffer These storage considerations and restrictions are summarized in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Buffer considerations Configuration at start of the storage process Measure V or Q MATH FCTN enabled REL LIMITS enabled What happens if the basic measure ment function V I or Q is changed Buffer tracks Buffer pauses Buffer pauses What happens if the MATH function is changed V or Q stored MATH not stored OK Buffer pauses What happens if REL or LIMITS is changed V or Q stored REL or Limits not stored MATH stored REL or Limits not stored OK The first column of Tabl
177. T Volts source function SENS FUNC CURR DC SENS CURR PROT 0 1 SOUR VOLT MODE LIST SOUR LIST VOLT 7 1 3 8 2 TRIG COUN 5 SOUR DEL 0 1 OUTP ON READ Current sense function 100mA current compliance List volts sweep mode TV 1V 3V 8V 2V sweep points Trigger count sweep points 100ms source delay Turn on source output Trigger sweep request data 10 22 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source memory sweep commands Table 10 7 summarizes remote commands used for custom sweep operation See Section 18 Configure memory sweep for more details on these commands Table 10 7 Source memory sweep commands Command Description SOURce FUNCtion MEM SOURce MEMory POINts lt n gt SOURce MEMory STARt lt n gt SOURce MEMory RECall lt n gt SOURce SAVE lt n gt SENSe CURRent RANGe HOLDoff lt b gt SENSe CURRent RANGe HOLDoff DELay lt NRf gt Select memory sweep mode Specify number of sweep points n points Select source memory start location n location Return to specified setup n memory location Save setup in memory n memory location Enable ON disable OFF current range holdoff Set holdoff delay in seconds 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation Source memory sweep programming example 10 23 Table 10 8 summarizes the basic remote command sequence for performing th
178. TEP and POINts commands are coupled Changing the step size also changes the number of source measure points Conversely changing the number of source measure points changes the step size POINts lt n gt SOURce 1 SWEep POINts lt n gt Set source measure points for sweep Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify number of source measure points MINimum 1 MAXimum 2500 DEFault 2500 Query POINts Query number of sweep points POINts DEFault Query RST default number of sweep points POINts MINimum Query lowest allowable number of sweep points POINts MAXimum Query highest allowable number of sweep points Description The POINts command specifies the total number of source measure points in a sweep For a linear sweep the source measure points are equally spaced stepped between the start level and the stop level For a log sweep the source measure points are equally spaced on a logarithmic scale Note that the start and stop levels are source mea sure points Step size for a linear sweep can be calculated as follows Step Size Stop Start Points 1 Step Size Span Points 1 Step size for a logarithmic sweep can be calculated as follows log 10 Stop log10 Start Log Step Size Pp Points 1 An alternate way to set the source measure points in a sweep is to specify the step size using the STEP command Note that the POINts and STEP commands are coupled Changing the number of source measure points
179. URCE and EDIT arrow keys also enable the edit mode They choose the last selected field When editing the source value the source is updated immediately allow ing you to adjust the source value while the output is on The source value cannot be changed while the SourceMeter is perform ing a sweep This occurs with Output ON and either the SWEEP key is pressed Offset Compensation is enabled under Ohms or OFF COMP OHMS VOLT COEFF or VAR ALPHA functions are enabled When editing the compliance value compliance is not updated until ENTER is pressed or the edit mode is allowed to time out EDIT always goes to the source field first except while sweeping in which case it goes into the compliance field Source and compliance values cannot be edited in AUTO OHMS mode MANUAL OHMS allows you to edit source and compliance See Section 4 Perform the following steps to edit the source and compliance values 1 Press EDIT to enter the edit mode The flashing digit indicates which read ing Source or compliance is presently selected for editing If you wish to edit the other field press EDIT again 2 Use the RANGE arrow keys to select a range that will accommodate the value you want to set See Section 7 for range information For best accu racy use the lowest possible source range 3 Enter the desired source or compliance value There are two methods to edit the value value adjust and numeric entry NOTE To clear the sour
180. X STATe CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX _LOWer SOURce2 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation TRIGger DELay SYSTem GUARd X CURRent or VOLTage Limit X Limit 2 3 5 12 t Not available when the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode Sweep branching When using a Source Memory Sweep while performing limit tests the normal sequence of sweep memory points can be changed This is useful when based on the results of an initial test a different set of tests are needed The sweep can branch to a specified memory location point or proceed to the next memory location in the list When a memory location is specified the sweep will branch to that memory location if the test is successful PASS condition If not successful FAIL condition the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list regardless of the outcome of the test PASS or FAIL condition Figure 10 3 shows a six point sweep branching example In this case the unit is programmed to branch to location 7 when a pass conditions occurs at location 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 11 Figure 10 3 Six point test branching example Source Memory Locations Pass 7 8 9 Should be the same to maintain triggering sequence OU
181. a programming example for controlling range and digits The SourceMeter is set up as follows e Source function volts e Source level 10V e Measure function amps Amps range 10uA e Display digits 5H Range and digits programming example SOUR VOLT 10 SENS FUNC CURR SENS CURR RANG 10E 6 DISP DIG 5 OUTP ON READ OUTP OFF Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function Output 10V Amps measure function 10uA range 5Hdisplay digits Turn on output Trigger and acquire reading Turn off output 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 7 Speed The Speed Accuracy menu is used to set the integration time of the A D converter period of time the input signal is measured The integration time affects the usable digits the amount of reading noise and the ultimate reading rate of the instrument The integration time is specified in parameters based on the number of power line cycles NPLC where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16 67msec 1 60 and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec 1 50 In general the fastest integration time FAST 0 01 PLC results in increased read ing noise and fewer usable digits The slowest integration time HI ACCURACY 10 PLC provides the best noise rejection In between settings are a compromise between speed and noise The default power on speed setting is NORMAL 1 PLC NOTE For
182. able delay DELay MAXimum Query the largest allowable delay Description The delay is used to delay operation in the trigger layer After the programmed trigger event occurs the instrument waits until the delay period expires before performing the Device Action NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used The Pulse Mode uses pulse width and pulse delay for pulse timing See Section 5 for details on Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 119 SOURce lt name gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 SOURce lt name gt Specify arm event control source TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce lt name gt Specify trigger event control source Parameters lt name gt IMMediate Pass operation through immediately TLINk Select Trigger Link trigger as event TIMer Select timer as event MANual Select manual event BUS Select bus trigger as event NSTest Select low SOT pulse as event PSTest Select high SOT pulse as event BSTest Select high or low SOT pulse as event NOTE Only IMMediate and TLINk are available as trigger layer control sources Query Description SOURce Query programmed control source These commands are used to select the event control source With IMMediate selected operation immediately continues A specific event can be used to control operation With TLINk selected operation continues when a trigger pulse is received via the Trigger Link NOTE The following control sources ar
183. ading in buffer PKPK MAXimum MINimum Query FORMat Query programmed math format Description This command is used to select the desired statistic on readings stored in the buffer See Section 9 Data Store for details on these statistics Readings stored in the buffer can be raw measured readings the results of the CALC1 calculation or CALC2 readings The TRACe FEED command in the TRACe Subsystem is used to select the type of readings to store Acquire statistic DATA CALCulate3 DATA Read CALC3 result Description This query command is used to perform the selected statistic opera tion and read the result s The result s is always returned in ASCII format If the buffer is configured to store raw measured readings TRACe FEED SENSe1 and multiple functions were measured the selected statistic operation will be performed on all the measured readings For example if voltage and current measurements were stored in the buffer then the selected statistic operation will be per formed on both readings Statistics for multiple measurement func tions are returned in the following order voltage statistic current statistic resistance statistic Statistic operations are not performed on TIME and STATus data ele ments that are stored in the buffer 18 44 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual If the buffer is configured to store the result of CALC1 or CALC2 TRACe FEED CALC1 or CALC2 on
184. ail when the SourceMeter goes into compliance With OUT specified the test will fail when the SourceMeter comes out of compliance DATA lt n gt CALCulate2 LIMitx LOWer DATA lt n gt Specify lower LIMIT x x 2 3 5 12 CALCulate2 LIMitx UPPer DATA lt n gt Specify upper LIMIT x x 2 3 5 12 Parameters lt n gt 9 999999e20 to Specify limit value 9 999999e20 DEFault Set specified lower limit to 1 Set specified upper limit to 1 MINimum Set specified limit to 9 999999e20 MAXimum Set specified limit to 9 999999e20 Query UPPer Query specified upper limit UPPer DEFault Query RST default upper limit UPPer MINimum Query lowest allowable upper limit UPPer MAXimum Query largest allowable upper limit LOWer Query specified lower limit LOWer DEFault Query RST default lower limit LOWer MINimum Query lowest allowable lower limit LOWer MAXimum Query largest allowable lower limit 18 36 Description SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual These commands are used to set the upper and lower limits for LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 through LIMIT 12 tests The actual limit depends on which measurement function is currently selected For example a limit value of 1p is 1yA for the amps function and 1uV for the volts function A limit value is not range sensitive A limit of 2 for volts is 2V on all measurement ranges SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance S
185. al instruments has requested service with the SRQ line 15 10 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status byte and service request commands The commands to program and read the Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register are listed in Table 15 3 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 15 5 and Reading registers page 15 6 NOTE To reset the bits of the Service Request Enable Register to 0 use 0 as the parameter value for the SRE command i e SRE 0 Table 15 3 Status Byte and Service Request Enable Register commands Command Description Default STB Read Status Byte Register SRE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the Service Request Enable Register Note lt NDN gt Bxx xBinary format each x 1 or 0 HxHexadecimal format x 0 to FF QxOctal format x 0 to 377 lt NRf gt 0 to 255Decimal format Read the Service Request Enable Register Note CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect on the Service Request Enable Register Programming example set MSS B6 when error occurs The first command of sequence in Table 15 4 enables EAV error available When an invalid command is sent line 4 bits B2 EAV and B6 MSS of the Sta tus Byte Register set to 1 The last command reads the Status Byte Register using the binary format which directly indicates which bits are set The command to
186. al to the upper limit If the lower limit is equal to the upper limit auto ranging is effectively disabled See below When autoranging is disabled you can manually program the unit for any range below the lower limit Note also that the maximum volts lower limit depends on the compliance setting see below 18 66 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual ULIMit lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO ULIMit Query auto ranging upper limit for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ULIMit Query auto ranging upper limit for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO ULIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging upper limit for ohms Parameters lt n gt 2 1e8 to 2 1e8 Ohms upper limit 2400 and 2410 2 1e7 to 2 1e7 Ohms upper limit 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Query ULIMIt Query auto range upper limit Description Auto range upper limits are intended primarily for SYST RCM MULT support See SYSTem subsystem page 18 103 For voltage and current the upper limit is controlled by the compliance range and therefore is available only as a query When autoranging is disabled you can manually program the unit for any range above the upper limit ohms only Current range holdoff HOLDoff lt b gt HOLDoff DELay lt NRf gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe HOLDoff lt b gt Enable disable current range holdoff SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe HOLDoff DELay lt NRf gt Set holdoff delay Parameters lt b gt Ena
187. alculation 1 or ON Enable CALC1 calculation Query STATe Query state on or off of CALC1 Description This command is used to enable or disable the CALC1 calculation When enabled the selected math expression will be performed when the SourceMeter is triggered to perform the programmed source measure operations After the SourceMeter returns to idle you can read the result of the selected math expression using the CALC1 DATA command See next command When disabled the CALC1 DATA command will return the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 DATA CALCulate 1 DATA Read CALC1 result Description This query command is used to read the result of the CALC1 calcula tion The largest valid calculation result can be 9 9e37 which defined by SCPI is infinity For scalar math non vectored math this command is used to return calculation results for all the programmed source measure points For example if 20 source measure operations were performed this command will return 20 calculation results For vector math this command will only return the calculation results for the specified vector points An invalid NAN not a number result of 9 91e37 indicates that one of the following conditions exist e Error in the expression e The required measurement function is disabled e CALC1 is disabled See STATe lt b gt page 18 32 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 33 NOTE See App
188. also changes the step size Conversely changing the step size changes the number of source measure points 18 90 SCPI Command Reference DiRection lt name gt SOURce 1 SWEep DIRection lt name gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set direction of sweep Parameters lt name gt UP Run sweep from start to stop DOWn Run sweep from stop to start Query DIRection Query direction of sweep Description Normally a sweep is run from the start level to the stop level The STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN commands are used to set these levels This command lets you change the execution direction of the sweep With DOWn selected the sweep will begin at the stop level and end at the start level Selecting UP restores sweep operation to the nor mal start to stop direction Abort on compliance CABort lt name gt SOURce 1 SWEep CABort lt name gt Control abort on compliance Parameters lt name gt NEVer Disable abort on compliance EARLy Abort at start of SDM cycle LATE Abort at end of SDM cycle Query CABort Query abort on compliance Description This feature aborts a sweep in progress if compliance is detected There are three modes NEVer EARLy and LATE NEVer turns off the feature EARLy will abort when compliance is detected at the beginning of the SDM cycle and LATE aborts if the compliance is detected at the end of the SDM cycle 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configure list SCPI Comma
189. ample of how to calculate the actual source output limits assume that you are sourcing 0 7mA on the 1mA source range You can compute the reading limit range from source current one year accuracy specifications as follows 0 034 of output 200nA offset 0 034 x 0 7mA 200nA 238nA 200nA 438nA In this case the actual current output range is 0 7mA 438nA or from 0 69956mA to 0 70044mA Accuracy 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 3 Source Delay Measure SDM cycle timing The following timing information assumes that the SourceMeter is being triggered externally via the Trigger Link For Cases through IV it is assumed that the Output Auto Off feature is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON and the source setting changes for each triggered SDM cycle The discussion is applicable for linear log and custom sweeps It is also applicable to applications that use the triggered source feature SOURce1 VOLTage TRIGger or SOURce1 CURRent TRIGger The discussion is not applicable for memory sweeps SOURce1 MEMory For Cases V and VI it is assumed that the Output Auto Off feature is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF and the source setting remains the same for each triggered SDM cycle In this configuration the static source remains on dur ing all SDM cycles Definitions Trigger latency Trigger latency is the time from when an external trigger event occurs to when the Source Meter ta
190. ance output off state the V Source is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range In theory with the V Source set to zero the SourceMeter will not source or sink power In practice the source value may not be exactly at zero Therefore the SourceMeter may source or sink a very small amount of power In most cases this source or sink power level is not significant ZERO When in this output off state the ZER message is displayed instead of OFF and the SourceMeter is configured as follows When the V Source is the selected source 13 10 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The programmed V Source value remains on the display e Internally the V Source is set to OV e The current compliance setting remains the same as the output on value Real and range compliance detection remains active e Measurements are performed and displayed When the I Source is the selected source e The programmed I Source value remains on the display e Internally the V Source is selected and set to OV e Current compliance is set to the programmed Source value or to 0 5 full scale of the present current range whichever is greater e Measurements are performed and displayed While in the ZERO output off state the SourceMeter can be used as an I Meter The ZERO output off state can also be used with the V Source and Output
191. anel operation 3 15 Remote operation 3 18 Speed 7 7 Remote programming 7 8 Setting 7 7 Status and error messages 1 14 Status byte and service request SRQ 15 2 15 7 Status byte and service request commands 15 10 Status register sets 15 2 15 11 Store data 9 2 Sweep Configuring and running 10 12 Contact check function F 6 Customized 10 6 10 16 10 21 Front panel operation 10 12 Linear staircase 10 2 10 19 Logarithmic staircase 10 4 10 19 Programming example 10 19 10 21 10 23 Pulse Mode Model 2430 only 10 24 Remote operation 10 19 Source memory 10 6 10 17 10 22 Types 10 2 Sweep waveforms 6 9 System identification 1 10 TOGGLE key 1 13 Toggling the source and measure display fields 1 23 Trigger link 11 19 Input requirements 11 19 Output specifications 11 20 Triggering 11 1 Examples 11 20 External example 11 20 Front panel configuration 11 7 Front panel model 11 2 Front panel operation 11 2 Invalid Pulse Mode settings 11 24 Pulse Mode Model 2430 11 20 Remote commands 11 18 Remote example 11 20 Remote model 11 10 Remote operation 11 10 Varistor alpha math function 8 5 Index Voltage measure 3 20 Voltage coefficient math function 8 5 V Source operating boundaries 6 19 V source protection 3 12 Warm up 3 10 Waveforms Sweep 6 9 Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks
192. anel operation 8 6 Remote operation 8 7 User defined functions 8 7 Measure only Remote operation 3 21 Measure voltage or current 3 20 memory sweep 18 93 Menus 1 19 Configuration 1 24 Main 1 19 Navigating 1 22 Message Program 14 10 Response 14 12 Status and error B 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Index Message exchange protocol 14 13 Remote operation 13 12 Multiple element device binning 12 13 Output Enable Line 13 6 Output off states 13 9 N Overheating Conditions 6 6 Protection 6 6 Overview 1 5 NPLC caching 3 11 O Offset compensated ohms math function P 8 4 Ohms 4 9 Percent deviation math function 8 6 6 wire measurements 4 12 Power math function 4 4 Auto measurements 4 4 A aar h AEA ie Configuration menu 4 2 Oe hea ele Enabling disabling offset Programming syntax 14 6 ee 43 Pulse energy limitations 5 9 eds Pulse Mode Manual measurements 4 5 i Overview 5 2 Measurement methods 4 3 Sweeps 10 24 Measurements 4 1 Triggering 11 20 Offset compensated 4 8 Pulse mode Programming example 4 14 characteristics 5 3 Remote programming 4 13 Fast pulse output 5 7 Selecting measurement method 4 4 Output off time 5 6 Sensing 4 6 Pulse duty cycle 5 6 Source readback 4 11 Pulse jitter 5 8 Operating boundaries 6 10 Pulse width 5 4 Current compliance 6 20 Pulse Mode configuration Duty cycle 6 10 Front panel operation 5 10 l Source GA Remote operation 5 11 Source or sink 6 10 PULSE SPEED NPLC Model 2430 Pulse Voltag
193. ange V Source 20V 2400 LV and 2401 Select next higher range Select next lower range Specify Source level amps Specify V Source level volts 100A range I Source 20V range V Source 1yA range I Source 200mV range V Source 1A range I Source 1100V range V Source Select next higher range Select next lower range Specify Source level amps Specify V Source level volts 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source 10pA range I Source 200mV range V Source 3A range I Source 63V range V Source Select next higher range Select next lower range 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2425 and 2430 DC Mode SCPI Command Reference 18 75 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Specify l Source level amps 105 to 105 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100pA range l Source 20V range V Source MINimum 10pA range I Source 200mV range V Source MAXimum 3A range I Source 100V range V Source UP Select next higher range DOWN Select next lower range 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Specify l Source level amps 105 to 105 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100pA range l Source 20V range V Source MINimum 10pA range l Source 200mV range V Source MAXimum 10A range l Source 100V range V Source UP Select next higher range DOWN Select next lower range 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Specify l Source level amps 42 to 42 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100A r
194. ange l Source 10V range V Source MINimum 10pA range l Source 200mV range V Source MAXimum 5A range l Source 40V range V Source UP Select next higher range DOWN Select next lower range Query RANGe Query range for specified source RANGe DEFault Query RST default source range RANGe MINimum Query lowest source range RANGe MAXimum Query highest source range Description This command is used to manually select the range for the specified source Range is selected by specifying the approximate source magnitude that you will be using The instrument will then go to the lowest range that can accommodate that level For example if you expect to source levels around 3V send the following command SOURce VOLTage RANGe 3 The above command will select the 20V range for the V Source 18 76 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual As listed in the Parameters you can also use the MINimum MAXimum and DEFault parameters to manually select the source range The UP parameter selects the next higher source range while DOWN selects the next lower source range Note that source range can be selected automatically by the instru ment see next command AUTO lt b gt SOURce 1 CURRent RANGe AUTO lt b gt Select auto range for Source SOURce 1 VOLTage RANGe AUTO lt b gt Select auto range for V Source Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto range 1 or ON Enable auto range Query AUTO Query st
195. ange possible if it can t go up 3 ranges The unit will take another reading then decide whether it needs to continue going up in range or pick the right range based on the reading If the reading is 10 1 or 0 1 of the present range it will go down by 1 2 or 3 ranges based on the reading Auto range change mode The auto range change mode determines how the instrument performs auto rang ing In the SINGLE mode the SourceMeter will auto range only after first taking a reading In the MULTIPLE mode the SourceMeter will auto range up on compli ance in the Delay phase of the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle thereby mini mizing the possibility that a SourceMeter will be in compliance in a multiple SourceMeter system The SourceMeter can downrange only once a reading has been taken NOTE See Section 6 Source delay measure cycle for more SDM informa tion With the auto range change mode set to MULTIPLE you can also program the soak time which specifies the amount of time after the first point of a sweep that the unit will sit in a loop actively auto ranging up and down to allow a multiple SourceMeter configuration to settle This process will occur only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 11 Trigger models This feature is especially useful for situations with long DUT settling times such as low current measurements when several down range change cycles from the higher ranges are re
196. ange protocol MEP When the 488 1 protocol is selected the MEP is disabled to speed up GPIB oper ation The following guidelines limitations must be followed when using the 488 1 proto col If a query is sent it must be the only command on the line this limitation also means no multiple queries can be sent Otherwise full SCPI com mand syntax is still supported including long form and short form com mands multiple commands and MIN MAX DEF parameter definitions For example the following command strings are invalid VOLT RANG 10 OPC RES RANG READ READ READ The following command strings are valid SOUR1 VOLTage STARt 1 STOP 10 step 1 volt nple 1 0 curr rang min RES RANG MAX READ When a query is sent either the data must be read back or a Device Clear DCL or Interface Clear IFC must be performed to reset the query When sending a command or query do not attempt to read data from the SourceMeter until the terminator has been sent usually Line Feed with EOI Otherwise a DCL or IFC must be sent to reset the input parser When receiving data all data up to and including the terminator LF with EOI must be accepted Otherwise a DCL or IFC must be sent to reset the output task Empty command strings terminator only should not be sent G 4 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Using SCPI based programs In general an existing SCPl based program will ru
197. anual SCPI Command Reference 18 41 1 in the list regardless of the outcome of the test PASS or FAIL con dition When a memory location is specified with FAIL the sweep will branch to that location on a failure If not PASS condition the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep proceeds to the next memory loca tion present location 1 in the list regardless of the outcome of the test FAIL or PASS condition Note that branch on FAIL is available only via remote See Section 10 Source memory sweep for more information BCONtrol lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits BCONtrol lt name gt Control Digital I O port pass fail update Parameters lt name gt _ IMMediate Update output when first failure occurs END Update output after sweep is completed Query BCONtrol Query when digital output will update Description This command is used to control when the digital output will update to the pass or fail bit pattern The pass or fail bit pattern tells the han dler to stop the testing process and place the DUT in the appropriate bin With IMMediate selected the digital output will update immediately to the bit pattern for the first failure in the testing process If all the tests pass the output will update to the pass bit pattern With END selected the digital output will not update to the pass or fail bit pattern until the SourceMeter completes the sweep or list operat
198. are one or more addi tional items or messages to select from Use the appropriate cursor key to display them A source or parameter value range is changed by placing the cursor on the range designator i e k M G etc and using the SOURCE A or V or RANGE A or V keys Note that when the next higher or lower source range is selected the reading increases or decreases by a decade A parameter value is keyed in by placing the cursor on the digit to be changed and using one of the following methods NOTE You can clear a parameter value by pressing the MENU key Use the SOURCE A or V or RANGE A or V keys to increment or dec rement the digit Use the number keys 0 through 9 to key in the value at the selected digit Use the key to change source value polarity regardless of cursor position Boolean selections such as ON OFF and HIGH LOW are toggled by plac ing the cursor on the selection and pressing a SOURCE or RANGE up or down arrow key A change is only executed when ENTER is pressed Entering an invalid parameter generates an error and the entry is ignored However entering an out of range value too small or too large selects the lower or upper limit respectively The EXIT key is used to back out of the menu structure Any change that is not entered is cancelled when EXIT is pressed 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 23 Editing source and compliance values Use the followin
199. are particular to each device on the bus These commands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consortium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command codes IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 9 Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summa rized in Figure D 3 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various com mands are listed in Table D 2 Table D 2 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Command Hex value Decimal value GTL 01 1 SDC 04 4 GET 08 8 LLO 11 17 DCL 14 20 SPE 18 24 SPD 19 25 LAG 20 3F 32 63 TAG 40 5F 64 95 SCG 60 7F 96 127 UNL 3F 63 UNT 5F 95 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 10 ed Uod X 80TG 4d TOTG d SION 007Z PPOW Aq pauawedu JOU TOULNOD AAV LOL pue GYNSIANODNN 110d BTIVeVd Add AYANI NOD T10d TATIVEVd Ddd Das 99d dNOY9D daNOY9D ANYWNWOD GNVWWOD AdWCN OOS AYY Idd a Sea eee ooo ae ed Ov 9v7 99N 99V dnoud dnowS dnouS dnoud ssaudav ssaudav GNVWWOD GNVWWOD WL Nasr IWSHAAIN
200. arge sufficiently before the next pulse is due As a result the pulse period becomes longer due to additional charge time between pulses and more inconsistent jitter To achieve a consistent pulse period on the 10A range set a pulse off time that will provide a duty cycle that does not exceed 8 For example if the pulse width is 2msec the required off time is calculated as follows Pulse Off time Pulse Width Duty Cycle Pulse Width 2msec 8 2msec 25msec 2msec 23msec If a consistent pulse period is not required for your test the 10A range allows you to output fast high energy gt 8 duty cycle pulses With the pulse delay set to Osec each subsequent pulse will output as soon as the capacitors become suffi ciently charged 5 10 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode configuration Front panel Pulse Mode configuration Select Pulse Mode and set pulse width and pulse delay 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or I 2 Select SHAPE from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Select PULSE from the displayed choices then press ENTER Selecting the Pulse Mode enables the pulse width and pulse delay items of the menu 4 Select PULSE WIDTH from the displayed choices then press ENTER 5 Enter the desired pulsewidth value 0 15ms to 5 00ms then press ENTER Note that the pulse width internally will limit to 2 5ms on the 10A range source or measure
201. as one of the source values For details see Section 4 Off set compensated ohms 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative and Math 8 5 This two point measurement method is mathematically expressed as Offset Compensated Q AV Al where AV V2 V1 and Al 12 11 V1 is the voltage measurement with the I Source set to a specific level e V2 is the voltage measurement with the I Source set to a different level typically zero e 11 is the current measurement with the I Source set to a specific level e 2 is the current measurement with the I Source set to a different level typ ically zero You will be prompted to enter the two I Source values and the results is displayed in ohms with the Q symbol in the units field of the display Varistor alpha This math formula is used to determine varistor alpha an important parameter that defines varistor characteristics Alpha is defined as the logarithmic ratio of two voltage measurement points on a non linear V I curve and is expressed as fol lows a log2 11 log V2 V1 where V1 is the voltage measurement at the first Source point V2 is the voltage measurement at the second I Source point The log x function uses the absolute value of x When configuring this math function you will be prompted to enter the two l source values See Front panel math operations later in this section Voltage coefficient High value or high megohm
202. ate of auto range Description This command is used to enable or disable auto range for the speci fied source When enabled the instrument will automatically select the most sensitive range for the specified source level When dis abled the instrument will use the range that the instrument is cur rently on Auto range will be disabled if a fixed range is selected see previous command Both RST and SYSTem PREset enables source auto range When the SourceMeter goes into the local state source auto range dis ables 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set amplitude for fixed source IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt Parameters 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 5 25 to 5 25 42 to 42 DEFault MINimum MAXimum SCPI Command Reference 18 77 Set fixed I Source amplitude immedi ately Set fixed V Source amplitude immedi ately Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplit
203. ations store sweep are being performed Please see Table 5 1 for details Auto zero The output off time can be reduced by disabling auto zero With auto zero dis abled only the signal is measured As shown in Figure 5 3 the reference and zero measurements which normally are part of the off time are not performed Also note that the minimum overhead time that occurs during the off time is reduced to 2 9msec Therefore with pulse delay set to Osec the output off time can be as short as 2 9msec Figure 5 3 Pulse measure timing auto zero off k Delay ok 80us Si Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time OV or OA k 2 9ms kooo PD Delay Pulse width delay used to achieve pulse width setting 80ps Minimum pulse width overhead Meas Sig Signal measurement 1 4ms Minimum output off time overhead PD Pulse delay setting used to determine time between pulses 5 8 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 5 4 Pulse only timing k Delay gt fe 150s OV or OA NOTE With auto zero disabled zero drift will eventually corrupt the accuracy of the pulse measurement To re establish an accurate pulse measure ment enable auto zero or change the speed setting NOTE From the front panel auto zero is controlled from the A D CONTROLS item of the Main Menu For remote operation the SYSTem AZERo com mand controls auto zero Pulse only
204. atus messages See Appendix B for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 programming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and com mand queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request annun ciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state When the instru ment is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key are locked out 14 6 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel oper ation is restored NOTE If LLOis in effect LOCAL will be locked out OUTPUT ON OFF is still operational in remote If ARM SOUR is set to manual the TRIG key will be active in remote TALK This indicator is on when the instrument is in the talker active state LSTN This indicator is on when the SourceMeter is in the listener active state SRQ When this indicator is on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have been cleared See Section 15 Status Structure for more information LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restores local operation of the instrument Pressing the LO
205. ay actually defines the pulse width for line 4 which is used by category register component handlers as the end of test EOT strobe The pulse width of the other three lines are 20usec longer 10usec before line 4 is toggled and 10usec after line 4 is cleared Skewing the timing on line 4 provides setup and hold time for cate gory register component handlers See Section 12 Limit Testing for details on timing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 101 STATus subsystem The STATus subsystem is used to control the status registers of the SourceMeter The commands in this subsystem are summarized in Table 18 8 NOTE These registers and the overall status structure are fully explained in Section 15 Status Structure Read event registers EVEN STATus MEASurement EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation EVENt Read Measurement Event Register Read Questionable Event Register Read Operation Event Register Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the status event registers After sending one of these commands and address ing the SourceMeter to talk a value is sent to the computer This value indicates which bits in the appropriate register are set Program event enable registers ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt STATus MEASurement ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Measurement Event Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle l
206. b gt 0 or OFF Disable digital filter 1 or ON Enable digital filter Query STATe Query state of digital filter Description These commands are used to enable or disable the digital averaging filter When enabled voltage current and resistance readings are fil tered according to how the filter is configured NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is invalid error 831 SOURce subsystem This subsystem is used to configure and control the l Source and V Source and to set the logic level high or low of each digital output line The commands for this sub system are summarized in Table 18 7 SOURce 1 Use the following commands to configure and control the Source and V Source At the end of this subsystem are program examples of sweeps and lists Control source output off IMMediate SOURce 1 CLEar IMMediate Turn source output off Description This command is used to turn off the source output The output will turn off after all programmed source measure operations are com pleted and the instrument returns to the idle state Note that if auto output off is enabled the source output will automat ically turn off See next command 18 72 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual AUTO SOURce 1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto out put off SOURce 1 CLEar AUTO MODE lt name gt Select auto mode Parameters lt b gt 1 or ONEnable auto output off 0 or OFFDisable auto output
207. bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when there are no failures Note that the output value can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal for mat Use the table provided in the Description for the SOURce command to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern The SourceMeter can be configured to place the defined pass bit pattern on the digital output immediately when the pass condition occurs or it can wait until all testing on a device package is com pleted operation leaves trigger layer See Composite testing page 18 39 and BCONtrol lt name gt page 18 41 for details 18 40 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual For the sorting mode this command defines the 3 bit or 4 bit output pass pattern for the Limit 1 test compliance when Limits 2 3 5 12 are disabled FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify fail pattern NOTE The above command to set the composite fail pattern for the Model 2401 is invalid and will cause an undefined header error Parameters Query Description lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt 0O to 6111 3 bit Binary value O to 61111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value O to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value O to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal valu
208. bit or the Master Summary Status MSS bit When using the serial poll sequence of the SourceMeter to obtain the sta tus byte a k a serial poll byte B6 is the RQS bit See Serial polling and SRQ for details on using the serial poll sequence When using the STB command Table 15 3 to read the status byte B6 is the MSS bit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 9 Service request enable register The generation of a service request is controlled by the Service Request Enable Register This register is programmed by you and is used to enable or disable the setting of bit B6 RQS MSS by the Status Summary Message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register As shown in Figure 15 3 the sum mary bits are logically ANDed amp with the corresponding enable bits of the Ser vice Request Enable Register When a set 1 summary bit is ANDed with an enabled 1 bit of the enable register the logic 1 output is applied to the input of the OR gate and therefore sets the MSS RQS bit in the Status Byte Register The individual bits of the Service Request Enable Register can be set or cleared by using the SRE common command To read the Service Request Enable Reg ister use the SRE query command The Service Request Enable Register clears when power is cycled or a parameter value of 0 is sent with the SRE com mand i e SRE 0 The commands to program and read the SRQ Enable Regis ter
209. ble ON or disable OFF lt NRf amp Delay in seconds 0 to 999 9999 Query HOLDoff Query holdoff state DELay Query holdoff delay Description Current range holdoff adds the ability to speed up low current mea surements when sourcing voltage and measurement current This feature is only available when doing source memory sweeps It will momentarily set the measure range to the compliance range to over come the effects of capacitance by charging any capacitance on the higher compliance range but return to the lower measure range to obtain a good low current measurement This avoids being limited by range compliance which would require either a longer delay time or having to take the current measurement on a higher current range This feature is available only by remote but parameters are saved for each source memory location 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set compliance parameters LEVel lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection LEVel lt n gt SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection LEVel lt n gt Parameters 2400 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2400 LV and 2401 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 21 to 21 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum
210. bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface This section briefly describes the purpose of the bus com mands which are grouped into the following four categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table D 1 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 7 Table D 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary Command State of type Command ATN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus contents SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low Locks out local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Low Returns unit to default conditions Clear GTL Go To Local Low Returns device to local Una
211. ccccecececcceccceceeeeceesesesueaeaeseaseseseseeeeeseseeeees 9 2 Front panel data Store ccccccccccccceceeceeeeseeesaeeeeeseeseseseeeeeeeseeeees 9 2 Storing readings cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeneeeeeeetneeeeereeee 9 2 Recalling readings cc ccccseccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeecceeeenseeceeeneneeeeees 9 2 Buffer statistics 00 cccccccecccecseeesesseeeseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeesessesneneaea 9 3 Timestamp format sianidi a a aaa 9 4 Buffer considerations cece ceccececeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 9 5 Remote Command data Store ccccccccccccseceeseseeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeeeeees 9 5 Data store COMMANAS ccccceccccecaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenes 9 5 Data store programming example ccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 9 5 10 Sweep Operation Sweep TYPOS rasiedatdedarcaraavearvesadadisvasdaceddayiaadieieassaeacceastdnedndaveaddaaed 10 2 Linear staircase sweep cccceeeeeeeeeeecneceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeesenaaees 10 2 Logarithmic staircase SWEEP eect eeeteeeeeeetttteeeeeeeee 10 4 Abort on compliance 2 c cececeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneenecaeeeeeees 10 5 CUSTOM SWEEP wssscdactecssainszucevtanddicasaranncdeeseeend dteeasandaceecssaadagead 10 6 Source memory SWEEP 2 ceccccceeeeececeeeeenececeeteeneceeeeeeeenseeeeetees 10 6 Configuring and running a SWEEP o oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 10 12 Front panel sweep operation cccccceeceeeeeeeeeteeese
212. ce SPAN REN GTL SYSTem MEMory INITialize SENSe RANGe AUTO NPLC for all other functions SOURCe RANGe AUTO SOURCce STEP SOURce CENTer SOURce SPAN SOURce STEP SOURce CENTer SOURce SPAN SOURce POINts SOURce STEP SOURce STARt SOURce STOP SOURce STEP SOURce STARt SOURce STOP SOURce STEP See local and remote transition in Section 14 Differences remote vs local operation See command description in Section 18 SYSTem subsystem Valid function command words i e VOLT DC VOLT AC etc F Contact Check Function F 2 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction This appendix contains information on the contact check function available with the Models 2400 C 2410 C 2420 C 2425 C 2430 C and 2440 C SourceMe ters Overview Description The contact check function prevents measurements that may be in error due to excessive resistance in the force or sense leads when making remotely sensed Kelvin measurements There are many potential sources for this resistance including poor contact at the DUT failing relay contacts on a switching card and wires that are too long or thin This is shown schematically in Figure F 1 where Re is the resistance of the mechanical contact at the DUT and Rg is the series resistance of relays and cables The contact check process performs a differentia
213. ce 1 MEMory SAVE lt NRf gt Save setup in specified memory location Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command is used to save the present instrument setup in a memory location Up to 100 setups can be saved The following set tings are saved in each source memory location SENSe 1 CURRent NPLCycles SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles SENSe 1 VOLTage NPLCycles SENSe 1 FUNCtion CONCurrent SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF SENSe 1 RESistance MODE SENSe 1 RESistance 0COMpensated SENSe 1 AVERage STATe SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt SOURce 1 F UNCtion SHAPe Model 2430 only SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE SOURce 1 DELay Model 2430 in DC Mode SOURce 1 DELay AUTO Model 2430 in DC Mode SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor STATe where X CURRent or VOLTage based on source mode SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh Model 2430 Pulse Mode only SOURce 1 PULSe DELay Model 2430 Pulse Mode only Source Value Range Auto Range Sense Protection Range Auto Range SYSTem AZERo STATe SYSTem GUARd SYSTem RSENse ROUTe TERMinals CALCulate1 STATe CALCulate1 MATH EXPRession NAME CALCulate2 FEED CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet CALCulate2 NULL STATe CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX STATe CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX
214. ce value to OV or OA press the MENU key while in the edit source field Value adjust To adjust the value use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cursor at the appropriate position and use the SOURCE arrow keys to increment or decrement the value Numeric entry When the edit mode is entered the cursor is located on the most significant digit of the value From this position you can key in the value using the number keys 0 through 9 After each num ber is keyed in the cursor moves one position to the right If desired you can use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cursor on a digit to be changed and press the appropriate number key The cursor does not 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 17 have to be on the polarity sign of the value to change polarity If the MENU key is pressed the Source Value will be clear to OV or OA 4 To edit the other field press EDIT to select it and repeat steps 1 and 2 5 When finished editing the source and compliance values press ENTER or wait six seconds to exit from the edit mode NOTE When a compliance limit value is entered the SourceMeter automatically goes to the lowest most sensitive compliance range that will accommo date that value For the Models 2400 2400 LV 2401 and 2410 the lowest compliance levels that can be set are 0 00100UA 1nA and 000 200mV 200uV For the Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 the levels are 00 0100UA 10nA a
215. ce vend earn eetedovbieecaceereeenanal 6 27 ONmS guard saes a E T 6 28 GUard SENSE psuresak a A 6 32 Data flow sesiecdaciieciasat tevastandarcan sean e a a Ea 6 34 Buffer Considerations siseses 6 36 7 Range Digits Speed and Filters Range and digits icc ee denne a 7 2 RANGO ainen aaie AEA EAE SE AAEE AE 7 2 Digits ceneccnicerinn i KA E 7 5 Remote range and digits programming cceeesseeeeeeenees 7 5 Speed siimani a decd eee iaia daa A EAEE Ea 7 7 Seting Spog ceara aaia ia ES 7 7 Remote speed programming ccceceeeeceeeeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 7 8 E E A E A A A 7 9 Front panel filter control c eccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeaeess 7 10 Remote filter programming sssssessssssessseeerrsssrerrrsssrrrrsssreernn 7 12 8 Relative and Math Relative ieie iaaa E a a aaa 8 2 Frontpanel Tel nessas aaa ai a 8 2 Remote rel programming sssseseesssssessernneseernnesssnnnaaensnneaerannnaae 8 3 Math Operati nS srir vacdadecanvaddeivcarvandandeasannaceddaraaedzecsesaamndcennsanaate 8 4 Built in math functions cceceeececceceeeeeeeeeteeeeetcneaeeeeeeeneess 8 4 Front panel math operations cccccecceeeeeeeeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeees 8 6 Remote math operations c eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneecaeeeeeees 8 7 User defined math functions cece cceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 8 7 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table of Contents 9 Data Store Data store Overview u c
216. cing mode and the product of the arm and trigger count should be at least the same as the number of source points in the list 18 92 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the current or voltage source function See Select function modes page 18 72 Use the CURRent MODE or VOLTage MODE command to select the LIST sourcing mode See Select sourcing mode page 18 73 The trig ger count is set using the TRIGger COUNt command See TRIGger subsystem page 18 116 APPend lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent APPend lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage APPend lt NRf list gt lt NRf list gt NRf NRf NRf 2400 2400 LV 2401 Parameters Description POINts NRf 2410 NRf 2420 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 2425 and 2430 DC Mode NRf 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 2430 Pulse Mode NRf 2440 NRf 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 5 25 to 5 25 42 to 42 Add value s to l Source list Add value s to V Source list l Source value V Source value 21 to 21 2400 LV and 2401 l Source value V Source value l Source value V Source value l Source value V Source value l Source value V Source value l Source value V Source value This command is used to add one or more values up to 100 to a source list that already exists The s
217. command to select the current or voltage source function See Select function modes page 18 72 Use the CURRent MODE or VOLT age MODE command to select the SWEep sourcing mode See Select sourcing mode page 18 73 The trigger count is set using the TRIGger COUNt command See TRIGger subsystem page 18 116 RANGing lt name gt SOURce 1 SWEep RANGing lt name gt Select source ranging mode Parameters lt name gt BEST Use the best fixed mode AUTO Use the most sensitive source range for each sweep level FlXed Use the present source range for the entire sweep Query RANGing Query source ranging mode Description This command is used to select the source ranging mode for sweeps With BEST selected the SourceMeter will select a single fixed source range that will accommodate all the source levels in the sweep For front panel operation this is the BEST FIXED option With AUTO selected the SourceMeter will automatically go to the most sensitive source range for each source level in the sweep For front panel operation this is the AUTO RANGE option With FlXed selected the source remains on the range that it is pres ently on when the sweep is started For sweep points that exceed the source range capability the source will output the maximum level for that range For front panel operation this is the FIXED option SPACing lt name gt SOURce 1 SWEep SPACing lt name gt Select scale for sweep Parameters lt
218. cription CALC2 NULL OFFS 5 Rel value 5 CALC2 NULL STAT ON Enable rel 8 4 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Math operations Built in math functions The SourceMeter has built in math functions to calculate the following e Power e Offset Compensated Q e Varistor Alpha e Voltage Coefficient e Percent Deviation The Power and Percent Deviation math functions use a single voltage and or cur rent measurement to perform the calculation The Offset Compensated Q Varis tor Alpha and Voltage Coefficient math functions require 2 point measurements to perform a calculation Power This math function calculates power using the measured voltage and measured current values as follows Power V x where V measured voltage measured current Note that power is displayed in watts with W in the units field of the display Offset compensated ohms The presence of thermal EMFs Vee can adversely affect low resistance mea surement accuracy To overcome these unwanted OFFset voltages use the Off set Compensated Q measurement method In general this method measures resistance V I at a specific Source level and then subtracts a resistance mea surement made with the I Source set to a different level typically zero NOTE Offset compensated Q is also available from the CONFIG OHMS menu structure Using Offset Compensated Q from this menu automatically selects zero
219. ction command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages ENABle lt list gt STATus QUEue ENABle lt list gt Enable messages for Error Queue Parameters lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to enable for the Error Query ENABle Query list of enabled messages Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want enabled Messages not specified will be dis abled and prevented from entering the queue 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 103 DiSable lt list gt STATus QUEue DISable lt list gt Disable messages for Error Queue Parameters lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to disable for the Error Queue Query DISable Query list of disabled messages Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want disabled Disabled messages are prevented from going into the Error Queue SYSTem subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains miscellaneous commands that are summarized in Table 18 9 SYSTem command summary Default conditions PRESet SYSTem PRESet Return
220. d TLINK Event detection occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link later in this section for more information With TLink selected you can loop around the Arm Event Detector by setting the event detector bypass to ONCE ISTEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 T STEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed high This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 T JSTEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digi tal I O port is pulsed either high or low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 NOTE STEST can be used only at the beginning of a sweep and should not be used to trigger each point in a sweep 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 5 Trigger layer The Trigger Layer uses three event detectors one for each action Source Delay and Measure Each of these event detectors can be turned on or off individually Event Detector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 1 there is a bypass for the Source Event Detector This bypass is in effect only if Trigger Link is the selected Trigger In Source With this event detector bypass set to ONCE operation will procee
221. d The trigger model consists of two layers Arm Layer and Trigger Layer to provide versatility Programmable counters allow operations to be repeated and various input and output trigger options are available to provide source measure synchro nization between the SourceMeter and other instruments via the Trigger Link Unless otherwise noted the programmable aspects of the trigger model are performed from the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Configuring triggering page 11 7 Event detection In general operation is held up at an Event Detector until the programmed event occurs Note however that if an event detector has a bypass operation can be programmed to loop around the event detector Idle The SourceMeter is in idle when it is not operating in the Arm Layer or Trigger Layer of the trigger model When in idle the ARM annunciator is off To take the SourceMeter out of idle turn the output ON The SourceMeter can be returned to idle at any time by selecting the HALT menu item of the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Configuring triggering page 11 7 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering Figure 11 1 Front panel trigger model C idle gt Turn Output ON male Immediate Arm Arm GPIB Counter Layer Timer 1 Manual Arm Event TLink Detector JStest TStest SSE ee a ey aS a ea es ee Trigger Layer Trigger Counter 1 Never MEASURE Action CONV Immediate
222. d then 10usec later the SOT strobe tells the handler to read the bit pattern and per form the binning operation This 10sec offset is used to make sure the correct bit pattern is read by the handler After the pass fail is read by the handler the digital output returns to the clear pat tern with auto clear enabled Configuring and performing limit tests Configuring limit tests NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port Therefore it cannot be used with a handler to perform binning operations If using a Model 2401 for limit testing ignore all actions and information that pertain to binning Press CONFIG and then LIMIT to display the CONFIG LIMITS MENU The limits configuration menu is structured shown below and in Figure 12 10 Note that bul lets indicate the primary items of the limit menu and dashes indicate the options of each menu or submenu item Refer to Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to configure the limit tests e DIGOUT Use this menu item to control the following Digital I O aspects SIZE Use to select 3 BIT or 4 BIT Digital I O bit size In the 3 BIT mode Digital I O line 4 becomes the EOT EOT BUSY or BUSY sig nal depending on the selected END OF TEST mode In the 4 BIT mode Digital I O line 4 is controlled manually if the END OF TEST mode is set to EOT MODE Use to select GRADING or SORTING mode In GRADING mode a reading passes if it is within a
223. d around the Source Event Detector The programmable trigger in sources for the Trigger Layer are described as fol lows IMMEDIATE With Immediate selected event detection for the three detectors is satisfied immediately Operation proceeds through the Trigger Layer to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions TRIGGER LINK With Trigger Link selected event detection at each enabled detector occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link page 11 19 For example if the Trigger In Event for the Source Event Detector is ON operation will hold up at that detector until an input trigger is received If however the Source Event Detector is disabled OFF operation will not hold up Operation will continue and perform the Source action With the Trigger Link Trigger In Source selected operation will go around the Source Event Detector as shown in Figure 11 1 by setting the event detector bypass to ONCE Trigger delay A programmable delay is available before the Source Action The Trigger Delay can be manually set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 seconds Note that this delay is separate from the Delay Action of the SDM cycle The Delay Action is discussed next Source delay and measure actions The SDM cycle of the SourceMeter consists of three actions Source Delay and Measure SOURCE Action Any programmed output voltage or current level changes are performed DEL
224. d eleedeaetebddeeces sandy 18 54 Status register format 0 cc ccececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 18 54 OUTPut SUBSYSTEM setcicssncaecendcacacephectieasteed E 18 55 TUF SOUPCE ON OF Off crcire 18 55 Output enable line ccccceccecceee cesses eeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 18 56 Output off states assaia a aaa 18 56 ROUTE SUDSYSIOM o aiina naaar E 18 57 Selec MPU JACKS oerna Pieesteeecent aeleeeeeteads 18 57 SENSE subsystem i ciisecesunlAiede chvddcceds thd scecasebeditees entice eta 18 58 Select measurement FUNCTIONS 0 eee eee eeeeeteteeteeeeeees 18 58 Select measurement range cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 18 62 Select AuUtO LANGE eroro 18 65 Current range Noldoff eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 18 66 Set compliance parameters ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 18 67 Set measurement speed 2 0 ceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 69 Configure and control filter ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 18 70 SOURCE subsystem 0 ccccceeescscnteneeedeceeteensddeteatensscntenenbedeneatnenste 18 71 SOURCE niceties veseeite cebessed ae cedetedauegeceten ace sesdauenedec neces 18 71 Control source output off 22 0 cece eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 71 Select function MOdES 0 0 eee ceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 18 72 Select sourcing mode ccccceeeeeceeteeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeteeeeeneeees 18 73 Select PANGS cecen Sead cesses ceebeeetdgsevee id
225. d in an addendum included with the manual Be sure to note these changes and incorporate them into the manual Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual The A symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the oper ating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 3 Inspection The SourceMeter was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvi ous signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment The following items are included with every SourceMe ter order e SourceMeter with line cord Test leads Mo
226. da aa 1 2 Safety symbols and terms eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeetaeeeeeeees 1 2 SPECION ccssidhec tie Seve nancad oiadaueateeannanedclassenblanccovaeadddaasnataboeens 1 3 Options and accessories cceec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteteennenes 1 3 Product OVEIVIOW ticesssicatecesscanasitaracecadcesssdanseudensnedsadensaadaddeessaadaanants 1 5 Front and rear panel familiarization ccccccceeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 1 6 Front panel SUMMAN osciiecsiiaissa i 1 6 Rear panel SUMMALSY ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeteetaeeeeeeeeaees 1 7 POWST UD iirinn e a aaa a cece aad 1 9 Line power Connection eceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeesennneaeeess 1 9 Power up Sequence 0 0 0 2 cc ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 1 10 Line frequency Setting cececcccseeeeeccceeeeeeeceneneeeeecceneeteeeees 1 11 Fuse replacement ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaees 1 11 Cooling TaN sean eecniet agi deawepeadi acess salaesdenaies 1 12 DISPIAY ianiai a aadcccuavebioteaves wealeceth aabdsceckeyavdieekevnind 1 13 Display TOMAT eiee 1 13 EDIT KEY grcsuicgitianiisoinirii aii adi aaa aaa a aaa 1 13 TOGGLE Key erido O 1 13 Status and error MESSAGES eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeettaeeeeeees 1 14 Remote display programming c cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeerenee 1 14 Front panel tests ciictcdsccacceacs ssaccdvesnsadadiienrwtadsaceavsannaadtasaaasiees 1 14 Detau
227. ddressed UNL Unlisten Low Removes all listeners from the bus UNT Untalk Low Removes any talkers from the bus Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments for common operations SCPI High Programs SCPI compatible instru ments for particular operations D 8 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multiline commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in ques tion Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmit ted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that
228. defined as follows BUSY The BUSY signal indicates the time from which the start of test SOT signal is received until all measurements limit testing and digital I O operations have been completed When BUSY is selected line 4 goes LO during this time period NOTE The arm source must be set to SOT in order to use BUSY EOT The end of test strobe signals to the handler that the digital I O lines may be read This pulse occurs approximately 10us after the SourceMeter c has updated the digital I O lines and ends approximately 10us before the digital I O lines actually clear The EOT pulse width is specified by the digital auto clear delay EOT is HI when the digital I O is updated EOT goes LO after the digital I O lines are updated NOTE Digital auto clear myst be enabled in order to use EOT SOT line The input line SOT of the Digital I O is used to control the start of the testing pro cess For remote operation with STEST selected as the arm event of the trigger model the testing process will start when the SOT line is pulsed low When T STEST is the selected arm event the testing process will start when the SOT line is pulsed high When T JSTEST is selected testing will start when SOT is pulsed either high or low For front panel operation with the IMMEDIATE arm event selected the testing process will start as soon as the LIMIT key is pressed assuming the output is ON See Section 11 Triggering for details on tr
229. del 8605 for 2400 2400 C Model 1754 for all other series 2400 units e Accessories as ordered e Certificate of calibration e User s Manual e Service Manual e Support Software Disk including TestPoint instrument library for GPIB and LabVIEW for Windows driver e Manual addenda containing any improvements or changes to the instru ment or manual If an additional manual is required order the appropriate manual package for example 2400 901 00 The manual packages include a manual and any perti nent addenda Options and accessories The following options and accessories are available from Keithley for use with the SourceMeter Cables and adapters Model 2499 DIGIO adapter Lets you expand the Digital I O port to 16 bits instead of 4 bits Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 shielded GPIB cables Connect the SourceMeter to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI The Model 7007 1 is 1m long the Model 7007 2 is 2m long Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 trigger link cables Connect the SourceMeter to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 7001 Switch System The Model 8501 1 is 1m long the Model 8501 2 is 2m long Model 8502 trigger link adapter Lets you connect any of the six Trigger Link lines of the SourceMeter to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger con nectors 1 4 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 8503 DIN
230. des are covered below See CALC2 CLIM MODE and associated commands in Cal culate subsystems page 18 26 Sorting mode status bit values Meas Event Result Bit 21 20 19 9 8 Status Limit 1 and 4 pass and 2 3 and O JO JO JO JO Bit 5 LP 5 12 disabled Limit test 1 fail O JO JO JO 1 Bit O L1 Limit test 2 pass O JO JO 1 JO Bit5 LP Limit test 3 pass O JO JO 1 1 Bit4 HL3 Limit test 4 fail O JO 14 JO 1 Bit10 CC Limit test 5 pass O JIO 1 O JO Bit5 LP Limit test 6 pass O JO 14 1 JO Bit5 LP Limit test 7 pass O JO 14 1 1 Bit 5 LP Limit test 8 pass O 14 O O JO Bit5 LP Limit test 9 pass O 14 O O 0 Bit5 LP Limit test 10 pass O 14 JO 1 JO Bit5 LP Limit test 11 pass O 14 JO 1 1 Bit5 LP Limit test 12 pass O 14 1 O JO Bit5 LP Limit 1 and 4 pass and 2 3 and 1 1 1 1 1 l 5 12 fail 1 Limit 4 test available only with contact check option Appendix F 2 See Section 15 Measurement Event Register and Figure 15 6 for details 18 52 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Grading mode status bit values Meas Event Result Bit 21 20 19 9 8 Status All limits pass Bit 5 LP Limit test 1 fail Bit 0 L1 Hi Limit test 2 fail Bit 2 HL2 Lo Limit test 2 fail Bit 1 LL2 Hi Limit test 3 fail Bit 4 HL3 Lo Limit test 3 fail Bit 3 LL3 Limit test
231. displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing the LOCAL key or sending LOCAL 27 can cels the message and disables the text message mode RS 232 Operation A user defined test message can be cancelled by sending the SYSTem LOCal command or pressing the LOCAL key FORMat subsystem The commands for this subsystem are used to select the data format for transferring instrument readings over the bus These commands are summarized in Table 18 3 Data format DATA lt type gt length FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt Select data format Parameters lt type gt lt length gt ASCii ASCII format REAL 32 IEEE754 single precision format SREal IEEE754 single precision format NOTE lt length gt is not used for the ASCii or SREal parameters It is optional for the REAL parameter If you do not use lt length gt with the REAL parameter the lt length gt defaults to 32 single precision format Query Description DATA Query data format This command is used to select the data format for transferring read ings over the bus Only the ASCII format is allowed over the RS 232 interface This command only affects the output of READ FETCh MEASure TRACe DATA CALC1 DATA and CALC2 DATA over the GPIB All other queries are returned in the ASCII format NOTE Regardless of which data format for output strings is selected the SourceM eter will only respond to
232. does not use pins 1 through 4 of the Digital I O port If using the Model 2401 ignore all information and actions pertaining to the digital output lines Figure 13 1 Digital I O port Connector may be marked DIGITAL I O on some units SourceMeter 1 5 e eoeoee eooo 6 9 1 Digital Output 1 2 Digital Output 2 3 Digital Output 3 4 Digital Output 4 or EOT EOT BUSY BUSY 5 Ground 6 Trigger Input SOT 7 5V 8 Output Enable OE 9 Ground 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 13 3 Digital output lines The port provides four output lines Each open collector output can be set high 5V or low OV Each output line can source up to 2mA or sink up to 500mA When using a category register handler for limit testing output line 4 is typically used for the end of test EOT or BUSY pulse This pulse from the SourceMeter sig nals the handler to perform the binning operation or indicates a busy condition See Section 12 Configuring limit tests SOT line The input line SOT is used by the handler to start limit testing With the SSTEST arm event selected Section 11 Configuring triggering the handler must pulse SOT low in order to provide event detection which starts the testing process With the T STEST arm event selected the handler must pulse SOT high in order to pro vide event detection which starts the testing proces
233. dssterssetactetesseasced cvuentastuesvdaceceichicaoaateanaaees G 5 Message available cccccs cceccesetecceessesecceeceseseaeeeevenssaeteesneneae G 5 General operation notes cceseeceecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenenaeees G 5 1 Getting Started General information Covers general information that includes contact information safety symbols and terms inspection and available options and accessories Product overview Summarizes the features of the SourceMeter Front and rear panel familiarization Summarizes the controls and con nectors of the instrument Power up Covers line power connection line voltage settings fuse replacement and the power up sequence Cooling fan Covers the cooling fan in the Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Display Provides information about the SourceMeter display Default settings Covers factory default setups and saving and recalling user setups Menus Covers the main and configuration menus as well as rules to navigate menus 1 2 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual General information Contact information Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual If you have any questions please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Application Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only Manual addenda Any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual will be explaine
234. e basic source memory sweep Table 10 8 Source memory sweep programming example Command Description RST SENS FUNC CONC OFF SOUR FUNC MEM SOUR MEM POIN 3 SOUR MEM STAR 1 SOUR FUNC VOLT SENS FUNC CURR DC SOUR VOLT 10 SOUR MEM SAVE 1 SOUR FUNC CURR SENS FUNC VOLT DC SOUR CURR 100E 3 SOUR MEM SAVE 2 SENS FUNC CURR DC SOUR MEM SAVE 3 TRIG COUN 3 OUTP ON READ Restore GPIB default conditions Turn off concurrent functions Source memory sweep mode Number memory points 3 Start at memory location 1 Volts source function Current sense function 10V source voltage Save in source memory location 1 Current source function Volts sense function 100mA source current Save in source memory location 2 Current sense function Save in source memory location 3 Trigger count sweep points Turn on source output Trigger sweep request data 10 24 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only When performing a sweep with the Model 2430 in the Pulse Mode each step or point of the sweep is made up of a pulse period In general a pulse period con sists of the pulse width output on time and the output off time Figure 10 5 shows an example of a 3 step linear staircase sweep for the Pulse Mode start 1V stop 3V step 1V A measured reading is performed for each of the three pulse steps R
235. e SOURce2 Query programmed source value For the sorting mode this command is used to define the 3 bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when there are failures Note that the output value can be specified using binary octal decimal or hexadecimal format Use the table provided in the Description for the SOURce command to determine the decimal parameter value for the desired digital output pattern FAIL SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT PASS SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT Specify fail source memory location CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT Specify pass source memory location Parameters Query Description lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location point NEXT Next memory location point in list present location 1 SMLocation Query pass or fail source memory location While using a Source Memory Sweep when performing limit tests the sweep can branch to a specified memory location point or pro ceed to the next memory location in the list When a memory location is specified with PASS the sweep will branch to that memory location if the test is successful PASS condi tion If not successful FAIL condition the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep proceeds to the next memory location present location 2400 Series SourceMeter User s M
236. e RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Five setup configurations can be saved and recalled The SourceMeter ships from the factory with SYSTem PRESet defaults loaded into the available setup memory If a recall error occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values RST reset Return SourceMeter to GPIB defaults When the RST command is sent the SourceMeter performs the following operations e Returns the SourceMeter to the GPIB default conditions see Default col umn of SCPI tables in Section 18 e Cancels all pending commands e Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC com mands TRG trigger Send bus trigger to SourceMeter Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to the SourceMeter It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation The SourceMeter reacts to this trigger if BUS is the programmed arm control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem NOTE Details on triggering are covered in Section 11 TST self test query Run self test and read result Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the Out put Queue When the SourceMeter is addressed to talk the coded result is sent from the Output Queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test
237. e beginning of each SDM cycle and turn off after each measurement is completed See Section 13 Output off states for details on auto output off While in the Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled For remote operation you can send the SOURce CLEar AUTO OFF command to disable auto output off but it will be ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 15 Output off state In the Pulse Mode the normal output off is used You cannot select one of the other modes while in Pulse Mode For remote operation the OUTPut 1 SMODe lt name gt command which is used to select the output off state causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode See Section 13 Output off states for details Turning source on For remote Pulse Mode operation an INITiate command is used to start the pulse output process The READ command will send INITiate to start the pulse process and it will also acquire the pulse readings The INITiate command by itself will start the pulse process but it will not acquire any pulse readings If you use INITiate to start the pulse process you should then use FETCh to acquire readings The pulse process can be stopped at any time by sending the ABORt command Sending OUTPut 1 STATe ON will also send INITiate to start the pulse pro cess Note however that you cannot use OUTPut 1 STATe OFF to abort the pulse output process SCPI signal orie
238. e main input power disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting cables or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Always make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with its specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating information and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with the same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device
239. e 15 1 shows how the two queues are structured with the other registers Output queue The output queue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instru ment For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the Output Queue When data is placed in the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register sets A data message is cleared from the Output Queue when it is read The Output Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Output Queue clears the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register A message is read from the Output Queue by addressing the SourceMeter to talk after the appropriate query is sent 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 19 Error queue The Error Queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the Error Queue When a message is placed in the Error Queue the Error Available EAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set An error status message is cleared from the Error Queue when it is read The Error Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Error Queue clears the EAV bit in the Status Byte Register The Error Queue holds up to 10 error status messages The commands to read the Error Queue are listed in Table 15 9 When you read a single message in the Error Queue the oldest message is read and then removed from the queue
240. e 6 3 shows the SourceMeter configuration when the stor age process is started The next three columns show what happens when config uration changes are made while the SourceMeter is storing readings Changing V I or Qmeasurement function e If you started with only a basic measurement function selected the buffer will track a basic measurement function change For example if you started in volts and changed to current the buffer will store the current readings e If you started with MATH REL and or LIMITS enabled the buffer will stop storing readings if you change the basic measurement function Storage will continue if you return to the original configuration See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure for more information on selecting the measurement function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 37 Changing MATH function If you started with only a basic measurement function selected you can enable a MATH function but only the voltage current or resistance compo nent of the calculation will be stored in the buffer The results of the MATH function will not be stored If you started with a MATH function enabled you can select a different MATH function The results of the new MATH function are stored in the buffer If you started with REL and or LIMITS enabled the buffer will stop storing readings if you select a MATH function Storage will continue if you return to the original co
241. e 6 6B Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode In Figure 6 6A for the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode the 3A 20V and 1A 100V magnitudes are nominal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 3 15A 21V and 1 05A 105V Model 2430 Pulse Mode In Figure 6 6B for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the 10A and 100V magnitudes are nominal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 10 5A and 105V 6 14 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 6 Model 2425 2430 operating boundaries Tmp 30 C I Source Il Source 100 Duty Cycle A Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode lt 60 Duty Cycle I Source III Source 8 Duty Cycle B Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt 5 Duty Cycle 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 15 Model 2440 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2440 are shown in Figure 6 7 Figure 6 7 Model 2440 operating boundaries Tamp 30 C III Source 100 Duty Cycle lt 60 Duty Cycle l Source operating boundaries Figure 6 8 and Figure 6 9 show the operating boundaries for the Source Only the first quadrant of operation is covered Operation in the other three quadrants is similar 6 16 Source Measure Concepts Figure 6 8 I Source output characteristics Limit V 210V 21V 2400 LV Source 105m
242. e assigned bin When interfacing to this type of handler a maximum of eight component handler bins are supported 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 13 If the handler requires a a high going or low going EOT pulse program SourceM eter for 3 bit operation and appropriate EOT mode NOTE The EOT and 3 bit modes are configured from the CONFIG LIMITS MENU See Configuring limit tests page 12 16 Basic binning systems Two basic binning systems are shown in Figure 12 7 and Figure 12 8 Both sys tems require a handler to physically place the device packages in the appropriate bins The handler is controlled by the SourceMeter via the Digital I O port Single element device binning Figure 12 7 shows a basic binning system for single element devices i e resis tors After all programmed testing on the DUT is completed the pass fail digital output information is sent to the component handler which then places the DUT in the appropriate bin The component handler selects the next DUT and the testing process is repeated Figure 12 7 Binning system single element devices Handler SourceM eter Multiple element device binning Figure 12 8 shows a basic binning system to test three element resistor networks Note that this system requires a scanner card that is installed in a switching main 12 14 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual frame Scanner card switching is controlled t
243. e compliance 6 17 Mode 7 8 V Source 6 19 Pulse measure considerations 5 12 Operation Pulse measure programming example Considerations 3 10 5 11 Contact check function F 3 Front panel GPIB 14 5 Q GPIB 14 4 Bo Query commands 14 9 Limit testing 12 4 Queues 15 2 15 18 d Math aat Clearing 15 4 Overview 3 4 Error 15 19 Pulse Mode 5 1 Output 15 18 Remote vs local 14 2 RS 232 interface 14 13 Sink 3 21 R Sweep 10 1 Rack mount kits 1 4 Options 1 3 nang ap 3 Output 13 6 ae Output configuration Limitations 7 2 Commands 13 12 Manual 7 2 Front panel operation 13 7 Range and digits 7 2 Programming example 13 12 Remote programming 7 5 Rear panel summary 1 7 Registers Bit descriptions 15 11 Clearing 15 4 Condition 15 16 Event 15 16 Event enable 15 17 Measurement event 15 13 Operation event 15 12 Questionable event 15 15 Reading 15 6 Serial polling and SRQ 15 9 Service request enable 15 9 Standard event 15 11 Status byte 15 8 Relative 8 2 Front panel operation 8 2 Remote programming 8 3 Remote commands Triggering 11 18 Remote operation 14 1 Auto zero 3 10 Compliance limit 3 8 Contact check function F 14 Data store 9 5 Digital output control 13 5 Guard selection 2 13 Limit testing 12 20 Measure only 3 21 3 22 Operation enhancements 14 2 Pulse Mode configuration 5 11 Pulse Mode sweep 10 26 Selecting an interface 14 3 Sense selection 2 12 Source delay 3 14 Source measure procedure 3 18 Sweep 10 19 Terminals selection 2 3 Trigg
244. e current compliance for the V Source and the SENSe VOLTage PROTection LIMit command is used to set the voltage compliance for the I Source NOTE You cannot set compliance less than 0 1 of the present measurement range RSYNhronize lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection RSYNchronize lt b gt Control current measure and compliance range sync SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection RSYNchronize lt b gt Control voltage measure and compliance range sync Parameters lt b gt OFF Disable range sync ON Enable range sync Description Turning this feature on will make the measurement range follow the compliance range setting when autoranging is off When the compli ance value is set the measurement range will be on the same range as the compliance setting The two commands above change one setting changing the state of one will automatically change the other TRIPped SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection TRIPped Query current compliance state SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection TRIPped Query voltage compliance state Description This command is used to determine if the source is in compliance If a 1 is returned then the source is in compliance A 0 indicates that the source is not in compliance The CURRent PROTection TRIPped command is used to check the compliance state of the V Source and the VOLTage PROTection TRIPped command is used to check the compliance state of the I Source 2400 Series SourceMeter
245. e device you connect to the SourceMeter also uses these settings 14 14 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual You can break data transmissions by sending a C decimal 3 or X decimal 18 character string to the instrument This clears any pending operation and discards any pending output Baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the SourceMeter and the programming terminal communicate Choose one of these available rates 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 The factory selected baud rate is 9600 When you choose a baud rate make sure the programming terminal or printer that you are connecting to the SourceMeter can support the baud rate you selected Both the SourceMeter and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate Data bits and parity The RS 232 interface can be configured to send receive data that is 7 or 8 bits long using even odd or no parity No parity is only valid when using 8 data bits Terminator The SourceMeter can be configured to terminate each program message that it transmits to the controller with any of the following combinations of lt CR gt and lt LF gt lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt LF CR gt Carriage return Carriage return and line feed Line feed Line feed and carriage return 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 15 Flow control signal handshaking Signal handshaking bet
246. e not available for the trigger layer With TIMer selected the event occurs at the beginning of the timer interval and every time it times out For example if the timer is pro grammed for a 30 second interval the first pass through the control source occurs immediately Subsequent arm events will then occur every 30 seconds The interval for the timer is set using the TIMer command With MANual selected the event occurs when the TRIG key is pressed With BUS selected the event occurs when a GET or TRG com mand is sent over the bus With NSTESt selected the event occurs when the start of test SOT low pulse is received from a component handler via the Digital I O port This is used for limit testing With PSTest selected the event occurs when start of test SOT high pulse is received from a component handler via the Digital I O port This is used for limit testing 18 120 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TiMer lt n gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TIMer lt n gt Set interval for arm layer timer Parameters lt n gt 0 001 to 9999 999 Specify timer interval in seconds 10000 00 to 99999 99Specify timer interval in seconds Query TIMer Query programmed timer interval Description These commands are used to set the interval for the timer Note that the timer is in effect only if the timer is the selected control source DiRection lt name gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure
247. e to the SourceMeter DO NOT exceed the maximum allowable voltage differentials shown in Figure 2 1 The front and rear terminals of the SourceMeters are rated for connection to circuits rated Installation Category only Do not connect the SourceMeter terminals to CAT Il CAT Ill or CAT IV circuits Connections of the SourceMeter Input Output termi nals to circuits higher than CAT I can cause damage to the equipment or expose the operator to hazardous voltages Common mode current limits As shown in Figure 2 1 the maximum common mode voltage is the voltage between INPUT OUTPUT LO and chassis ground In order to prevent electric shock and or damage to the SourceMeter current from an external common mode voltage source must be limited Current limiting can be accomplished with the use of a protective impedance or a fuse 2 4 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING To prevent electric shock and or damage to the SourceMeter common mode voltage must be externally limited as follows Models 2400 2400 LV 2401 and 2410 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 1 05A maximum Models 2420 and 2425 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 3 15A maximum Model 2430 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 10 5A pulse Model 2440 Limit common mode voltage to 40VDC 5 25A maximum Figure 2 1 Terminal voltage differentials rear panel WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATI oOo r aif 250V 5V 25
248. e with autozero on current range set 0 15 2 5 5 0 4 0 to 10A Source Measure cycle with autozero off current range set 0 15 2 5 2 90 1 9 to 10A Source only current range set to 10A 0 15 2 5 2 90 1 9 1 Pulse delay is set to zero for all settings 2 For consistent pulse period duty cycle should not exceed 8 Note Minimum output off time assumes minimum pulse width setting Pulse width The pulse width can be set from 0 15msec to 5 00msec However depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width setting may not be achiev able For example if it takes 1 667msec to perform the signal measurement the minimum pulse width that can be achieved is 1 75msec 1 667msec signal mea surement plus 80usec overhead Therefore if the pulse width setting is shorter than what is achievable the setting is ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 5 The maximum pulse width for the 10A range source or measure is 2 5msec If the setting is gt 2 5msec the SourceMeter will limit the pulse width to 2 5msec Signal measurement A pulse reading consists of three measurement conversions The signal pulse is measured a precise internal reference is measured and finally zero common is measured The reading is calculated from these measurements As shown in Figure 5 2 the signal measurement Meas Sig is a component of the pulse width while the reference a
249. eMeter User s Manual Binning failure indications grading mode As previously discussed it is possible to place a fail pattern on the Digital I O Port when contact check fails It is important to note that depending on whether source auto clear is enabled and when the bin control is done certain issues arise when running a test with a normal voltage or current sweep and a source memory sweep Four possible effects on sweep operation may occur when using the digi tal output and contact check Refer to Binning systems page 12 10 fora description of binning and to Front panel output configuration page 13 7 for details on source auto off functionality When performing a source memory sweep with the SourceMeter contact check is performed before each point in that sweep only when 4 wire remote sensing is enabled To save test cycle time the contact check is performed before the mem ory location for the sweep point is recalled If there is a failure in any of the four modes below the sweep memory location containing the open lead will not be recalled from the memory Auto clear on end binning Source auto clear on SOUR CLE AUTO ON Bin control at end of sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON END If a point in a sweep operation fails contact check the output is turned off and will remain off until the end of the sweep points The triggers will be supplied and accepted to maintain timing The memory for each of the points after the failu
250. eadings are not performed for the output off times For normal DC Mode sweep operation the time duration spent on each step consists of the set source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement For the Pulse Mode source delay is not used The pulse width consists of the pulse width delay internal overhead time and the pulse signal measurement The output off time typically consists of zero and reference measurements used to calculate accurate pulse readings internal overhead time and an optional pulse delay NOTE Details on Pulse Mode operation for the Model 2430 are provided in Section 5 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 25 Figure 10 5 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep Measure M easure 2V gt M easure OV off L Pulse 1 be a oo l us 3 Front panel Pulse Mode sweep procedure The procedure to perform a Pulse Mode sweep is summarized as follows NOTE The following procedure assumes that the Model 2430 is already con nected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 WARNING Hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when performing fast pulse sweep operations To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO ter minal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel ter minals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connec tion can be made at the chas
251. ean buffer statistic Request buffer mean data Select standard deviation statistic Request standard deviation data 10 Sweep Operation Sweep types Describes the four basic sweep types Linear staircase logarithmic staircase custom and source memory sweep Configuring and running a sweep Discusses the procedure for setting up and performing sweeps including selecting and configuring a sweep setting the delay and performing a sweep Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only Covers sweep operation for the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 10 2 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep types Sweeps allow you to program the instrument to step through specific voltage and current values and perform measurements at each source value The four basic sweep types which are described in the following paragraphs include e Linear staircase e Logarithmic staircase e Custom e Source memory NOTE Only voltage or current sweeps can be performed Sweep readings are automatically stored in the buffer See Section 9 for details on the data store buffer Linear staircase sweep As shown in Figure 10 1 this sweep steps from a start source value to an ending stop source value Programmable parameters include the start stop and step source levels When this sweep is triggered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start source level The output will then change in equal steps until
252. easurement was made with the filter enabled Bit 2 Front Rear Set to 1 if FRONT terminals are selected Bit 3 Compliance Set to 1 if in real compliance Bit 4 OVP Set to 1 if the over voltage protection limit was reached Bit 5 Math Set to 1 if math expression calc1 is enabled Bit 6 Null Set to 1 if Null is enabled Bit 7 Limits Set to 1 if a limit test calc2 is enabled Bits 8 and 9 Limit Results Provides limit test results see grading and sorting modes below Bit 10 Auto ohms Set to 1 if auto ohms enabled Bit 11 V Meas Set to 1 if V Measure is enabled Bit 12 I Meas Set to 1 if Measure is enabled Bit 13 Q Meas Set to 1 if Measure is enabled Bit 14 V Sour Set to 1 if V Source used Bit 15 l Sour Set to 1 if Source used Bit 16 Range Compliance Set to 1 if in range compliance 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 51 Description Bit 17 Offset Compensation Set to 1 if Offset Compensated Ohms is enabled Bit 18 Contact check failure see Appendix F Bits 19 20 and 21 Limit Results Provides limit test results see grading and sorting modes below Bit 22 Remote Sense Set to 1 if 4 wire remote sense selected Bit 23 Pulse Mode Set to 1 if in the Pulse Mode Bits 8 9 and 19 21 flag pass fail conditions for the various limits tests The bit values for the grading and sorting mo
253. eck defaults Table F 5 summarizes default settings for various contact check modes along with the equivalent remote commands Table F 5 Contact check defaults Mode Default setting Remote command Contact check mode Disabled SYSTem CCHeck OFF Contact check threshold resistance 50Q SYStem CCHeck RESistance 50 Limit 4 test Disabled CALCulate2 LIMit4 STATe OFF Limit 4 Digital I O failure pattern 15 CALCulate2 LIMit4 SOURce2 15 Contact check event detection Disabled TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURCce IMMediate Contact check timeout 0 TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT 0 Bench SYSTem PRESet and GPIB RST defaults are the same G GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 2 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction The SourceMeter supports two GPIB protocols SCPI and 488 1 The 488 1 proto col is included to significantly increase speed over the GPIB When using the 488 1 protocol throughput is enhanced up to 10 times for data sent to the SourceMeter command messages and up to 20 times for data returned by the Source Meter response messages The speed of readings sent over the GPIB is also increased see Multiple TALKs on the same query are sup ported as in the SCPI protocol This feature is useful when reading back long ASCII strings page G 5 for details NOTE With the 488 1 protocol selected you will still use SCPI commands to program the SourceMeter Operation differences between the two proto
254. ected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e8 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 1 05 amps 1100 volts 0 ohms MAXimum 1 05 amps 1100 volts 2 1e8 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Expected reading in amps 63 to 63 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 3 15 amps 63 volts O ohms MAXimum 3 15 amps 63 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Expected reading in amps 105 to 105 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 3 15 amps 105 volts O ohms 18 64 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query Description MAXimum 3 15 amps 105 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Expected reading in amps 105 to 105 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 10 5 amps 105 volts 0 ohms MAXimum 10 5 amps 105 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measuremen
255. ecting guard modes For 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD output off state For details on the GUARD output off state see Section 13 Output off states The driven guard available at the rear panel GUARD terminal is always enabled and provides a buffered voltage that is at the same level as the Input Output HI or Sense HI for remote sense voltage The purpose of guarding is to eliminate the effects of leakage current and capacitance that can exist between input output high and low In the absence of a driven guard leakage in the external test circuit could be high enough to adversely affect the performance of the SourceMeter Leakage current can occur through parasitic or non parasitic leakage paths An example of parasitic resistance is the leakage path across the insulator in a coax or triax cable An example of non parasitic resistance is the leakage path through a resistor that is connected in parallel to the DUT There are two programmable output impedance levels for the guard output The high impedance 10kQ CABLE guard is used to reduce the effects of capacitance and leakage current paths in the test circuit The low impedance lt 1Q OHMS guard is used to cancel the effects of parallel resistances when measuring a resistor element of a resistor network Cable guard The CABLE guard selection provides a high impedance 10kQ driven guard to prevent positive feedback which could cause oscillations when using
256. ection 3 for details The manually set delay up to 9999 999 sec is available to compensate for longer settling required by external circuitry The more capacitance seen at the output the more settling time is required for the source The actual delay period needed can be calculated or determined by trial and error For purely resistive loads and at higher current levels the programmable delay can be set to Omsec 6 8 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The measure time depends on the selected measurement speed For example if speed is set at 0 01 PLC power line cycles the measure time would be 167usec for 60Hz operation 0 01 60 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 9 Sweep waveforms There are four basic sweep types to select from linear staircase logarithmic stair case custom and source memory Three of the sweeps are shown in Figure 6 2 Figure 6 2 Three basic sweep waveform types Bias A Linear Staircase Sweep Stop 100 10 Logarithmic scale 1 shown for Start staircase steps 0 1 Bias B Logarithmic Staircase Sweep First Point Last Point Bias C Custom Sweep 6 10 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Operating boundaries Source or sink Depending on how it is programmed and what is connected to the output load or source the SourceMeter can operate in any of the four quadrants The four quadrants of op
257. ed turn the SourceMeter output on and press the LIMIT key In this example the testing process will start when the component handler sends the start of test SOT strobe pulse to the SourceMeter Note that if a handler is not used testing will start when LIMIT is pressed Pressing LIMIT a second time termi nates the testing process As shown in the flowchart limit tests are performed after a measurement conversion 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 5 Figure 12 2 Grading mode limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key y Wait for SOT pulse from handler me Perform Source Measure action Perform Display Binning Immediate Output Limit 1 Limita Test FAIL Control Fail Pattern No End Yes _ Store Limit 1 Fail Pattern in Memory No Perform Display Binning Immediate Output Limit 2 Limit 2 Test FAIL Control Fail Pattern Store Limit 2 Fail Pattern in Memory 77 Perform gt No Display Binning Immediate Output Limit 3 Is FAIL Control Fail Pattern No Store Limit 3 5 12 Fail Pattern in Memory No Display PASS Yes Immediate End Another Test Cycle 2 Yes vy y Output First Output Pass Fail Pattern Patte
258. ed SE Measurement Event 13 114 Source in compliance SE Measurement Event 14 Standard events 200 Operation complete SE Standard Event 0 Operation events 300 Device calibrating SE Operation Event 0 303 Device sweeping SE Operation Event 3 305 Waiting in trigger layer SE Operation Event 5 306 Waiting in arm layer SE Operation Event 6 310 Entering idle layer SE Operation Event 10 Questionable events 408 Questionable Calibration SE Questionable Event 8 414 Command Warning SE Questionable Event 14 Contact check option only B 6 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit Calibration errors 500 Date of calibration not set EE Standard Event 3 501 Next date of calibration not set EE Standard Event 3 502 Calibration data invalid EE Standard Event 3 503 DAC calibration overflow EE Standard Event 3 504 DAC calibration underflow EE Standard Event 3 505 Source offset data invalid EE Standard Event 3 506 Source gain data invalid EE Standard Event 3 507 Measurement offset data invalid EE Standard Event 3 508 Measurement gain data invalid EE Standard Event 3 509 Not permitted with cal locked EE Standard Event 3 510 Not permitted with cal un locked EE Standard Event 3 Lost data errors 601 Reading buffer data lost EE Standard Event 3 602 GPIB address lost EE Standard Event 3
259. ed to enable or disable contact check When using contact check remote sensing must be enabled SYST RSEN ON RESistance lt NRf gt SYSTem CCHeck RESistance lt NRf gt Set contact check threshold resistance Parameters lt NRf gt 0 60 ohms 2 ohms 15 ohms or 50 ohms threshold resistance 0 to 2 2 ohms 2to 15 150hms 15 to 60 50 ohms Query RESistance Query contact check threshold resistance Description This command sets the contact threshold resistance value Factory default 50 ohms The contact check function will indicate a failure when the connection path resistance is greater than the programmed value This command is used to enable or disable contact check When using contact check remote sensing must be enabled SYST RSEN ON RSENse lt b gt SYSTem RSENse lt b gt Enable or disable remote sensing Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable remote sensing 1 or ON Enable remote sensing Query RSENse Query state of remote sensing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 105 Description This command is used to enable or disable remote sensing When using remote sensing 4 wire connections to the DUT are required Sourcing voltage With remote sensing enabled the output volt age is sensed measured at the DUT If the sensed voltage is lower than the programmed amplitude then the V Source increases the voltage until the sensed voltage is the same as the programmed amp
260. eens 14 6 ProgrammMInG SYMtAaX sssrin niran naii Aa ii A REAS 14 6 Command Wolds esenee O 14 6 Query COMMANAS erosin aine ade AAA 14 9 Case Sensitivity ssena n eenn nn i 14 9 Long form and short form versions eeeeeee eeen 14 9 Short fOrm ruleS c cccccccecseecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 14 10 Response MESSAGES on eeeeccceeeseceecteeeecneeteeeeceaeeeneeseceanaenses 14 12 Message exchange protocol ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeee 14 13 RS 232 interface Operation ccccceeeeeeeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 13 Sending and receiving data eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 14 13 AUC ALS sreo S sas duteaneel A etedddeete shwcdseebe pads 14 14 Data bits and parity 0 0 ccc eeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeteeeeeee 14 14 TENGAN aai vimneceaveanded 14 14 Flow control signal handshaking eeens 14 15 RS 232 connections sslinds innii innan ainan a ARANA 14 15 Eror Messages oieee aA apanetoet geass tene ead 14 17 15 Status Structure QOVENIOW sicesecatihatedecei na ncceeeatiiieecsctha AAE 15 2 Status byte ANd SRQ oe ecceeeeceeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeetnaeeeeeees 15 2 Status register SCS sisi e tents etal eeediaiee ited weed 15 2 QUOUCS oo ce cceeceeeeeeceee eee teceeenee teceaaaneesedcaaeeeeseeesensaeseeneenaeeees 15 2 Clearing registers ANd QUCUES cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaaas 15 4 Programming and reading registers ccceeeeeeeeeeeentteeeeeeenee
261. ees D 8 Address COMMANAS 2 ces eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeetecsencaeaeeeeeeeeeess D 8 Unaddress commands s eeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenneaeeess D 8 COMMON COMMANGS sssini iniisa adie iai D 8 SCPI COMMAMNAS oecite aa iaaa D 8 COMMANG C des ressis anaiai aiian D 9 IEEE command groups 0 eeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeaaes D 11 Interface function codes cccecceeeeececcecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesnnaeeees D 12 Introduction sorone a a a a E 2 INrOdUCtiON varann aiaia nii a F 2 OVENVIQW sipsirin aeiiaaie aaa daa Aa aa iaaa adaa F 2 DESCHIPUON ci cacecsesansssrtanveraceccsvaaiacterrsseteaaaptvaadnediesvaduateaeennd aces F 2 Operation n onia apace a cecasencedenatcgatedeorieetenans F 3 DUT COnNeCHIONS aa tievisedatedesssved Messed cnastagideresasanddeleavendedceeas F 3 Contact check threshold resistances eceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees F 4 Contact check failure indications eccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee F 5 Auto and manual ONMS 2 ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseennncaeeeeees F 5 Trigger model Operation c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetaeeeeeees F 6 Sweep and binning Considerations eeen F 6 SWEEP MIMIATIONS assistanse iaai uii addii EN F 6 Limit test sequence ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesetseeneneeeess F 7 Binning failure indications grading mode eceeeeeeee F 10 Front panel contact check operation
262. eference information Detailed information on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section If source V is active DPANRYN For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range is invalid error 831 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 004 to 0 100 If source is active and auto ohms is disabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 13 Table 18 6 continued SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection LEVel Query voltage compliance limit y TRIPped In voltage compliance 1 yes 0 no y RSYNchronize lt b gt Enable or disable measure and OFF compliance range synchronization RSYNchronize Query range synchronization RESistance Path to configure resistance v MODE lt name gt Select ohms mode MANual or AUTO AUTO v MODE Query ohms mode OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable or disable offset compensated OFF y ohms OCOMpensated Query state of offset compensated ohms v RANGe Configure measurement range y UPPer Select range by specifying the expected 2 1e5 y y lt n gt UP DOWN resistance reading UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y y AUTO Query auto range v ULIMit lt n gt Set auto range upper limit y ULIMit Query auto range upper limit y LLIMit lt n gt Set auto range lower limit y LLIMit Query auto range lower limit y
263. efined digital output pattern Note that the output value can be specified as a binary octal decimal or hexadecimal value Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern For non decimal parameters o FOTW WN SZ 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 37 convert the decimal value to its binary octal or hexadecimal equiva lent Decimal OUT 4 OUT3 OUT 2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V OUT 4 not used in 3 bit mode values 0 to 7 The SourceMeter can be configured to place the defined fail bit pat tern on the digital output immediately when a fail condition occurs or it can wait until all testing on a device package is completed opera tion leaves trigger layer See Composite testing page 18 39 and BCONtrol lt name gt page 18 41 for details 18 38 SCPI Command Reference PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt NDN CALCulate2 LIMitx PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set sorting mode pass pattern x 2 3 5 12 NOTE The above command to set the pass pattern for the sorting mode is invalid for the Model 2401 and will cause an undefined header error
264. el immediately y AMPLitude lt n gt Specify current level 0 y F i AMPLitude Query current level y For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto clear is always enabled This command is ignored 2 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used This command is ignored 3 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed infor mation on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 4 If source V is active 18 16 Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered Set level when triggered y AMPLitude lt n gt Specify current level 1 0 J AMPLitude Query current level y SFACtor lt n gt Set current scaling factor 1 0 a 999 9999e 18 to 999 999e 18 STATe lt b gt Enable disable current scaling factor OFF tio STATe Query current scaling factor state SFACtor Query current scaling factor STARt lt n gt Specify start level for sweep 0 y STARt Query start level for current sweep y STOP lt n gt Specify stop level for l sweep 1 0 y STOP Query stop level for current sweep y STEP lt n gt Specify step value for l sweep 0 STEP Query step value for voltage sweep SPAN lt n gt Specify span 0
265. elative and Math Table 8 4 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Commands for user defined math functions Command Description CALCulate MATH UNITs lt name gt CALCulate MATH NAME lt name gt CALCulate MATH EXPression lt form gt CALCulate STATe lt state gt CALCulate DATA Specified units for user defined function name three ASCII characters in quotes Define math name name user name Define math formula form formula Valid names VOLTage CURRent RESistance TIME Valid math operators log In sin cos tan exp Enable disable math state ON or OFF Query math data User defined math function programming example Table 8 5 shows the command sequence for a typical user defined math function This example defines a percent deviation math function Table 8 5 User defined math function programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC ON RES CALC MATH UNIT CALC MATH EXPR NAME PER_DEV CALC MATH EXPR RES 10e3 10e3 100 CALC STAT ON OUTP ON INIT CALC DATA Disable concurrent functions Select resistance function Define units name Define math expression name Define math expression Enable math data Turn on output Trigger unit Request math data 9 Data Store Data store overview Outlines basic data s
266. elow the limit the instrument is not in compli ance Limit 2 limit 3 and limit 5 12 tests These software S W tests are used to determine if a DUT is within specified high and low limits Typically the Limit 2 test is used to test for coarse tolerance limits and the Limit 3 and Limit 5 12 tests are used for fine tolerance limits Limit 4 This hardware test is only available for instruments equipped with the optional contact check feature See for details about the contact check option Distinct Digital I O bit patterns can be set for each limit and each high low pass or fail condition Limit test modes There are two modes of operation for limit tests grading and sorting For Limit 1 test compliance operation is similar for both limit test modes If Limit 1 test fails the FAIL message is displayed and the testing process for that DUT or DUT element is terminated A pass condition allows the testing process to proceed to the next enabled limit test 12 4 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual With the grading mode selected each enable software test Limit 2 3 5 12 is per formed until a failure occurs When a test fails the FAIL message is displayed and the testing process for that DUT or DUT element is terminated With the sorting mode selected each enabled software test Limit 2 3 5 12 is per formed until a test passes When a test passes the PASS message is displayed and the testing p
267. ement with the source set to zero 11 is the current measurement with the source set to a specific level I2 is the current measurement with the source set to zero For auto ohms the SourceMeter will select the appropriate current source level and voltage measurement range For manual ohms first select the appropriate source V or I value while the output is off When the source is turned on the output will cycle between the programmed value and zero 0A or OV to derive the offset compensated ohms measurement Enabling disabling offset compensated ohms Offset compensated ohms is enabled or disabled from the OFFSET COMPENSA TION option of the CONFIG OHMS menu 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 9 Ohms accuracy calculations Example accuracy calculations for various combinations of source readback off set compensation and normal enhanced mode are shown below See Appendix A for detailed specifications Ohms accuracy of 100mQ 5mA source current normal mode Source readback OFF Offset Compensation OFF Ohms accuracy Ilsource accuracy Vmeas accuracy source accuracy 5mA 0 045 2uA 2 25uA 2uA 4 25pA 4 25uA 5mA 0 085 Vmeasure accuracy for 100mQ 5mA 500uV 500uV 0 012 300nV 6OnV 300uV 300 06uV 300 06uV 500uV 60 01 Total Ohms Uncertainty 60 01 0 085 60 09 100MQ 60 09 39 9mMQ to 160 09MQ Ohms accuracy of 100mMQ 5mA source current norma
268. en instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the trans fer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credibility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active controller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen 2 The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 The listener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for the next byte of data 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 3 Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is also frequently referred to as the GPIB General Pur pose Interface Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer without using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines that are used for both data and with most com mands Five bus management lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typ
269. en listening on the bus it expects line feed with EOI as the termina tor See the reference manual for your particular IEEE 488 interface 420 Query UNTERMINATED This error occurs when you address the instrument to talk and there is no response message to send The most likely causes are Not sending a query You must send a valid query to the instrument before addressing it to talk Sending an invalid query f you have sent a query and still get this error make sure that the instrument is processing the query without error For example sending an ill formed query that generates an error 113 Unde fined header and then addressing the instrument to talk will generate an error 420 Query UNTERMINATED as well Valid query following an invalid command This situation can occur when you send multiple commands or queries program message units within one command string program message When the SourceMeter detects an error in a program message unit it discards all further program message units until the end of the string for example SENS DATE SENS FUNC In the above program message the program message unit SENS DATE will generate error 113 Undefined header and the SourceMeter will dis card the second program message unit SENS FUNC even though it is a valid query C Data Flow C 2 Data Flow 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction Data flow for remote operation is summa
270. endix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data LATest CALCulate 1 DATA LATest Read latest CALC1 result Description This command works exactly like CALC1 DATA except that it returns only the latest CALC1 result CALC u late2 Configure and control limit tests The following commands are used to configure and control the three limit tests for DUT When used with a handler to provide binning operations communication between the SourceMeter and the handler is provided via the Digital I O port Many control aspects of the digital output lines are performed from the SOURce2 Sub system These control aspects include setting and clearing the digital output lines and setting pulse width See SOURce2 page 18 98 subsystem for details NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port Invalid CALCulate2 commands for the Model 2401 are listed in Table 12 2 They will cause undefined header errors Select input path FEED lt name gt CALCulate2 FEED lt name gt Select input path for limit tests Parameters lt name gt CALCulate 1 Use result of CALC1 VOLTage Use measured voltage reading CURRent Use measured current reading RESistance Use measured resistance reading Query FEED Query input path for limit tests Description This c
271. energize the relay and the maximum source current is 2mA Figure 13 3 Source operation SourceM eter Maximum source current 2mA I 5Vo b i 1 I E a i 1 O I i Pins 1 4 To other i i Circuits I i o 2 e i i L 1 Pin9 External or ed ee Relay Digital 1 0 Port Controlling digital output lines Although the digital output lines are primarily intended for use with a device han dler for limit testing they can also be used for other purposes such as controlling external relays or indicator lights You can control these lines either from the front panel or via remote as covered below 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 13 5 Front panel digital output control Set digital output line logic levels from the front panel as follows 1 Press the MENU key 2 Select GENERAL then press ENTER 3 Select DIGOUT then press ENTER 4 Using the RANGE and cursor keys set the digital output parameter to the desired decimal value Table 13 1 For example to set the output lines to L H H H set the digital output parameter value to 7 5 Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote digital output control Use the SOURce2 TTL lt NRf gt command to control the digital output line logic levels where lt NRf gt is the decimal value shown in Table 13 1 For example send the following command to set the output lines to L H L H SOUR2
272. ent Enable Register Idle In idle state amp Logical AND Arm Waiting for arm event OR Logical OR Trg Waiting for trigger event Swp Sweeping Cal Calibrating Measurement Event Register The used bits of the Measurement Event Register shown in Figure 15 6 are described as follows Bit BO Limit 1 Fail L1 Set bit indicates that the Limit 1 test has failed Bit B1 Low Limit 2 Fail LL2 Set bit indicates that the Low Limit 2 test has failed Bit B2 High Limit 2 Fail HL2 Set bit indicates that the High Limit 2 test has failed Bit B3 Low Limit 3 Fail LL3 Set bit indicates that the Low Limit 3 test has failed Bit B4 High Limit 3 Fail HL3 Set bit indicates that the High Limit 3 test has failed Bit B5 Limits Pass LP Set bit indicates that all limit tests passed Bit B6 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a reading was taken and processed 15 14 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual e Bit B7 Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that the volts or amps reading exceeds the selected measurement range of the SourceMeter e Bit B8 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two readings in the buffer e Bit B9 Buffer Full BFL Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is full e Bit B10 Limit 4 Contact Check see Appendix F e Bit B11 Output Enable Asserted Int Set bit indicates that the output e
273. enter the menu structure 14 4 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB operation This section contains information about GPIB standards bus connections and primary address selection GPIB standards The GPIB is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and program ming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Elec tronic Engineers in 1975 The SourceMeter conforms to these standards e IEEE 488 1 1987 IEEE 488 2 1992 The above standards define a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instrument and a group of common commands The SourceMeter also conforms to this standard e SCPI 1996 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This standard defines a command language protocol It goes one step farther than IEEE 488 2 1992 and defines a standard set of commands to control every pro grammable aspect of an instrument GPIB connections To connect the SourceMeter to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard IEEE 488 connectors To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connectors Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure To avoid possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromagnetic radiation
274. er User s Manual Byte order BORDer lt name gt FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify binary byte order Parameters lt name gt NORMal Normal byte order for binary formats SWAPped Reverse byte order for binary formats Query BORDer Query byte order Description This command is used to control the byte order for the IEEE 754 binary formats For normal byte order the data format for each ele ment is sent as follows Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Single precision For reverse byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte4 Byte3 Byte2 Byte1 Single precision The 0 Header is not affected by this command The Header is always sent at the beginning of the data string for each measurement conversion The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is simply ignored when the ASCII format is selected NOTE The SWAPped byte order must be used when transmitting binary data to any IBM PC compatible computer Status register format SREGister lt name gt FORMat SREGister lt name gt Set data format for reading status regis ters Parameters lt name gt ASCii Decimal format Hexadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format Query SREGister Query format for reading status registers Description Query commands are used to read the contents of the status event registers This command is used to set the response message for mat for those query comma
275. er considerations 6 36 Bus commands SOURce 18 15 STATus 18 20 TRACe 18 23 TRIGger 18 24 General 14 5 Command words 14 6 Commands IEEE 4888 bus D 6 Cc Common commands Cable guard 2 8 IDN 16 3 Cables 1 3 OPC 16 3 Calculate subsystems 18 26 OPC 16 3 Capabilities RCL 16 3 Source measure 3 4 RST 16 4 Carrying case 1 4 SAV 16 3 Case sensitivity 14 9 TRG 16 4 Circuit configurations TST 16 4 Basic 3 9 WAI 16 5 Measure only 6 25 Compliance 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Determining limit 6 4 Examples 6 4 Maximum values 6 3 Setting front panel compliance limit 3 8 Setting remote compliance limit 3 8 Types 6 2 Compliance limit 6 2 Setting 3 8 compliance parameters 18 66 18 67 Compliance range synchronization 3 8 Configuration measurement function 17 2 Configure OUTPUT menu 13 8 Connections 2 1 Connections to DUT 2 3 Contact check function F 1 Command reference F 17 Defaults F 20 Front panel operation F 11 Operation F 3 Programming example F 15 Remote operation F 14 Sweep and binning considerations F 6 Cooling fan 1 12 Current 10 6 Current measure 3 20 Custom sweep 10 6 10 16 Data flow 6 34 C 1 Data store 9 1 Buffer considerations 9 5 Buffer statistics 9 3 Front panel operation 9 2 Programming example 9 5 Recalling readings 9 2 Remote operation 9 5 Storing readings 9 2 Timestamp accuracy 9 4 Timestamp format 9 4 Digital I O port 13 2 Configuration 13 2 Controlling output lin
276. er of digits is dis played e CONFIG DIGITS Press CONFIG and then DIGITS to display the digits menu Place the cursor on the desired number of digits 3 5 4 5 5 5 or 6 5 and press ENTER NOTE The concurrent measurement available on the secondary display by using the TOGGLE key is always 5Hiigits Changing SPEED changes DIGITS but changing DIGITS does not change SPEED Remote range and digits programming Table 7 1 summarizes the commands necessary to control range and digits See Section 18 for more details on these commands Range and digits commands Table 7 1 Range and digits commands Command Description SENSe CURRent RANGe lt n gt Select manual amps range n range SENSe CURRent RANGe AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto amps range state ON or OFF SENSe VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Select manual volts measure range n range SENSe VOLTage RANGe AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto volts range state ON or OFF SENSe RESistance RANGe lt n gt Select manual ohms range n range SENSe RESistance RANGe AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto ohms range state ON or OFF DISPlay DIGits lt n gt Set display digits n 4 5 6 or 7 Note For the Model 2430 the AUTO range commands are not valid while in the Pulse Mode 7 6 Range Digits Speed and Filters Table 7 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range and digits programming example Table 7 2 shows
277. eration for the SourceMeter models are shown in Figure 6 3 through Figure 6 7 When operating in the first 1 or third III quadrant the SourceMeter is operating as a source V and have the same polarity As a source the SourceMeter is delivering power to a load When operating in the second II or fourth IV quadrant the SourceMeter is operating as a sink V and have opposite polarity As a sink it is dissipating power rather than sourcing it See Section 3 Remote command measure only for more information Duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio of source on time to total time period expressed as a percentage For example if the source is on for six out of 10 seconds the duty cycle is 60 Model 2400 2400 LV 2401 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2400 2400 LV 2401 are shown in Figure 6 3 In this drawing the 1A 20V and 100mA 200V magnitudes are nomi nal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 1 05A 21V and 105mA 210V 21V for 2400 LV and 2401 Also note that the boundaries are not drawn to scale These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an environment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output o
278. ering 11 10 V source protection 3 12 Remote output configuration 13 12 Remote programming Data store 9 5 Display 1 14 Filter 7 12 Math 8 7 Ohms 4 13 Range and digits 7 5 Relative 8 3 Speed 7 8 Sweeps 10 19 Response messages 14 12 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual RS 232 interface Baud rate 14 14 Connections 14 15 Data bits and parity 14 14 Flow control signal handshaking 14 15 Operation 14 13 Sending and receiving data 14 13 Terminator 14 14 Safety symbols and terms 1 2 scaling factor 18 95 SCPI Command reference 18 1 Command summary 17 2 Eliminating common errors B 8 SCPI commands see Command refer ence Command summary Com mon commands and Signal oriented measurement commands Sensing 2 5 2 wire local 2 7 4 wire remote 2 7 Guard 2 9 6 32 Ohms 4 6 Selection 2 12 Serial polling 15 9 Settings Default 1 15 Factory default 1 16 Power on configuration 1 15 Remote setups 1 18 Restoring 1 15 Saving 1 15 Short form rules 14 10 Signal oriented measurement commands CONFigure lt function gt 17 2 FETCh 17 3 MEASure lt function gt 17 5 READ 17 4 SENSe 1 DATA LATest 17 4 Single element device binning 12 13 Sink operation 3 22 Source delay 3 13 Source measure and source V measure V 6 22 Source memory sweep 10 6 10 17 10 22 Source delay measure cycle 6 7 Source measure capabilities 3 4 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source measure procedure Front p
279. ero enabled and measuring two functions Figure A 2 Case II Timing Diagram A D A D Trigger Trigger Source Conversion Conversion eee es Latency Delay Configuration Delay voltage signal current signal phase phase ref phase ref zero phase Source On Time gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 50usec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185yusec Firmware Overhead 2 3msec for Source V 2 65msec for Source Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay 4 x A D Conversion Firmware Overhead Example Source Delay Ousec NPLC Setting 0 06 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50usec 0 4 x 0 06 x 1 60 185usec 2 6msec 7 1msec for Source V 7 45msec for Source IR IR A 6 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Case Ill Auto Zero disabled and measuring one function Figure A 3 Case III Timing Diagram A D Trigger Trigger Source Source Conversion Latency Delay Configuration Delay current signal phase Source On Time gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 50yusec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185usec Firmware Overhead 300usec for Source V 640usec for Source Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay A D Conversion Firmware Over
280. error EE Standard Event 4 215 Arm deadlock EE Standard Event 4 214 Trigger deadlock EE Standard Event 4 213 Init ignored EE Standard Event 4 212 Arm ignored EE Standard Event 4 211 Trigger ignored EE Standard Event 4 210 Trigger error EE Standard Event 4 202 Settings lost due to rtl EE Standard Event 4 201 Invalid while in local EE Standard Event 4 200 Execution error EE Standard Event 4 B 4 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 178 Expression data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 171 Invalid expression EE Standard Event 5 170 Expression error EE Standard Event 5 168 Block data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 161 Invalid block data EE Standard Event 5 160 Block data error EE Standard Event 5 158 String data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 154 String too long EE Standard Event 5 151 Invalid string data EE Standard Event 5 150 String data error EE Standard Event 5 148 Character data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 144 Character data too long EE Standard Event 5 141 Invalid character data EE Standard Event 5 140 Character data error EE Standard Event 5 128 Numeric data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 124 Too many digits EE Standard Event 5 123 Exponent too large EE Standard Event 5 121 Invalid character in number EE Standard Event 5 120 Numeric data error EE Standa
281. es 13 4 Output configuration 13 3 Digital output clear pattern 12 14 Digits 7 5 Display Disabling 1 24 Format 1 13 Remote programming 1 14 Index EDIT key 1 13 Errors Eliminating common SCPI errors B 8 Examples Contact check function programming example F 15 Custom sweep programming example 10 21 Data store programming example 9 5 Filter programming example 7 12 Limit testing programming example 12 22 Ohms programming example 4 14 Output configuration programming example 13 12 Program and read register set programming example 15 17 Pulse measure programming example 5 11 Range and digits programming example 7 6 Read error queue programming example 15 20 Relative programming example 8 3 Set MSS B6 when error occurs programming example 15 10 Source memory sweep programming example 10 23 Source measure programming example 3 19 Staircase sweep programming example 10 19 Triggering 11 20 User defined math function programming example 8 8 Factory default settings 1 16 Filter 7 9 Front panel control 7 10 Programming example 7 12 Remote programming 7 12 Front panel operation Auto zero 3 10 Compliance limit 3 8 Contact check function F 11 Data store 9 2 Digital output control 13 5 Filter 7 10 GPIB 14 5 Guard selection 2 13 Limit testing 12 19 Math 8 6 Menus 1 19 Output configuration 13 7 Pulse Mode configuration 5 10 Pulse Mode sweep procedure 10 25 Relative 8 2 Sense selection 2 12 Source delay
282. es the remote commands for making basic ohms measure ments See Section 18 for more details on these commands Table 4 2 Remote commands for basic ohms measurements Command Description SENSe FUNCtion RESistance Select ohms function SENSe RESistance RANGe lt n gt Select ohms range n range SENSe RESistance MODE lt name gt Select ohms mode name MANual or AUTO SENSe RESistance 0COMpensated lt state gt Enable disable offset compensation state ON or OFF SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt Set voltage compliance n for manual ohms SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt Set current compliance n for manual ohms SOURce FUNCtion lt name gt Select source function name VOLTage or CURRent SYSTem RSENse lt state gt 2 wire 4 wire sensing state ON 4 wire OFF 2 wire OUTPut lt state gt Turn output on or off state ON or OFF READ Trigger and acquire reading 4 14 Ohms Measurements Ohms programming example 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 4 3 summarizes the command sequence for a typical auto ohms measure These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows ment Ohms mode and range auto 20kQ Offset compensation off Sense mode 4 wire Table 4 3 Auto ohms programming example Step Action Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults 1 Select function FUNC RES Select ohms measurement function 2 Select ohms mode RES MODE AUTO Auto
283. et lt n gt page 18 34 When disabled CALC2 will not include the null offset Read CALC2 DATA CALCulate2 DATA Read CALC2 Description This command is used to acquire all the readings used for the CALC2 limit tests Note that if null offset is enabled then the CALC2 readings will include the null offset value See Null feed reading page 18 34 At least one of the limit tests have to be enabled to acquire limit test readings See Configure and control limit tests page 18 35 and STATe lt b gt page 18 32 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 35 NOTE See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data LATest CALCulate2 DATA LATest Read latest CALC2 data Description This command works exactly like CALC2 DATA except it returns only the latest null offset or limit result Configure and control limit tests COMPliance FAIL lt name gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL lt name gt Parameters lt name gt IN Fail Limit 1 test when unit goes into compliance OUT Fail Limit 1 test when unit comes out of compliance Query FAIL Query when Limit 1 test failure occurs Description This command is used to specify the condition that will cause Limit 1 test to fail With IN specified the test will f
284. et V Compliance to a level that is higher than the external voltage level Failure to do so could damage the instrument due to excessive current that will flow into the SourceMeter NOTE The sink operating limits are shown in Section 6 Operating boundaries Battery charging discharging WARNING To prevent personal injury or damage to the SourceMeter do not attempt to charge non rechargeable batteries Some of the common batteries than can be charged with a SourceMeter are Nickel Cadmium Ni Cd Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH Lithium lon Li ion Rechargeable Alkaline Lead Acid If you are working with a battery type that is not listed here please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Applications Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only to obtain technical assistance WARNING Always follow the battery manufacturers requirements for charging or discharging batteries using a SourceMeter Failure to properly charge or discharge batteries may cause them to leak or explode resulting in personal injury and property dam age Over voltage and current protection should be provided in the charge circuit external to the SourceMeter when charging batteries without built in protection 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 23 Do not attempt to charge or discharge batteries exceeding the current or voltage requirements listed below Model 2400 2400 C 21V 1
285. etection occurs when the SOT line of the Digi tal I O port is pulsed high After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detection bypass T JSTEST Event detection occurs when the SOT line of the Dig ital I O port is pulsed either high or low After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detec tion bypass ARM OUT Use to configure the arm layer output trigger LINE Select the Trigger Link line for the output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF the arm layer output trig gers TRIG LAYER EXIT ON enables an output trigger on exiting the trigger layer while TL ENTER ON enables a trigger on entering the trigger layer COUNT Specify the arm count FINITE programmable count or INFINITE never ending count TRIG LAYER Use this menu item to configure the trigger layer of the trigger model TRIGGER IN Use to select the detection event for the trigger layer IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately TRIGGER LINK After selecting this trigger in source you will be prompted in sequence as follows 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 9 gt TRIG IN TLINK LINE Select the input line 1 2 3 or 4 for the Trigger Link EVENT DETECT BYPASS Set the bypass for the Source Event Detector With ONCE operation will loop around the So
286. eteees 10 12 Remote sweep operation 2 eccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennaeees 10 19 Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only cccecceeeeeeetteeeeeeenees 10 24 Front panel Pulse Mode sweep procedure 0 000 10 25 Remote Pulse Mode sweep operation 00eeee 10 26 11 Triggering Front panel trigger Operation eee cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaas 11 2 Front panel trigger model eceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeesteeeeeeeaas 11 2 Configuring triggering ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeeettaeeeeeees 11 7 Remote trigger Operation ceceecceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 11 10 Remote trigger model c cceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteieeeeeeetteeeeeeeee 11 10 Remote trigger COMMANAS eceeeeeeeteeeeeeettteeeeeteteeeeeees 11 18 TAGGET WAK ccccaseap ce vettavsees cosets cuetedenseeeedalis R 11 19 Input trigger requirements ee eeeeeee sent eeeeeeetteeeeeeeenaes 11 19 Output trigger specifications 0 0 eect ee eeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 11 20 Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 ceeeesseeeeeeetteeeeeeenees 11 20 Trigger models secresrenceincnisan 11 20 Invalid trigger settings 0 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeettaeeeeeeeaas 11 24 12 Limit Testing TYPOS OF WMS sosirea 12 2 Pass fail information wo ccc ccecccceeeceeeeeeseeeesesaueeseeaeeeeneeees 12 2 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data TOW assaia a N yaatavdeessione 12 3 L
287. eter User s Manual Status Structure 15 5 Programming and reading registers Programming enable registers The only registers that can be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status structure are read only registers The following explains how to ascertain the parameter values for the various commands used to program enable registers The actual commands are covered later in this section Table 15 3 and Table 15 6 A command to program an event enable register is sent with a parameter value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register An enable register can be programmed using any of the following data formats for the parameter value binary decimal hexadecimal or octal The bit positions of the register Figure 15 2 indicate the binary parameter value and decimal equivalent Figure 15 2 16 bit status register Bit Position Binary Value Decimal Weights A Bits 0 through 7 Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 Weights 225 224 223 222 222 229 B Bits 8 through 15 The lt NDN gt non decimal numeric parameter type is used to send non decimal values These values require a header B H or Q to identify the data format being sent The letter in the header can be upper or lower case The lt NRf gt numeric representation format parameter type is used to send decimal values and does not use a header T
288. events refer to the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle This is the Device Action in the Trigger Model See Figure 11 8 and Figure 11 9 With SOURce specified an output trigger occurs after the source is set With DELay speci fied an output trigger occurs after the delay period With MEASure specified an output trigger occurs after the measurement NOTE When disabling triggers the NONE parameter must be sent alone i e trig outp none If it is listed with any of the other event parameters NONE will be ignored Specifications A 2 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Accuracy calculations The information below discusses how to calculate accuracy for both sense and source functions Measure accuracy Measurement accuracy is calculated as follows Accuracy of reading offset As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measuring 10V on the 20V range You can compute the reading limit range from one year measure voltage accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy of reading offset 0 015 x 10V 1 5mV 1 5mV 1 5mV 3mV Thus the actual reading range is 10V 3mV or from 9 997 to 10 003V DC current measurement calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values Source accuracy Source accuracy is calculated similarly except source specifications are used As an ex
289. f state Normal Auto off Disabled Power on default No effect Pulse Mode 2430 only Pulse delay 0 0s Pulse width 0 20ms Ranging measure Auto range Enabled Rel Off Value 0 0 RS 232 No effect Sense mode 2 wire Source delay ims Auto delay Enabled Source shape 2430 only DC mode Speed Sweep Start Stop Step Sweep count Sweep Pts Source ranging Abort on compliance Normal 1 PLC Linear staircase OV or OA OV or OA OV or OA 1 2500 Best fixed Off 1 17 1 18 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 1 2 cont Factory default settings Voltage protection NONE Triggered source Control Disabled Scale factor 1 0 Triggering Arm layer Event Immediate Count Output trigger Line 2 Off Trigger layer Event Immediate Count Output triggers Line 2 All off Delay 0 0 sec Model 2410 default off state is guard For instruments with contact check option denoted by a C in model number Remote setups You can also save and recall setups via remote using the following SCPI com mands e Save and recall user setups using SAV and RCL Section 16 e Restore GPIB defaults using RST Section 16 e Restore bench defaults using SYSTem PRESet Section 18 e Save the power on configuration using SYSTem POSetup Section 18 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 19 Menus The following paragraphs discuss the main menu co
290. fERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA 250V PEAK Sey E fa PEAK 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT l ma CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI Note Jumper V Q GUARD and GUARD SENSE when not using during measurement Otherwise a contact check failure will occur Contact check threshold resistances There are three different threshold resistances available for contact check 2Q 159 and 50 The factory default is 509 These threshold values were chosen to ensure that contact failures would be detected reliably Table F 1 summarizes recommended threshold values based on the resistance of the device under test 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 5 A contact check pass condition occurs when the resistance of the device under test connection paths are less than the selected threshold resistance value Table F 1 Recommended contact resistance threshold values Nominal DUT Resistance Threshold 20 20 20Q 20 or 152 200 or higher 2Q 159 or 50Q Contact check failure indications There are several options to handle failure conditions detected by contact check Via trigger system The front panel display shows OPEN LEAD User defined bits can be set on the Digital I O port for LIMIT 4 one of the hardware limits in the Digital I O control scheme as controlled from the front panel or with CALCulate2 LIMit4 commands See Front panel con tact check operatio
291. for hexadecimal values Q Header for octal values Table 15 2 Data format commands for reading status registers Command Description Default FORMat SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status registers ASCii lt name gt ASCii Decimal format HEXadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 7 Status byte and service request SRQ Service request is controlled by two 8 bit registers the Status Byte Register and the Service Request Enable Register Figure 15 3 shows the structure of these registers Figure 15 3 Status byte and service request SRQ Status Summary M essage lt Read by Serial Poll D STB OSB e ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Status Byte Generation Serial Poll B7 N B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register a lt Read by STB TE E o F Service OSB __ ESB M AV Q SB EAV MSB Request B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Enable Register OSB O peration Summary Bit MSS Master Summary Status RQS Request for Service ESB Event Summary Bit Mav Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit amp Logical AND OR Logical OR SRE SRE 15 8 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status byte register The summary messages from the s
292. front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel ter minals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connec tion can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Performing a staircase sweep Step 1 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows 1 2 3 Select the desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values Press MEAS V or MEAS to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows 1 TRT N 7 Press CONFIG then SWEEP Select TYPE then press ENTER Select STAIR then press ENTER At the prompts enter the desired START STOP and STEP values From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 3 Set delay Set the source delay as follows 10 16 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or SOURCE depending on the selected source function 2 Select DELAY then press ENTER 3 Set the delay to the desired value then press ENTER 4 P
293. g CONFIG V MEAS and selecting SENSE MODE These settings are all interrelated Select 4 WIRE then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display Observe the display for an OPEN LEAD message when the contact check fails Using event detection with contact check 1 DaN Enable contact check as previously explained Press CONFIG then TRIG Select CONTACT CHECK then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER Set the contact check timeout then press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Using pass fail with contact check 1 NDAP N 10 11 12 13 14 15 Enable contact check as previously explained Press CONFIG then LIMIT Select DIGOUT then press ENTER Select SIZE then press ENTER Select fail pattern size 3 BIT or 4 BIT then press ENTER Select MODE then press ENTER Select the limit testing mode GRADING or SORTING then press ENTER a Grading After selecting GRADING select IMMEDIATE or END bin ning then press ENTER b Sorting After selecting SORTING you will be prompted to set the fail pattern for Limit 2 3 5 12 tests 0 7 for 3 bit or 0 to 15 for 4 bit then press ENTER This setting is only significant if performing Limit 2 3 5 12 tests see Section 12 for details Press EXIT select H W LIMITS then press ENTER Select LIMIT4 CCHk then press ENTER Select CONTROL then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER Select DIGIO
294. g keys to edit source and compliance values EDIT selects the source or compliance display field for editing A blinking cursor will appear in the field to be edited If no key is pressed within a few seconds the edit mode will be cancelled automatically EDIT arrow keys places the display cursor on the display digit to be changed SOURCE A or V increments or decrements the source or compliance value Note that pressing either of these keys will automatically enable the source edit mode RANGE A or V selects the source or compliance range Numeric keys 0 9 allow you to directly enter source or compliance val ues EXIT exits the edit mode without waiting for the time out period The basic procedure for editing source and compliance values is outlined below See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure for more details 1 2 Press the EDIT key until the blinking cursor is in either the source or com pliance display field to be edited If desired use the RANGE A or V key to select the desired source or com pliance range To simply increment or decrement the display value use the EDIT arrow keys to place the blinking cursor on the digit to be changed then increment or decrement the value with the SOURCE A or V keys Note that the source or compliance value will be updated immediately you need not press ENTER to complete the process To enter the source or compliance value directly simply key in
295. gain Re select the arm or trigger event Exit from the menu structure and then re enter it by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG 11 10 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 2 Trigger configuration menu tree CONFIG TRIG Remote trigger operation NOTE For the Model 2430 the following discussion on the remote triggering pertains explicitly to the DC Mode of operation The trigger model oper ates a little different for the Pulse Mode These differences are covered in Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 page 11 20 NOTE Forinstruments with the contact check option see Appendix F for details on trigger operation Remote trigger model The trigger model flowchart in Figure 11 3 summarizes remote trigger operation The flowchart is essentially the same as the one for front panel operation shown in Figure 11 1 except that remote commands to program the various trigger parameters are shown on this diagram Operation is controlled by SCPI com 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 11 mands from the Trigger Subsystem Key remote commands are included in the trigger model Also note that the GPIB defaults are denoted by the symbol The primary actions of the trigger model are Source Delay and Measure The source action outputs the programmed voltage or current value and the pro grammed delay provides a settling period for the source before the measurement is performed The
296. ge reads 0 then no options are present If the response message reads CONTACT CHECK then a Contact Check option is present RCL lt NRf gt Recall command Returns the SourceMeter to the user saved setup RST Reset command Returns the SourceMeter to the RST default conditions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup as the user saved setup SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable command Programs the Service Request Enable Register SRE Service request enable query Reads the Service Request Enable Register STB Status byte query Reads the Status Byte Register TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to the SourceMeter TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns the result WAI Wait to continue command Wait until all previous commands are executed 1 Status commands are covered in Section 15 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common Commands 16 3 Command reference IDN identification query Reads identification code The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC MODEL nnnn xxxxxxx yyyyy zzzzz a d Where nnnn is the model number XXXXXXxX is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision level of the digital board ROM and display board ROM including date and time of build a is the analog board revision level d is the di
297. gital board revision level OPC operation complete Sets OPC bit OPC operation complete query Places a 1 in output queue When OPC is sent the OPC bit in the Standard Event Register will set after all pending command operations are complete When OPC is sent an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue after all pending com mand operations are complete Typically either one of these commands is sent after the INITiate command The INITiate command is used to take the instrument out of idle in order to perform measurements While operating within the trigger model layers all sent com mands except DCL SDC IFC SYSTem PRESet RST RCL TRG GET and ABORt will not execute After all programmed operations are completed the instrument returns to the idle state at which time all pending commands including OPC and or OPC are executed After the last pending command is executed the OPC bit and or an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue SAV lt NRf gt save Save present setup in memory RCL lt NRf gt recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters 0 Memory location 0 1 Memory location 1 2 Memory location 2 3 Memory location 3 4 Memory location 4 16 4 Common Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Use the SAV command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command Th
298. gure 15 5 are described as follows Bit BO Calibrating Cal Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter is cali brating Bits B1 and B2 Not used Bit B3 Sweeping Swp Set bit indicates the instrument is performing a sweep operation Bit B4 Not used Bit B5 Waiting for Trigger Event Trig Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter is in the trigger layer waiting for a TLINK trigger event to occur Bit B6 Waiting for Arm Event Arm Set bit indicates that the SourceMe ter is in the arm layer waiting for an arm event to occur Bits B7 through B9 Not used Bit B10 Idle State Idle Set bit indicates the SourceMeter is in the idle state Bits B11 through B15 Not used 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 13 Figure 15 5 Operation event status stat oper cond stat oper To Operation Summary Bit O SB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 stat oper enab lt N Rf gt stat oper enab Idle _ Arm Trig Swp Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Idle Arm Trig Swp Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Idle Arm Trig Swp Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Operation Condition Register Operation Event Register O peration Ev
299. gure 6 19 In circuit ohms measurements using guard sense Test lead resistance SourceM eter GUARD Ohms mode IN OUT HI IN OUT LO A Local Guard Sense SourceM eter GUARD Ohms mode IN OUT HI IN OUT LO B Remote G uard Sense Data flow Data flow for front panel operation is summarized by the block diagrams provided in Figure 6 20 Note that if REL is enabled the result of the rel operation is sent to the other blocks NOTE See Appendix C for remote operation data flow information With Math FCTN and Limit Tests LIMITS disabled see Figure 6 20A the SourceMeter displays the measurement readings If the data store is used these readings are also stored in the buffer for later recall Statistical data for these readings is also available upon recall Figure 6 20B shows data flow when Math or Limit Tests is enabled If Math is enabled the result of the math operation is displayed If Limit Tests is enabled the raw reading along with the results of the tests pass or fail is displayed As in the previous case these readings can also be stored in the data store Figure 6 20C shows data flow when both Math and Limit Tests are enabled The Math operation is performed first and then limit tests are performed on that math result The result of the math operation and the result of the limit tests pass or fail are displayed As shown these readings can also be stored in the data store 2400
300. gure output triggers v ILINe lt n gt Select input trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 1 ILINe Query input trigger line OLINe lt n gt Select output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 2 OLINe Query output trigger line OUTPut lt name gt Output trigger TENTer TEXit or NONE NONE OUTPut Query arm output trigger status TRIGger Path to program Trigger Layer y CLEar Clear any pending input triggers immediately v SEQuence 1 v COUNt lt n gt Specify trigger count 1 to 2500 1 v COUNt Query trigger count v DELay lt n gt Specify trigger delay 0 to 999 9999 sec 0 v DELay Query source delay v SOURce lt name gt Specify control source IMMediate or TLINk IMMediate v SOURce Query control source v 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used This command is ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 25 Table 18 11 continued TRIGger command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure v DIRection lt name gt Enable SOURCce or disable ACCeptor v bypass DIRection Query state of bypass v ASYNchronous Configure output triggers v ILINe lt n gt Select input trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 1 ILINe Query input trigger line INPut lt event list gt Enable input event detectors SOURce NONE DELay SENSe or NONE INPut Query enabled input event detectors OLINe lt n gt
301. he Model 2430 Pulse Mode TCONtrol lt name gt SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type Parameters lt name gt REPeat Repeating filter MOVing Moving filter Query TCONtrol Query filter type Description This command is used to select the type of averaging filter REPeat or MOVing These filter types are explained in Section 7 Filters The number of readings that are averaged by the filter is set with the AVERage COUNt command The AVERage STATe command is used to enable or disable the filter NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is ignored COUNt lt n gt SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count Parameters lt n gt to 100 Specify filter count DEFault 10 MINimum 1 MAXimum 100 Query COUNt Query filter count COUNt DEFault Query the RST default filter count COUNt MINimum Query the lowest allowable filter count COUNt MAXimum Query the largest allowable filter count Description These commands are used to specify the filter count In general the filter count is the number of readings that are acquired and stored in the filter buffer for the averaging calculation The larger the filter count the more filtering that is performed NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 71 STATe lt b gt SENSe 1 AVERage STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter Parameters lt
302. he Trigger Model are set to one The Delay of the Trigger Model is set to zero e All math calculations are disabled Buffer operation is disabled e Autozero is enabled e The source output will turn on WARNING When CONFigure is sent the output will turn on Beware of hazardous voltage that may be present on the output termi nals NOTE This command is automatically asserted when the MEASure command is sent Acquiring readings FETCh Description This query command requests the latest post processed read ings stored in the sample buffer see Appendix C Data Flow After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk the readings are sent to the computer This command does not affect the instrument setup This command does not trigger source measure operations it simply requests the last available readings Note that this command can repeatedly return the same readings Until there are new readings this command continues to return the old readings For example assume that the SourceMeter performed 20 source measure operations The FETCh command will request the readings for those 20 source measure operations If FETCh is sent while performing source measure operations ARM annunciator on it will not be executed until the SourceMeter goes back into idle The readings that are acquired depend on which data elements are selected Section 18 Data elements and what the instrument is
303. he appropriate source V or for the math expression 2 Press CONFIG and then FCTN to display the math expression selections Place the cursor on the desired math expression and press ENTER e For 2 point math expressions you will be prompted to enter the two source values Press ENTER after entering each source value e For Percent Deviation you will be prompted to set the reference value The following methods are available e User specified reference value Enter the desired reference value and press ENTER e Acquire reference value With the output on press the AUTO range key The SourceMeter will perform a measurement and dis play that reading as the reference Press ENTER to select that ref erence value 3 Turn on the output by pressing the ON OFF key 4 Press the FCTN key to enable the selected math function The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the math expression will be dis played Note that with FCTN enabled the sweep for a 2 point math expression runs con tinuously Each sweep updates the reading The source value cannot be changed while the 2 point sweep is running However the range keys remain active 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative and Math 8 7 Remote math operations Math commands Table 8 3 summarizes commands to control the built in math functions See Section 18 Calculate subsystems for more detailed information on these and other math commands Table 8 3
304. he following examples show the proper parameter syntax for setting Bits B5 B3 and B2 15 6 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 6101100 Binary format lt NDN gt parameter type h2C Hexadecimal format lt NDN gt parameter type q54 Octal format lt NDN gt parameter type 44 Decimal format lt NRf gt parameter type Valid characters for the non decimal parameter values are shown as follows lt NDN gt format Valid characters Binary 1s and Os Hexadecimal 0 through 9 and A through F Octal 0 through 7 Reading registers Any register in the status structure can be read by using the appropriate query 7 command The following explains how to interpret the returned value response message The actual query commands are covered later in this section See Table 15 3 and Table 15 4 through Table 15 7 The response message will be a value that indicates which bits in the register are set That value if not already binary will have to be converted to its binary equiv alent For example for a binary value of 100101 bits B5 B2 and BO are set The returned value can be in the binary decimal hexadecimal or octal format The FORMat SREGister command is used to select the data format for the returned value Table 15 2 For non decimal formats one of the following headers will accompany the returned value to indicate which format is selected B Header for binary values H Header
305. he following fixed order VOLTage result CURRent result RESistance result When the TRACE buffer is feeding off CALC1 or CALC2 the selected statistic cal culation is performed on the selected feed Thus a single statistic result is acquired for each reading stored in the data store The CALCulate3 DATA command acquires the results of the selected calcula tion D IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction Basically the IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a computer When a computer is used on the bus it serves to supervise the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the control ler consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output information and as a listener a device will receive infor mation To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each one On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the con troller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen to the talker are addressed to listen by the controller Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlist
306. he user specifies the functions to measure See the resistance measurement accuracy specifi cations in Appendix A Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 4 1 Auto ohms default test currents 2400 2400 LV 2401 2420 2425 2430 and Auto ohms and 2410 2440 range default test current default test current 20 1A 20Q 100mA 100mA 200Q 10mA 10mA 2kQ 1mA 1mA 20kQ 100uA 100A 200kQ 10uA 10uA 2MQ 1uA 10uA 20MQ 1uA 1uA 200MQ 100nA Selecting ohms measurement method On power up auto ohms is the default method for the ohms function Perform the following steps to check and or change the ohms measurement method 1 Press CONFIG and then Qto display the ohms configuration menu 2 Using the EDIT keys place the cursor flashing menu item on SOURCE and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the presently selected ohms measurement method To retain this selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the measurement method place the cursor on the alternate selection AUTO or MANUAL and press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to exit from the menu structure Ohms measurement procedure Perform the following steps to perform auto ohms measurements NOTE The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already con nected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Meas
307. head Example Source Delay 0 NPLC Setting 0 08 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50usec 0 0 08 x 1 60 185usec 40usec 1 85msec for Source V 2 2msec for Source It IR 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 7 Case IV Auto Zero disabled and all measurements disabled Figure A 4 Case IV Timing Diagram Trigger Trigger Source Source Latency Delay Configuration Delay Source On Time Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 50usec max Firmware Overhead 310usec for Source V 590usec for Source Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay Firmware Overhead Example Source Delay 0 Source On Times 50usec 0 125usec 360usec for Source V 640usec for Source A 8 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Cases V and VI Measure one function Output Auto Off disabled and no source setting changes Figure A 5 Case V Timing Diagram A D A D A D Conversion Conversion Conversion signal phase ref phase ref zero phase Trigger Trigger Latency Delay Trigger Event Auto Zero Enabled Trigger Latency 500usec max Figure A 6 Case VI Timing Diagram A D Conversion signal phase Trigger Trigger Latency Delay Source On gt Trigger Event Auto Zero Disabled Trigger Latency 100usec max The source turns on as soon as the output i
308. heat sink to dissipate heat Also the Models 2410 2420 2430 and 2440 have a cooling fan The left side of the case is cut out to expose the black finned heat sink This heat sink gets hot and could be hot enough to cause burns Even if the instrument is turned off you should assume that the heat sink is still hot as it takes considerable time for it to cool off WARNING When handling the SourceMeter NEVER touch the heat sink located on the left side of the case This heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns NOTE See Section 1 Cooling fan for operation details on the cooling fan Excessive heat could damage the SourceMeter and at the very least degrade its performance The SourceMeter must be operated in an environment where the ambient temperature does not exceed 50 C CAUTION _ To prevent damaging heat build up and thus ensure specified performance adhere to the following precautions e Keep the heat sink free of dust dirt and contaminates since its ability to dissipate heat could become impaired e Keep the bottom cooling vents from becoming blocked NEVER remove the plastic feet and place the SourceMeter directly on a flat surface NEVER operate the SourceMeter when it is sitting on a conformable surface such as a carpet This could block the bottom cooling vents e Do not position any devices adjacent to the SourceMeter that force air heated or unheated into or onto its surfaces or cool ing vents This addi
309. hen press ENTER Choose SOURCE MEMORY then press ENTER Select RESTORE then press ENTER Select the source memory location to restore 1 100 then press ENTER Oh O N Saving multiple source memory sweeps If desired you can save multiple source memory sweeps in the 100 memory loca tions For example you could save setups in locations 1 through 4 for one sweep and other setups in any other range of memory locations such as locations 50 through 58 To select which sweep to execute simply select two settings 1 the sweep start location and 2 the number of sweep points See Performing a source memory sweep later in this section Saved source memory configurations Table 10 2 summarizes the configurations that are saved at each source memory location along with the equivalent remote command See Section 18 for more details on these remote commands The SCPI command reference tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 also list source memory parameters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 9 Table 10 2 Source memory saved configurations Mode Remote command Current integration rate SENSe 1 CURRent NPLCycles Resistance integration rate SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles Voltage integration rate SENSe 1 VOLTage NPLCycles Concurrent functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion C ONCurrent Enable functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON Disable functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF Manual auto ohms SENSe 1 RESistance MODE Offset c
310. highly stable DC power supply with a low noise highly repeatable high impedance multimeter It has 0 012 basic accuracy with 5Hdigit resolution At 5Hdigits the SourceMeter delivers 520 readings second over the IEEE 488 bus At 4Hdigits it can read up to 2000 read ings second into its internal buffer See Appendix A for specifications Some additional capabilities of the SourceMeter include Concurrent measurements of all three functions over the remote interface Source measure sweep capabilities linear and logarithmic staircase sweeps source sweep list of up to 2500 points memory sweep of up to 100 instrument setups 6 wire Q measurement with programmable I source or V source with V or clamp 4 quadrant source and sink operation Up to 12 stages of limit testing with a built in comparator for pass fail test ing Digital I O for stand alone binning operations or interface to component handler Programming language and remote interfaces The SourceMeter uses the SCPI programming language and two remote interface ports IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232C Trigger Link interface to Keithley Series 7000 switching hardware Math expressions Five built in up to five user defined bus only Reading and setup storage Up to 2500 readings and seven setups five user defaults factory default RST default can be stored and recalled Closed cover calibration The instrument can be calibrated either from the front panel or re
311. hortening the output off time Note however that zero drift will eventually result in inaccurate readings For the DC Mode the filtering process is part of the Measure Action In the Pulse Mode filtering is not used 11 24 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output triggers All three output triggers are available in the trigger layer for the Pulse Mode If enabled the output triggers occur where indicated in the trigger model Invalid trigger settings Front panel operation For front panel operation most trigger settings are done from the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG For Pulse Mode operation the following settings for the TRIG LAYER are ignored DELAY Trigger delay is not used Therefore the trigger DELAY setting is ignored TRIGGER OUT EVENTS For the DC Mode source delay is set from the source configuration menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then SOURCE V or When the Pulse Mode is selected the source delay menu items DELAY and AUTO DELAY are replaced by the pulse DELAY and PULSE WIDTH menu items Remote operation The following commands are not valid in the Pulse Mode and are therefore ignored TRIGger DELay Trigger delay is not used in the Pulse Mode SOURce DELay and SOURce DELay AUTO Source delay is not used in the Pulse Mode 12 Limit Testing e Types of limits Discusses the three types of limit
312. hrough the Trigger Link End binning control is required for this test system therefore the grading mode must be used Figure 12 8 Binning system multiple element devices Switching Mainframe Handler Trigger O Link Scanner Card Multi Element 5 Device Package O In Out O HI LO Trigger Dig o Link 1 0 SourceM eter Trigger layer configured to output trigger pulse after each measurement Digital output clear pattern After every binning operation the digital output needs to be reset to a clear pat tern which serves as a no action condition for the component handler The SourceMeter can be programmed to automatically clear the digital output after the pass or fail pattern is sent With auto clear enabled you can specify the required pulse width delay for the pass or fail pattern The default auto clear pulse width is 10us When not using auto clear you must return the digital output to its clear pattern from the DIGOUT AUTO CLEAR option of the CONFIG LIMIT menu This option also sets the pass fail pattern and pulse width 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 15 Enabling auto clear To enable auto clear Press CONFIG then LIMIT Select DIGOUT then press ENTER Choose AUTO CLEAR then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER At the prompts set the auto clear pulse width Os to 60s and clear bit pat tern 0 to 15 4 bit 0 to 7 3 bit size Use EXIT to return to normal
313. i Trigger Link CONV Filter Process vA Repeat M easure CONV Event Detector Bench Default Output Trigger MEASURE Action CONV Reading Conversion Trigger O ut Event Soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after initial sweep trigger if the unit is in the MULTIPLE mode See Section 7 Autorange change mode 11 4 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Arm layer Event Detector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 1 there is a bypass for the Arm Event Detector This bypass can only be used if TLINK or STEST is the selected Arm In Event The bypass serves to jump start operation With the event detec tor bypass set to ONCE operation will loop around the Arm Event Detector when the output is turned ON The programmable arm in events for the Arm Layer are described as follows IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to con tinue GPIB Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMER With the Timer selected event detection occurs immediately when the output is turned ON On repeated passes via Another Arm Yes event detec tion occurs when the programmed timer interval expires If operation takes the Another Arm No route the Timer resets allowing event detection to again occur immediately MANUAL Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is presse
314. iate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional command words in your program do not include the brackets Parameter types The following are some of the more common parameter types lt b gt Boolean Used to enable or disable an instrument operation 0 or OFF disables the operation and 1 or ON enables the operation Example CALCulate1 STATe ONEnable Calc 1 math expression lt name gt Name parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group Example lt name gt NEVer NEXt TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXt lt NRf gt Numeric representation format This parameter is a number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an exponent 2 3E6 Example SYSTem KEY 11Press EXIT key from over the bus 14 8 Remote Operations lt n gt lt numiist gt lt NDN gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Numeric value A numeric value parameter can consist of an NRf number or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum MAXimum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the lowest allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value Ex amples ARM TIMer 0 1Sets timer to 100 msec ARM TIMer DEFaultSets timer to 0 1 sec ARM TIMer MINimumSets t
315. ical set up for controlled operation is shown in Figure D 1 Generally a sys tem will contain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators con troller talker and listener The controller does what its name implies it controls the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instrument any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener There are two categories of controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control from one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although several devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen command These talk and listen commands are derived from an instrument s pri mary address The primary address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set b
316. igger model configuration When using the SOT line the handler will not pulse the line while it is in a not ready condition When the handler is ready DUT properly positioned in the han dler it pulses the SOT line low or high to start the test OE line The OE output enable line of the Digital I O can be used if the component han dler is equipped with a switch With proper use power is removed from the DUT 12 12 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual when the lid of the handler is opened to eliminate a possible shock hazard See Section 13 Digital I O port and Output enable line for operation details on the output enable line Handler types The SourceMeter can be used with either of the two basic types of handlers When used with a Category Pulse Handler the SourceMeter pulses one of the four handler lines The handler then places the DUT into the bin assigned to the pulsed line When used with a Category Register Handler the SourceMeter outputs a bit pat tern to three handler lines After the SourceMeter sends the end of test EOT strobe pulse to the fourth handler line the handler places the DUT into the bin assigned to that bit pattern Category pulse component handler When using this type of handler the SourceMeter pulses one of the four handler lines when a pass or fail condition occurs The handler then places the DUT in the bin assigned to that pulsed line When interfacing to th
317. igger Layer and enters back into the Arm Layer This output trigger is typically sent to another instrument to signal the end of a scan or sweep The ARM OUTPut command is used to control these output triggers The TENTer parameter enables the trigger on entering the Trigger Layer the TEXit parameter enables the trigger on exiting the Trigger Layer and the NONE parameter disables both output triggers GPIB defaults The GPIB defaults are listed as follows They are also denoted in Figure 11 3 by the symbol Arm in Event Immediate Trigger In Source Immediate e Arm Count 1 Trigger Count 1 Trigger Delay 0 0 sec e Delay Action 0 001 sec Enabled event detector Source Event Detector Delay and Measure detection disabled Enabled output triggers None Event detection bypasses Acceptor both layers 11 18 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual With output turned ON OUTPut ON the SourceMeter will perform one SDM cycle when the INITiate command is sent After the measurement the SourceMe ter returns to the idle state Remote trigger commands Table 11 1 summarizes remote trigger commands These commands are covered in more detail in Section 18 except for TRG a common command covered in Section 16 Table 11 1 Remote trigger commands Command Description INITiate Take SourceMeter out of idle state ABORt Abort operation return to idle ARM COUNt l
318. ill be output If no Limit 2 3 or 5 12 passes their failure pattern will be output When SORTING is selected the Digital I O bit pattern can also be set 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit AUTO CLEAR Use this menu item to ENABLE or DISABLE auto clear for the digital output After enabling auto clear you will be prompted to set the pass fail pattern pulse width delay 0 to 60 00000sec You will then be prompted to set the digital output clear pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit H W LIMITS Use this menu item to control and set the fail mode for the Limit 1 Compliance test NOTE CONTROL Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the test FAIL MODE Use to select the fail mode for Limit 1 test With IN selected the test will fail when the SourceMeter is in compliance With OUT selected the test will fail when not in compliance Also use to specify the digital output bit pattern for Limit 1 IN or OUT test failure 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit If the contact check option is installed the H W LIMITS selection will also set options for the Contact Check Test Limit 4 See Appendix F for contact check details S W LIMITS Use this menu item to control set limits for and define out put bit patterns for LIM2 LIM3 and LIM5 through LIM12 tests CONTROL Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the test LOLIM Use to set the low limit and for the grading mode specify the fail bit pattern 0 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit HILIM
319. ime For example assume the pulse width setting is 1msec and the signal measure ment time is 167usec For the 80usec overhead time the pulse width delay is 753usec 5 6 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Width Delay 1msec 167usec 80sec 753yusec NOTE Ifthe result of the pulse width delay calculation is a negative number pulse width delay is set to Osec A negative number indicates that the pulse width setting is too short not achievable Output off time Reference and zero measurements As previously explained in Pulse width Signal measurement the reference and zero measurements for a pulse reading are performed during the output off time of the pulse period Figure 5 2 The time to perform these two measure ments depends on the speed setting NPLC of the SourceMeter and the power line frequency Meas Ref amp Zero 2 x NPLC Line Frequency Where Meas Ref amp Zero is the time it takes to measure the reference and zero NPLC is the present speed setting 0 004 to 0 1 PLC Line Frequency is the frequency of the power line 50 or 60 Hz Overhead time As shown in Figure 5 2 there is some overhead time that is inherent to the source measure process The 2 9msec is the minimum overhead time for a source measure cycle that can be achieved during the output off time The mini mum output off time may vary depending on instrument settings see Table 5
320. imer to 1 msec ARM TIMer MAXimumSets timer to 99999 99 sec Numlist Specify one or more numbers for a list Example STATus QUEue ENABle 110 222 Enable errors 110 through 222 Non decimal numeric This parameter is used to send values in the binary octal or hexadecimal format The prefix designates the format type BXX x B specifies the binary format xx X is the binary number using Os and 1s QXX X Q specifies the octal format xx X is the octal number values 0 through 7 Hxx X H specifies the hexadecimal format xx X is the hexadecimal number values 0 through 9 and A through F Examples to send the decimal value 36 in the non decimal for mats ESE b100100Binary format ESE q44 Octal format ESE h24 Hexadecimal format Angle brackets lt gt Angle brackets lt gt are used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the program message For exam ple OUTPut lt b gt The lt b gt indicates a Boolean type parameter is required There fore to enable the selected source you must send the command with the ON or 1 parameter as follows OUTPut ON OUTPut 1 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 9 Query commands This type of command requests queries the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the com mand Most commands have a query form AR
321. imit 1 test compliance ooo eee cette eeeeeeteeeeeeeetaeeeeetenaaes 12 3 Limit 2 limit 3 and limit 5 12 tests 2 0 cee ceceeeaeeseeeeeeee es 12 3 LIMITA psies nine enoa a abeseesed O ene 12 3 Limit tosi MOES serasi aiaa ces taneds 12 3 BITING roin aaa aaa 12 4 Operation Overview essssssssenseesstestettrtnrtnnstesrterttnnnrnnnnnenneent ent 12 4 Grading Mode esoe aean ee Bede RAO 12 4 SONNA MOUS issau a vewbacdecevanes 12 7 Binoning Stems senon a ROR 12 10 Handler interlace 2 i d2adecasnid die ssaetdele tented LAA 12 10 Handler types sessen ea aaee ei naecediasiyceee tii tyegcateday 12 12 Basic DINNING systems ssssisssreriiiiiirrerniiiiirnraniidndan danian nnn 12 13 Digital output clear pattern c cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteees 12 14 Configuring and performing limit tests 000 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 16 Configuring limit teStS scs iirnii essien ana 12 16 Performing front panel limit tests 0 0 eee ee eee 12 19 Remote limit testing sescreserosra ees A 12 20 Limit commands seisd a aa 12 20 13 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration Digital I O port 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeaas 13 2 Port configuration secccrrccsenincencananea 13 2 Digital output configuration eessseeeeeeseeeereeeeerresseeerrssreenn 13 3 Controlling digital output lines s 13 4 Output enable line ecccceecceececeeeeee eee teeeeececaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 13 6 F
322. in Guard Output lead Earth chassis ground screw WARNING INPUT OUTPUT LO is not internally connected to the chassis and cannot be allowed to float more than the values shown in Figure 2 1 in Section 2 above chassis ground Output enable and digital input output port OUTPUT ENABLEConnector for digital output lines output enable and component handler signals Power module Contains the AC line receptacle and the power line fuse Trigger link connector TRIGGER LINK 8 pin micro DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses Use a trigger link cable or adapter such as Models 8501 1 8501 2 8502 8504 RS 232 connector RS 232 Connector for RS 232 remote operation Use a straight through not null modem DB 9 cable GPIB connector IEEE 488 Connector for GPIB remote operation Use a shielded cable Model INTERFACE 7007 1 or 7007 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 9 Power up During the power up voltage spikes may appear on the terminals of the SourceM eter T hese voltage spikes could be at hazardous levels 42 4V peak and could damage sensitive D UT s N ever touch external circuitry or the test leads when powering up the SourceM eter It is good practice to always disconnect D UT s from the SourceM eter before pow ering up the unit To prevent electric shock test connections must be configured such that the user cannot come in contact with conductors or any DUT that is in con
323. inator CR CR LF LF or LF CR FLOW CTRL Select flow control NONE or XON XOFF CAL Calibrate SourceMeter See Service Manual UNLOCK Unlock calibration EXECUTE Execute calibration steps VIEW DATES Display cal dates and count SAVE Save calibration constants LOCK Lock calibration CHANGE PASSWORD TEST DISPLAY TESTS KEYS DISPLAY PATTERNS CHAR SET Change calibration password Perform tests on SourceMeter Test front panel keys and display digits Test front panel keys Test display pixels and annunciators Test special display characters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 21 Table 1 3 cont Main menu Menu item Description Parameters A D CTRL Control auto zero line frequency NPLC caching AUTO ZERO Control auto zero DISABLE Disable auto zero ENABLE Enable auto zero ONCE Force auto zero immediate update LINE FREQ Set line frequency 50 or 60Hz or NPLC CACHE Control NPLC caching AUTO DISABLE Disable NPLC caching ENABLE Enable NPLC caching REFRESH Update all NPLC values in cache immediately RESET Clear NPLC cache of all NPLC values GENERAL Select general operations DIGOUT Set Digital I O port bit pattern 0 158 SERIAL Display serial number firmware revision SCPI YES or NO version TIMESTAMP Reset timestamp FAN 2420 2425 2430 and Set fan speed control ALWAYS fan runs at the ALWAYS or 2440 same speed with the output on or off OUTPUT OUTPUT ON ON
324. ine or EXPRession com mand The new expression is the one that will be presently selected Math expression errors 801 Insufficient vector data Returned to idle before acquiring enough data to fully populate the vector A CALC1 result is not built 804 Expression list full Attempted to create a new expression name when the list catalog is full The maximum number of user defined expression names is five 805 Undefined expression exists Attempted to create a new expres sion name while a previous expression name remains undefined Remember after creating a name you have to define the expres sion 806 Expression not found Attempted to delete a named math expression that cannot be found 807 Definition not allowed Attempted to define an expression that has not been previously named 808 Expression cannot be deleted Attempted to delete one of the built in math expressions See DELete SELected lt name gt page 18 28 809 Source memory location revised Occurs when a SOURce MEMory sweep location references an expression that no longer exists 811 Not an operator or number Defined a null math expression by not using a valid operator or number 812 Mismatched parenthesis Number of open parentheses must be the same as the number of closed parentheses For example CALC1 MATH EXPR 2 sin VOLT generates this error 813 Not a
325. inei iniia iaaiiai aid 3 6 Setting the compliance limit aeessseeeeessseesssrrsssesrnnesessnnasseennne 3 8 Basic circuit configurations issesssiticiisnisinicernnesiiid nnee 3 9 Operation considerations ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaaa 3 10 WaT MUD aiis daiane aa a aa aa a aa 3 10 AUTO ZETO adnia E E a AGN 3 10 NPEG CACHING perirono oa edeues aoeeet ee smdetenads 3 11 V source protection c cccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeneeaeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 12 Source delay sajcciscciis fiedaceis deugcdevd duvedds chs R 3 13 Basic source measure procedure ccceccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeettenteeaeeees 3 15 Front panel source measure procedure 2 0 0eseeeeees 3 15 Remote command source measure procedure 0 00 3 18 Measure Only a iiceescccendetenceveiidovacediion destaasueeensta ened enadeessi aes 3 20 Front panel Measure only cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeenaaes 3 20 Remote command measure only cececeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeenaees 3 21 SINK OPSTAO sarcina ianiai adaa a aa a 3 22 Battery charging discharging cscceeeeeeteeeeeeeettteeeeeeeaes 3 22 Sink programming example 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 3 24 4 Ohms Measurements Ohms configuration MENU cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 4 2 Ohms measurement methods ceseeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseees 4 3 Selecting ohms measurement method 4 4 Ohms measuremen
326. ing 0 Character is not blinking For example assume the following menu is displayed with the SAVESETUP option blinking MAIN MENU SAVESETUP COMMUNICATION CAL gt The response message for DISP ATTR top display will result in 20 zeroes as follows O0O000000000000000000 The response message for DISP WIND2 ATTR bottom display will display ones at the character positions for SAVESETUP as fol lows 11111111100000000000000000000000 Return to source measure display state This action command is used to return the instrument to the source measure display state source measure and compliance readings displayed For example if a menu structure is presently being displayed this command will exit the menu and return to the source measure display state 18 46 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Read display DATA DISPlay WINDow 1 DATA Read top display DISPlay WINDow2 DATA Read bottom display Description These query commands are used to read what is currently being dis played on the top and bottom displays After sending one of these commands and addressing the SourceMeter to talk the displayed data message or reading will be sent to the computer Define TEXT messages DATA lt a gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message top display DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message bottom display Parameters lt a gt ASCII characters for message Types St
327. ing For the sorting mode only immediate binning can be performed After the testing process is finished FAIL or PASS displayed the appropriate output bit pattern will be sent to the component handler which will place the DUT in the assigned bin The pass fail condition can also be queried via remote with CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing Figure 12 5 Sorting mode limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Wait for SOT Pulse from Handler Perform Source Measure Action Perform Limit 2 Test 2 Output Limit 2 Pass Pattern Perform Limit 3 5 12 Tests 2 Display FAIL Output Fail Pattern Test Another Device 2 Display Output Limit 3 PASS 5 12 Pass Pattern No Yes Note Limit 4 contact option not shown see Appendix F No Press LIMIT 12 9 12 10 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Binning systems NOTE The Model 2401 does not have handler interface Therefore it cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations The SourceMeter can be used with a component handler to perform binning oper ations on DUT packages With this system you can test single element devices i e resistor Adding a scanner to the system allows binning operations on multi ple element DUT packages See Multiple element device binning Handler interface The SourceMeter is i
328. ing 1 or not blinking 0 DIGits lt n gt Specify display resolution 4 to 7 6 DIGits Query display resolution Notes 1 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the display circuitry Pressing LOCAL or cycling power enables ON the display circuit 2 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on a user defined message Pressing LOCAL or cycling power cancels all user defined messages 3 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the state of the message mode Pressing LOCAL or cycling power dis ables OFF the message mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 9 Table 18 3 FORMat command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI FORMat SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status event registers ASCii y ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BINary SREGister Query format for reading status event registers DATA lt type gt lt length gt Specify data format ASCii REAL 32 or SREal ASCii y DATA Query data format y BORDer lt name gt Specify byte order NORMal or SWAPped Note v BORDer Query byte order v ELEMents SENSe 1 lt item list gt Specify data elements VOLTage CURRent All RESistance TIME and STATus SENSe 1 Query data format elements CALCulate lt item list gt Specify CALC data elements CALC TIME or CALC STATus CALCulate Query CALC data elements SOURce2 lt name gt S
329. ing connections to the DUT including 4 wire remote sensing 2 wire local sensing cable and ohms guard as well as sense and guard selections 2 2 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connection overview WARNING To prevent electric shock test connections must be configured such that the user cannot come in contact with conductors or any DUT that is in contact with the conductors Safe installa tion requires proper shields barriers and grounding to pre vent contact with conductors Operator protection and safety are the responsibility of the person installing the product During power up voltage spikes may appear on the terminals of the SourceMeter These voltage spikes could be at hazard ous levels 42 4V peak and could damage sensitive DUTs Never touch external circuitry or the test leads when powering up the SourceMeter It is good practice to always disconnect DUTs from the SourceMeter before powering up the SourceMe ter Hazardous voltages may be present on the output and guard terminals To prevent electrical shock that could cause injury or death NEVER make or break connections to the SourceMe ter while the unit is on Power off the equipment from the front panel or disconnect the main power cord from the rear of the SourceMeter before handling cables connected to the outputs Putting the equipment into standby mode does not guarantee the outputs are not powered if a hardware or software fault occur
330. input and output see ILINe lt NRf gt should not share the same line OUTPut lt event list gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 T CONfigure OUTPut lt event list gt Arm layer events TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure OUTPut lt event list gt Trigger layer events Parameters Arm Layer Triggers lt event list gt TENTer Trigger on entering trigger layer TEXit Trigger on exiting trigger layer NONE Disable arm layer output trigger Trigger Layer Triggers lt event list gt SOURce Output trigger after source level is set DELay Output trigger after delay period SENSe Output Trigger after measurement NONE Disable trigger layer triggers 18 122 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE Each event in the list must be separated by a comma i e arm output source delay sense Query Description OUTPut Query output trigger event s This command is used to specify when trigger pulses occur on the specified output trigger line of the Trigger Link see OLINe lt NRf gt page 18 121 Arm Layer Triggers With TEXit selected an output trigger will occur when exiting the trigger layer With TENTer selected an output trigger will occur when entering the trigger layer With NONE selected the arm layer output trigger is disabled Trigger Layer Triggers You can specify from one to all three events Each event in the list must be separated by a comma The SOURce DELay and MEASure
331. input commands using the ASCII format ASCII format The ASCII data format is in a direct readable form for the operator Most BASIC languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats However some speed is compromised to accom modate the conversion Figure 18 1 shows an example ASCII string that includes all the data elements See ELEMents lt item list gt page 18 49 18 48 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 18 1 Figure 18 1 also shows the byte order of the data string Data ele ments not specified by the ELEMents command are simply not included in the string Keep in mind that the byte order can only be reversed for the binary format See BORDer lt name gt page 18 54 command ASCII data format 1 000206E 00 1 000000E 04 1 000236E 04 7 282600E 01 4 813200E 04 Voltage Reading Figure 18 2 I Current Resistance Time Status Reading Reading IEEE 754 single precision format REAL 32 or SREal will select the binary IEEE 754 single precision data format Figure 18 2 shows the normal byte order format for each data element For example if three valid elements are specified the data string for each reading conversion is made up of three 4 byte data blocks Note that the data string for each reading conversion is preceded by a 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 Figure 18 2 does not show the byte for the termi
332. ion This allows multiple test cycles to be performed on DUT With the use of a scanner card multi element devices i e resistor network can be tested If for example you did not use END and the first element in the device package passed the pass bit pattern will be output The testing process will stop and the DUT will be binned As a consequence the other elements in the device package are not tested MODE lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE lt name gt Control Digital I O port pass fail output Parameters lt name gt GRADing Output graded pass fail pattern SORTing Output sorted pass fail pattern Query MODE Query Digital I O pass fail mode Description This command controls how limit calculations drive the Digital I O lines In GRADing mode a reading passes if it is within all of the hi low limit tolerances enabled assuming that it has passed the LIMIT 4 contact check contact check option only and LIMIT 1 compliance tests first The Digital I O lines will be driven with the first pattern of 18 42 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual the first contact check optional compliance hi or low failure Oth erwise the CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 pattern will be output In SORTing mode a reading will fail if it fails the contact check test the compliance test or is not within any of the Digital I O Bands If the tests pass and only LIMIT 1 or 4 is enabled CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 pattern will be output
333. ion Triggering is maintained for other instruments or components in the test system End binning For end binning the fail pattern for the first failure is stored in memory and operation proceeds to Another Test Cycle decision block If pro grammed to perform additional tests i e sweep on the DUT package operation loops back up to perform the next source measure action After all programmed test cycles are completed the SourceMeter outputs the fail pattern stored in memory on the Digital I O port This reflects the first failure that occurred in the testing process for the device package The component handler places the DUT in the appropriate bin If configured to test another DUT package operation loops back to the top of the flowchart and waits for the start of test SOT pulse from the component handler Sorting mode Sorting mode limits operation is detailed by the flowchart in Figure 12 5 A test is only performed if it is enabled If disabled operation proceeds to the next test The following assumes the digital output of the SourceMeter is connected to a compo nent handler for DUT binning See Binning systems page 12 10 12 8 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE The Model 2401 does not have a handler interface Therefore it cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations NOTE _ If using the contact check option see flowchart Figure F 4 in Appendix F Binn
334. ion gt Parameters lt function gt CURRent DC Amps function VOLTage DC Volts function RESistanceOhms function Description This command combines other signal oriented measurement commands to perform a one shot measurement and acquire the reading Note that if a function is not specified the measurement will be done on the function that is presently selected When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented e CONFigure lt function gt e READ When CONFigure is executed the instrument goes into a one shot measurement mode See CONFigure for more details When READ is executed its operations will then be performed In general another ABORt is performed then an INITiate and finally a FETCh to acquire the readings See READ for more details When MEASure is sent the source turns on and a single measurement is performed If auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON then the output will turn off after the measurement is completed If auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF then the output will remain on after the measurement is completed WARNING With auto output off disabled the output will remain on after the one shot source measure operation is performed Beware of hazardous voltage that may be present on the output termi nals 18 SCPI Command Reference e Reference tables Summarizes each SCPI command subsystem
335. is operating within the trigger model ARM annunciator on With the OUTPUT enabled pressing the ON OFF key will disable the OUTPUT and disable auto output off NOTE Enabling auto output off with auto zero turned off may result in readings that are not fully settled because the source may not have settled when the A D signal phase measurement is taken Turning auto zero on may improve the readings because it adds a 450us delay after the output is turned on but before the A D measurement is taken If the readings have not settled it will be necessary to increase the source delay 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 13 9 Figure 13 5 Output configuration menu tree CONFIG ON OFF OUTPUT OFF STATE HIGH IMPEDANCE ZERO AUTO OFF DISABLE EN ABLE ENABLE DISABLE EN ABLE GUARD Output off states NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode output off is always set to NORMAL HIGH IMPEDANCE With this output off state the output relay opens when the OUTPUT is turned OFF This disconnects external circuitry from the input output of the SourceMeter To prevent excessive wear on the output relay do not use this output off state for tests that turn the output off and on frequently such as the Output Auto Off mode Note that there is a 15msec settling time for the relay when the output is turned on NORMAL When in this relatively high imped
336. is type of handler a maxi mum of four component handler bins are supported If the handler requires low going pulses then the four digital output lines of the Source Meter must be initially set to high This initial HI HI HI HI clear pattern on the output lines represents a no action condition for the handler since it is waiting for one of the lines to go low A line goes low when the defined fail or pass pattern sets it low For example if you want a particular test failure to pulse line 4 of the handler the defined fail pattern has to be HI HI HI LO When the failure occurs line 4 will be pulled low and the DUT will be placed in the bin assigned to that pulsed line If the handler requires a high going pulse the four digital output lines of the SourceMeter must initially be set low The LO LO LO LO clear pattern repre sents the no action condition for the handler When one of those lines are pulled high by a defined pass or fail bit pattern i e LO LO LO HI the DUT will be placed in the bit assigned to that pulsed line Category register component handler When using this type of handler the SourceMeter sends a bit pattern to three han dler lines when a pass or fail condition occurs This bit pattern determines the bin assignment for the DUT With the pass fail pattern on the output line 4 is then pulsed This end of test EOT pulse latches the bit pattern into the register of the handler which places the DUT in th
337. is used to return the SourceMeter to the setup stored at the specified memory location Set scaling factor TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt Set current scaling factor SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt Set voltage scaling factor Parameters lt n gt 999 9999e 18 to 999 9999e 18 Scaling factor Query SFACtor Query scaling factor 18 96 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Description SFAC instructs the SourceMeter to source the scaling factor times the previous source memory location value For example if 10 0V is stored in the first source memory Source Measure V Mode and the unit is in the Source V Measure mode with SFAC set to 0 1 and enabled the unit will output 1 0V for the second source memory location NOTE These commands work only with source memory sweeps TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt Enable disable current scaling SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt Enable disable voltage scaling Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable scaling 0 or OFF Disable scaling Query SFACtor STATe Query enabled disabled scaling state Description SFAC STAT enables or disables scaling NOTE These commands work only with source memory sweeps Soak time SOAK lt NRf gt SOURCce 1 SOAK lt NRf gt Set multiple mode soak time Parameters lt NRf
338. ist for the INPut command For example to enable the Source Event Detector and Measure Event Detector send the following command TRIGger INPut SOURce SENSe 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 121 The Delay Event Detector will be disabled since the DELay parame ter is not included in the above event list NOTE To disable all the Trigger Layer event detectors the NONE parameter must be sent alone i e trigger input none If it is listed with any of the other parameters NONE will be ignored ILINe lt NRf gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure ILINe lt NRf gt Select input line arm layer TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure ILINe lt NRf gt Select input line trigger layer Parameters lt NRf gt 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Line 3 4 Line 4 Query ILINe Query input trigger line Description This command is used to select input lines for the Trigger Link For normal operation Trigger Link input and output see OLINe lt NRf gt should not share the same line OLINe lt NRf gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure OLINe lt NRf gt Select output line arm layer TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure OLINe lt NRf gt Select output line trigger layer Parameters lt NRf gt 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Line 3 4 Line 4 Query OLINe Query output trigger line Description This command is used to select output lines for the Trigger Link For normal operation Trigger Link
339. ist of NPLC values Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable NPLC caching 0 or OFF Disable NPLC caching Query STATe Query state of NPLC caching NPLCycles Return list of NPLC values stored in cache from oldest to newest Description NPLC caching speeds up source memory sweeps by caching A D reference and zero values When SYST AZER CACH is enabled the A D reference and zero values will be saved for up to the 10 most recent SENSe 1 VOLTage DC NPLCycles SENSe 1 CUR Rent DC NPLCycles or SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles set tings Whenever the integration rate is changed via an NPLC 18 108 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual command user setup recall RCL or a source memory recall SOUR MEM command or during a source memory sweep NPLC caching will occur If the integration rate is already stored in the cache the stored reference and zero values are recalled and used Otherwise a reference and zero value are acquired and stored in the cache If there are already 10 NPLC values stored the oldest one will be overwritten by the newest one Follow these general steps to program and use NPLC caching 1 Send this command to disable auto zero SYST AZER OFF 2 Enable NPLC caching by sending SYST AZER CACH ON 3 Setup and run your source memory sweep with the SOUR MEM commands along with the various other commands required to program additional operating modes See Config ure
340. it4 test Enables or disables contact check If there is an open lead the limit test fails LIMit4 is performed before all other limit tests STATe Query contact check pass fail state Pattern to be placed on the 1 O lines if Limit4 test fails lt NRf gt CALCulate2 0 to 7 for 3 bit or 0 to 15 for 4 bit Query I O pattern for Limit4 test failure LIMIT4 SOURce2 lt NRf gt Query if contact check failed 1 fail SOURce2 FAIL FORMat ELEMents CALCulate STATus Specify the STATus data element Bit 18 262144 of the status word returned by READ FETCh MEASure MEASure VOLTage MEASure CUR Rent MEASure RESistance TRACe DATA CALCulatel DATA or CALCulate2 DATA signifies the status of contact check 1 open lead 0 OK If LIMIT 4 is enabled then pass fail status for that limit is also returned 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 15 Table F 3 cont Contact check remote commands Command Description SYSTem RSENse ON Enable 4 wire remote sense for contact check SYSTem RSENse Query sense selection SYSTem CCHeck ON OFF Enable disable contact checking SYSTem CCHeck Query state of contact check test SYSTem CCHEck RESistance lt NRf gt Select threshold resistance 0 to 60 lt NRf gt 0 to 2 Selects 2W threshold resistance gt 2 to 15 Selects 15W threshold resistance gt 15 to 60 Selects 50W threshold resistance SYSTem CCHec
341. k RESistance Query threshold resistance TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce lt name gt Enable or disable contact check event detection lt name gt CCHeck enable or MMediate disable TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce Query state of event detection TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT lt NRf gt Specify contact check timeout in seconds 0 00000 to 999 99990 TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT Query contact check timeout setting RST and SYSTem PRESet parameter defaults are shown in boldface Contact check programming example Table F 4 summarizes a basic contact check programming example F 16 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table F 4 Contact check programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SYST CCH ON Enable contact check SYST CCH RES 2 SYST RSEN ON CALC2 LIM4 STAT ON CALC2 LIM4 SOUR2 15 SENS FUNC RES TRIG SEQ2 SOUR CCH TRIG SEQ2 TOUT 2 OUTP ON INIT CALC2 LIM4 FAIL Set 2Q contact resistance Enable 4 wire remote sense Enable contact check pass fail Set Digital I O bits all HI on failure Select ohms function Enable contact check event detection Set 2 second contact check timeout Turn on output Trigger unit Query contact check pass fail NOTE SENS FUNC RES selects ohms as the measurement function but is optional Alternately you could select any of the other valid measurement opera tions
342. k is performed and or a specified timeout period expires If contact check passes event detection is satisfied allowing operation to move on to perform the SOURCE Action If contact check fails open lead condi tion the SourceMeter will wait for the set timeout period to expire before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to perform the SOURCE Action The contact check timeout can be set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 seconds Note however that setting the timeout to 0 seconds disables the timeout That is operation will be held up indefinitely until contact check detection occurs With contact check event detection disabled operation will not hold up at the con tact check event detector and wait for contact check to be performed In other words event detection is satisfied immediately If contact check is disabled or the SourceMeter is in 2 wire sense mode event detection is disabled Sweep and binning considerations Sweep limitations Staircase and custom sweeps Auto ohms cannot be used with staircase and custom sweeps To use these types of sweeps with contact check you must use the manual ohms mode Source memory sweeps The contact check function is enabled globally rather than for individual source memory locations see Source memory sweep page 10 6 However it is still possible to mix both 2 wire and 4 wire sense modes in the same Source memory list When enabled before the start of a sweep contact check will be
343. kes the appropriate action It is from when an external trigger is detected in the Trigger Layer of the trigger model to when the trigger delay begins Trigger delay Trigger delay is the time from when the external event is detected to when the source configuration begins This is a user programmable delay that can be set from 0000 0000 seconds to 999 99990 seconds Source configuration This is the time it takes to configure the source DAC For the following discussion it is assumed that the range and polarity do not change when the source value is changed Source delay This is the time between the source configuration and the start of the first A D con version This programmable delay is typically used to allow the source to settle before starting the measurement With Auto Delay enabled 100usec is added to the user programmed source delay The user programmed delay can be set from 0000 0000 seconds to 9999 99900 seconds A 4 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual AID conversion This is the time it takes to measure the specified A D converter phase In general there are three A D phases required to generate a voltage or current reading These phases are often referred to as the signal reference and reference zero phases The signal phase measures the input signal The reference and reference zero phases are associated with a precision voltage reference inside the SourceMeter By measuring all three phases ze
344. l Pattern in Memory Display FAIL Immediate Binnin Control End Yes ED No No Q Yes Output First Output Pass Fail Pattern Pattern Yes eS No Press LIMIT key NOTE Enabling contact check does not automatically enable LIMIT 4 LIMIT 4 must be explicitly enabled from the front panel or using the CALC2 subsystem com mands See Front panel contact check operation page F 11 or Remote contact check operation page F 14 for more details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 9 Figure F 5 Sorting mode contact check limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Wait for SOT pulse from handler Perform Contact Check Perform Source Measure action Perform Limit 4 Test 2 Display Output Limit 4 FAIL Fail Pattern Display PASS Display Output Limit 1 FAIL Fail Pattern Display PASS Display PASS Output Pass Pattern Perform Limit 1 Test Output Pass Pattern Output Limit 2 3 5 12 Pass Pattern Press LIMIT Enabling contact check does not automatically enable LIMIT 4 LIMIT 4 must be explicitly enabled from the front panel or using the CALC2 subsystem com mands See Front panel contact check operation page F 11 or Remote contact check operation page F 14 for more details F 10 Contact Check Function 2400 Series Sourc
345. l resistance measurement between each source lead and it s corresponding sense Kelvin lead The resultant resistance is then compared to the programmed limit and a pass or fail result is determined This process takes place in as short as 350uS and delivers no energy to the device under test 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 3 Figure F 1 Source of Kelvin resistance errors Rs Rc DUT WARNING no NfeRNaL OPERATOR SERVICA 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT gs CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI Operation DUT connections The contact check function can be used to verify satisfactory contact resistance to the DUT at both the front and rear panels If you do not wish to perform contact check using the GUARD GUARD SENSE jacks on the rear panel they must be shorted together for proper contact check The SourceMeter must be placed into remote sense 4 wire mode for contact check to function If in 2 wire mode con tact check can be enabled but will not be performed All three source sense pairs are tested when contact check is enabled If a source sense pair is not used in a particular test it must have a shorting plug installed Other than this requirement normal connections to the DUT should be made as shown in Figure F 2 F 4 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure F 2 Contact check DUT connections Contact Being Tested WARNING no N
346. l display the upper limit with those two functions Limits evaluation Neither the high limit nor the low limit are evaluated until the unit has switched to the autorange mode This means that if the unit is already on a range higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower limit when the limit is set no range change will occur The upper limit is only evaluated if the unit has to upgrade In other words if you are on a range higher than the present upper limit and the unit autoranges down it can still end up on a range higher than the upper limit The converse is true for the lower limit The upper and lower limits have no meaning until autoranging is turned on but the limit will not be evaluated unless the unit has to go through an autorange If you are already on the right range when you turn on autoranging limits will not be evaluated 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 5 Digits The display resolution of the measured reading depends on the DIGITS setting This setting is global which means the digits setting selects display resolution for all measurement functions The DIGITS setting has no effect on the remote reading format The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed Those parameters are con trolled by the SPEED setting Setting display resolution There are two ways to set display resolution e DIGITS Press the DIGITS key until the desired numb
347. l lockout LLO GTL will still disable LLO e EEE 488 bus commands and features GET IFC SDC DCL LLO Serial Poll and SRQ are still fully supported e Multiple TALKs on the same query are supported as in the SCPI protocol This feature is useful when reading back long ASCII strings Numerics 2 wire local sensing 2 7 4 wire remote sensing 2 7 6 wire ohms measurements 4 12 Abort 10 5 Accessories 1 3 Acquiring readings 17 3 Adapters 1 3 Auto ohms measurements 4 4 Auto ranging 7 3 Auto zero 3 10 Disable enable 5 11 Front panel 3 10 Remote command 3 10 Auto clear 12 14 12 15 Basic circuit configurations 3 9 Measure only V or I 6 25 Index Source 6 23 Source V 6 24 Clearing registers and queues 15 4 Command reference CALCulate 1 18 26 CALCulate2 18 33 CALCulate3 18 43 Common 16 3 DISPlay subsystem 18 44 FORMat subsystem 18 47 OUTPut subsystem 18 55 ROUTe subsystem 18 57 SCPI 18 1 SENSe1 subsystem 18 58 SOURce subsystem 18 71 STATus subsystem 18 101 SYSTem subsystem 18 103 Tables 18 2 TRACe subsystem 18 114 TRIGger subsystem 18 116 Command summary CALCulate 18 3 Ee ee Common 16 2 at a on DISPlay 18 8 inang ae FORMat 18 9 Basic systems 12 13 OUTPut 18 9 Contact check function F 6 ae ROUTe 18 10 Digital output clear pattern 12 14 Handler interface 12 10 SOPLA E andler interface 12 SENSe 18 11 Handler types 12 12 Multiple element device 12 13 Single element device 12 13 Buff
348. l mode Source Readback ON Ohms accuracy Imeas accuracy Vmeas accuracy Imeasure accuracy 5mA 0 035 600nA 1 75uA 600nA 2 35uA 2 35uA 5mA 0 047 Vmeasure accuracy 500uV 0 012 300uV 60nV 300uV 300 06uV 300 06uV 500uV 60 01 Total Ohms uncertainty 60 0 047 60 06 100MQ 60 06 39 94mQ to 160 06mQ 4 10 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms accuracy of 100mMQ 5mA source current enhanced mode Source Readback ON Offset Compensation ON Ohms accuracy Imeas Rdg accuracy Vmeas Rdg accuracy System noise Imeasure accuracy 5mA 0 035 1 75uA Measured system noise 00 0000mA 1 75pA 00 0000mA 1 75pA 1 75pA 5mA 0 035 Vmeasure gain accuracy for 100mQ 5mA 500uV 500uV 0 012 60nV Measured system noise 000 002mV 60nV 2uV 2 06uV 2 06uV 500uV 0 412 035 0 412 0 447 100mQ 0 447 99 55mQ to 100 44mQ System noise includes the external connection to DUT To determine system noise the voltage and current noise is measured with test leads connected to the DUT For example with the 100mQ resistor connected the noise voltage was mea sured by pressing V measure selecting the appropriate 200mV range pressing the REL button and making note of the systems noise magnitude In this example the measurement was 000 002mvV or 2uV To measure the current source noise change the measure function to curre
349. l sayeaeveligunceiet eens 18 74 Set amplitude for fixed source ceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeettees 18 77 Set Voltage MI esrrocp eaeeell eee haste aden ad 18 79 SOUCSLAY seniri i enety E 18 82 Configure voltage and current SWEEPS 0 eee 18 83 Abort on compliance sissid eadi aiaiai 18 90 GONTIQUIOUISE roc tecagccetuysearecett duceder ve seeeuereispecedenadsheded eines 18 91 Configure Memory SWEEP 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 18 93 SOt SCAlMG TACION ocee sae sa ceeded he ceeedal paetedsd paedeedeatieeve dedi pseans 18 95 SOAK TUNG ssri aa S E 18 96 Pulse Mode delays Model 2430 only n se 18 97 SOURCE osani i S A tial deadatedy 18 98 Setting digital OUtDUt o oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 18 98 Clearing digital OUtDUt sissi nna 18 99 STATUS SUDSYSICIN tec isiseehtcieteen a daleeteesiee tree te peeede ieee 18 101 Read event registers cccccceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteneeeeeeeteees 18 101 Program event enable registers eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneees 18 101 Read condition registers 0 0 0 0 ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneees 18 101 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select default conditions 2 0 ee ee ceeetteeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeaees 18 102 Error quete vmesni ai aa a 18 102 SYS lem SUbSyST MI acasin i iiA a AS AAE EN 18 103 Default CONITIONS sessiossa onei 18 103 Control remote sensing esssesessrresererrneesssnnaaseennnaasannaas 18 104 Select
350. lect measurement function s v CONCurrent lt b gt Enable or disable ability to measure more ON v v than one function simultaneously When disabled volts function is enabled 1 CONCurrent Query concurrent state v EON lt function list gt Specify functions to enable CURRent v v VOLTage DC CURRent DC or RESistance ALL Enable all functions concurrent y enabled or enable ohms function concurrent disabled COUNt Query number of functions that are v enabled ON Returns list of functions that are enabled v OFF lt function list gt Specify functions to disable VOLTage v v VOLTage DC CURRent DC or RESis RESistance tance ALL Disable all measurement functions v COUNt Query number of functions that are v disabled OFF Returns list of functions that are disabled v STATe lt name gt Query state of specified function 1 on v or 0 off 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode concurrent measurements are always disabled This command is invalid error 831 18 12 Table 18 6 continued SENSe command summary SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 CURRent DC Path to configure current y RANGe Configure measurement range y UPPer Select range by specifying the expected 1 05e 4 y T lt n gt UP DOWN current reading UPPer Query
351. lement provides the resistance measurement If resistance is not measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used TIME A timestamp is available to reference each group of read ings to a point in time The relative timestamp operates as a timer that starts at zero seconds when the instrument is turned on or when the relative timestamp is reset SYSTem TIME RESet The times tamp for each reading sent over the bus is referenced in seconds to the start time After 99 999 999 seconds the timer resets to zero and starts over NOTE Timestamp values are approximate See Section 9 for details Timestamp is also available for buffer readings Timestamp can be referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer absolute format which is timestamped at 0 seconds or can provide the time between each reading delta format The TRACe TSTamp FORMat com mand is used to select the absolute or delta format STATus A status word is available to provide status information concerning SourceMeter operation The 24 bit status word is sent in a decimal form and has to be converted by the user to the binary equivalent to determine the state of each bit in the word For exam ple if the status value is 65 the binary equivalent is 0000000000001000001 Bits 0 and 6 are set The significance of each status bit is explained as follows Bit 0 OFLO Set to 1 if measurement was made while in over range Bit 1 Filter Set to 1 if m
352. liance is detected at the beginning of the SDM cycle LATE Abort sweep if compliance is detected at the end of the SDM cycle Sweep configuration menu tree CONFIG 10 14 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Setting delay Generally the time duration spent at each step or point of a sweep consists of the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC set ting NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used Instead pulse width for the on time and pulse delay for the off time are the delays that are set by the user Pulse Mode sweeps are covered later in this section The source delay is part of the SDM cycle and is used to allow the source to settle before the measurement is made See Section 6 Source delay measure cycle for details The total time period of the source delay could include an auto delay and or a user programmed delay With auto delay enabled 1ms of delay is used The user programmable source delay adds 0000 0000 to 9999 9990 seconds of delay See Section 3 Source delay to set these delays Additional delay for a sweep is available by using the trigger delay This user specified delay 0000 0000 to 9999 99990 seconds occurs before each SDM cycle device action of the sweep Thus the trigger delay is executed before each new source point in the sweep See Section 11 Trigger models and Con figuring triggering
353. lines are internally disconnected for safety reasons The sense lines are auto matically reconnected when the output is turned on and 4 wire sensing is restored 2 wire local sensing 2 wire local sense connections can only be used if the error contributed by test lead IR drop is acceptable to the user At current levels below 100mA the errors are usually not significant assuming test lead resistance is not greater than 19 Since current in a series circuit is the same at all points in the loop remote sens ing does not improve I Source or Measure accuracy Thus if sourcing current and measuring current you can use local sensing Other conditions that allow the use of 2 wire local sensing include e Test circuit impedance is 1kQ Above 1GQ guarding should also be used Cable guard e Measure Only V or I operation 2 8 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guarding methods Cable guard Use the high impedance cable guard connection scheme shown in Figure 2 4 for the following source measure condition e Test circuit impedance is gt 1GQ Note that cable guard must be selected for this connection scheme See Guard selection page 2 13 to select cable guard A test fixture is typically used when testing high impedance devices The test fix ture reduces noise and protects the user from a potentially hazardous voltage on the guard shield or plate See Section 6 Guard for details on using
354. litude This compensates for IR drop in the OUTPUT test leads With remote sensing disabled the output voltage is sensed at the output connectors Measuring voltage With remote sensing enabled voltage mea surements are made at DUT This eliminates any voltage drops that may be in the test leads between the SourceMeter and the DUT With remote sensing disabled voltage measurements are performed at the output connectors of the instrument Measuring resistance With remote sensing enabled 4 wire resistance measurements can be made NOTE See Section 2 for details on sensing Select guard mode GUARd lt name gt SYSTem GUARd lt name gt Select guard mode Parameters lt name gt OHMS Ohms guard mode CABLe Cable guard mode Query GUARd Query guard mode Description This command is used to select the guard mode OHMS guard is a low impedance guard drive used for in circuit resistance measurements Ohms guard is not available for SourceMeters that have 1A 3A and or 10A ranges source or measure CABLE guard provides a high impedance guard drive that is used to eliminate leakage currents in cabling and test fixtures When performing 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD out put state The OUTPut 1 SMODe GUARd command is used to select the GUARD output off state NOTE See Section 2 for details on guarding 18 106 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Initialize memory INITialize SYSTem
355. ll of the HI LO limit tolerances enabled assuming that it has passed the Contact Check contact check option only and Compliance tests first The Digital I O will be driven with the first pattern of the first Contact Check Compli ance HI or LO failure Otherwise the pass pattern will be output In GRADING mode you will also choose bin control modes With IMME DIATE the testing process will stop after the first failure and place the fail pattern on the digital output If none of the limit tests fail the pass pattern will be placed on the output and the testing process will stop With END the testing process will continue until the programmed sweep is completed regardless of how many failures occur This 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 17 allows multi element devices i e resistor networks to be tested After testing is finished the bit pattern for the first failure is placed on the out put If all tests pass the pass pattern will instead be placed on the out put In SORTING mode a reading will fail if it fails the optional Contact Check Test the Compliance Test or is not within any of the Digital I O Bands If the tests pass and only Limit 1 or 4 optional contact check test is enabled the associated pass pattern will be output Otherwise the first limit test band that passes will output its lower limit pattern upper limit patterns will be ignored If Limit 1 or 4 fails their failure pat terns w
356. lows IMMediate Event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to continue BUS Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMer Event detection occurs immediately on the initial pass through the trigger model Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer inter val elapses The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes into idle MANual Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is pressed The SourceM eter must be in LOCAL mode for it to respond to the TRIG key Press the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 24 over the bus to take the SourceMeter out of remote 11 14 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TLINk Event detection occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link page 11 19 for more information With TLINk selected you can loop around the Arm Event Detector by setting the event detec tor bypass ARM DIRection to SOURCe NSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 Limit Testing and Section 13 Digital I O port PSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital O port is pulsed high This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 Limit Testing and Section 13
357. lt SetunGS ss gt nnsiorer TO 1 15 Saving and restoring user SETUPS eee eeeereeeeeeeetteeeees 1 15 Factory default settings 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeereee 1 16 Remote Setups ecvdesasetesvaesceddssnanaceedeetandanes tanta cdansveaaateteangadee 1 18 MenUS eenaa na a OA E Qesliue adaxidemabsdanedtes 1 19 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual M in MOM diiidan aaisan aaa a a a a 1 19 Rules to navigate menus essesssseesesrrrsserrnnessennnaaaeenneeerannn 1 22 Editing source and compliance values n 1 23 Toggling the source and measure display fields 1 23 Disabling front panel display s 1 24 Configuration MENUS ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeettteeeeeetnaeeeeeeees 1 24 2 Connections Connection OVerview ceccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 2 2 Front rear terminals selection cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Connections to DUT siiiii Adee aai 2 3 Sensing Methods 0 0 0 eceeeeee seen eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 2 5 Guarding methods ccc c sccceets tcteeeeceestsceeeeetasseeeceeestvecteeureeasete 2 8 3 Basic Source Measure Operation WARNING CAUTION cccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeseeesetaeeeseaeeeees 3 2 Operation Overview ecceeeeeeecceeceeeeeeeeteeteeeeenaeaaeceseeeeeeeeteeeteees 3 4 Source measure capabilities cccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseenaeees 3 4 Compliance limit ass
358. lt n gt Parameters If a manual source range is presently selected then the specified amplitude cannot exceed that range For example if the V Source is on the 2V range auto range disabled you will not be able to set the V Source amplitude to 3V In auto range the amplitude can be set to any level that is within the capabilities of the source The MINimum and MAXimum parameters are only valid if the highest source range is presently selected Sending the MINimum or MAXi mum parameters on a lower source range will generate error 221 Setting Conflict TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt Set fixed I Source amplitude when 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum triggered Set fixed V Source amplitude when triggered Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts 21 to 21 2400 LV and 2401 OA or OV 1 05A or 210V 1 05A or 210V Set Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 1 05A or 1100V 1 05A or 1100V Set Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 63V 3 15A or 63V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query Description Set voltage limit LEVel lt
359. lues The edit mode is selected by pressing the EDIT key EDIT annunciator on The editing cursor flashing digit appears for the source or compliance reading If a value is not edited within six seconds the edit mode is cancelled While in the edit mode the EDIT key toggles between the source value and compliance value See Section 3 for details on setting source and compliance values TOGGLE key NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the TOGGLE key is disabled With the output on the TOGGLE key manipulates readings on the top display and on the bottom left display It has no effect on the compliance reading Cmpl which is located on the bottom right Each press of the TOGGLE key sequences through the display options 1 14 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual With the voltage V or current 1 measurement function selected the TOGGLE key lets you display both the current and voltage measurements at the same time It also allows you to toggle display positions of the source and measure readings With the ohms Q measurement function selected the ohms measurement is always displayed on the top display The TOGGLE key lets you display either the programmed source value the current measurement or the voltage measurement on the bottom left display The TOGGLE key is also used to display statistical data on readings stored in the data store This function is performed from the data store RECALL mode NOTE If FCTN
360. ly one result will be returned by this query command Notes 1 2 If there is no data in the buffer error 230 Data corrupt or stale will be generated If there are a lot of readings stored in the buffer some statistic operations may take too long and cause a bus time out error To avoid this send the CALA3 DATA command and then wait for the MAV message available bit in the Status Byte Register to set before addressing the SourceMeter to talk See Section 15 Status Structure See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceM eter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data DISPlay subsystem The display subsystem controls the display of the SourceMeter and is summarized in Table 18 2 Control display DIGits lt n gt DISPlay DIGits lt n gt Parameters Query Description Set display resolution lt n gt 4 3 5 digit resolution 5 4 5 digit resolution 6 5 5 digit resolution 7 6 5 digit resolution DEFault 5 5 digit resolution MINimum 3 5 digit resolution MAXimum 6 5 digit resolution DIGits Query display resolution DIGits DEFault Query RST default resolution DIGits MINimum Query lowest allowable display resolution DIGits MAXimum Query largest allowable display resolution This command is used to set the display resolution Note that you can instead u
361. mand disables the Source Event Detector since its parameter name SOURce is not included in the parameter list With the Source Event Detector disabled operation will not hold up It will con tinue and perform the Source Action Operation will hold up at the Delay Event 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 15 Detector until an input trigger is received and then it will hold up at the Measure Event Detector until another input trigger is received Trigger delay A programmable delay is available before the Source Action The Trigger Delay can be manually set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 seconds Note that this delay is separate from the Delay Action of the SDM cycle The Delay Action is discussed next Source delay and measure actions The SDM cycle of the SourceMeter consists of three actions Source Delay and Measure SOURCE Action Any programmed output voltage or current level changes are performed DELAY Action This programmable delay is used to allow the source to settle before a measurement is performed It can be manually set from 0 00000 to 9999 99900 seconds or Auto Delay can be enabled With Auto Delay enabled the SourceMeter automatically selects a nominal delay period based on the selected function and range NOTE Inthe SYSTem RCMode MULTiple mode the soak time programmed with SOURce 1 SOAK takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger
362. measure operations Step 3 Configure limit tests Select and configure the following limit tests parameters as explained in Config uring limit tests page 12 16 Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The Source Meter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Start testing process To enable the limit tests press the LIMIT key If the SOT line of the Digital I O is being used by a handler the testing process will not start until the handler sends a low going pulse Otherwise the testing process will start when LIMIT is pressed NOTE The PASS and FAIL messages indicate the status of each test cycle with the following exceptions When in the NORMAL HIGH IMPEDANCE or GUARD output off state the OFF message is displayed The pass and fail conditions will be displayed as P OFF and F OFF respectively When in the 12 20 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual ZERO output off state the ZER message is displayed The pass and fail conditions will be displayed as P ZER and F ZER respectively Ifthe source reaches the over voltage protection OVP limit the OVP message will be displayed The pass and fail conditions will be displayed as P OVP and F OVP respectively Step 6 Stop testing process The testing process can be terminated at any time by again pressing LIMIT When using a handler the testing process will stop after the last DUT
363. measurement range is defined by the selected range For example 2 11V is the full scale reading for the 2V range 105 5mA is the full scale reading for the 100mA range and 2 11kQ is the full scale reading for the 2KQ range Table 3 1 in Section 3 lists the full scale readings for all ranges For manual ohms measurements the display reading is the result of the V I calcu lation Effectively there are no ohms ranges Thus there are never any leading zeroes in the display reading For example a resistor that is measured at 936 236kQ will be displayed as 936 236kQ 5Hdigit resolution The RANGE keys are used to select the voltage or current measurement range Input levels that exceed the maximum levels cause the OVERFLOW message to be displayed while 9 91E 37 will be returned via remote Ranging limitations When sourcing voltage Source V you cannot use the RANGE keys to change the voltage measurement Measure V range Also when sourcing current Source I you cannot use the RANGE keys to change the current measurement Measure I range For these source measure configurations the measurement range is determined by the selected source range See Appendix A for ranges Manual ranging For the Source V Measure I Source Measure V and Ohms configurations the RANGE arrow keys are used to select a fixed range Note that the highest avail able range is dependent on the corresponding compliance setting Within range complia
364. ments Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable concurrent measurements 1 or ON Enable concurrent measurements Query CONCurrent Query state of concurrent measurements Description This command is used to enable or disable the ability of the instru ment to measure more than one function simultaneously When enabled the instrument will measure the functions that are selected See ON lt function list gt page 18 59 OFF lt function list gt page 18 59 and ALL page 18 60 When disabled only one measurement function can be enabled When making the transition from CONCurrent ON to CONCurrent OFF the voltage VOLT DC measurement function will be selected All other measurement functions will be disabled Use the FUNC Tion ON command to select one of the other measurement func tions NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode concurrent measurements are always dis abled Sending this command results in error 831 NOTE The function selected with the SENSE FUNC command will not be displayed on the front panel if concurrent measurements are enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 59 ON lt function list gt OFF lt function list gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON lt function list gt Specify functions to be enabled SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF lt function list gt Specify functions to be disabled Parameters lt function list gt CURRent DC Amps measurement function V
365. messages are described in volume 2 Command Refer ence of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Refer to the SYSTem ERRor command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 3 Table B 1 Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 440 Query UNTERMINATED after EE Standard Event 2 indefinite response 430 Query DEADLOCKED EE Standard Event 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED EE Standard Event 2 410 Query INTERRUPTED EE Standard Event 2 363 Input buffer overrun EE Standard Event 3 362 Framing error in program message EE Standard Event 3 361 Parity error in program message EE Standard Event 3 360 Communications error EE Standard Event 3 350 Queue overflow SYS Standard Event 3 330 Self test failed EE Standard Event 3 314 Save recall memory lost EE Standard Event 3 315 Configuration memory lost EE Standard Event 3 285 Program syntax error EE Standard Event 4 284 Program currently running EE Standard Event 4 282 Illegal program name EE Standard Event 4 281 Cannot create program EE Standard Event 4 260 Expression error EE Standard Event 4 241 Hardware missing EE Standard Event 4 230 Data corrupt or stale EE Standard Event 4 225 Out of memory EE Standard Event 4 224 Illegal parameter value EE Standard Event 4 223 Too much data EE Standard Event 4 222 Parameter data out of range EE Standard Event 4 221 Settings conflict EE Standard Event 4 220 Parameter
366. mit 2 Test Coarse Limits Limit 3 5 12 Tests Fine Limits Pass fail information Pass fail information for limit tests can be obtained as follows e A PASS or FAIL indication on the front panel display e By programming the unit to output specific pass fail bit patterns on the Digital I O port which can be used to control other equipment such as a device handler 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 3 for binning operations See Binning systems page 12 10 and Section 13 Digital I O port for more information NOTE The Model 2401 does not have a handler interface and therefore cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations e With the CALCulate2 LIMit lt n gt FAIL query via remote where lt n gt is the limit test number Section 18 CALCulate2 e By reading various status bits Section 15 Status Structure and Section 18 FORMat subsystem e By noting a P or F preceding buffer location numbers Section 9 Recalling readings Data flow All limit tests are part of the CALC2 data block See Appendix C for an overview on how limit testing fits into the overall data flow through the SourceMeter Limit 1 test compliance This hardware H W test checks the compliance state of the SourceMeter It uses the programmed compliance as the test limit At or above the programmed limit the instrument is in compliance B
367. mote interface 1 6 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front and rear panel familiarization NOTE The SourceMeter models covered in this manual are very similar in appearance Therefore to avoid redundancy a generic Model 2400 is used for illustration purposes Front panel summary The front panel of the SourceMeter is shown in Figure 1 1 The following abbrevi ated information should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 1 1 SourceMeter front panel KEITHLEY 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SourceMeter MEAS SOURCE l e o DISPLAY 4 5 TOGGLE 2 i 2 2 FILTER LIMIT TRIG SWEEP CHED TEMAS J N OFF 6 8 9 S DIGITS SPEED STORE jRECAL ONFIG MENU EXIT ENTER a Q S tel P OUTPUT Measurement MEAS function keys V Measure volts l Measure amps Q Measure ohms FCTN Perform math functions SOURCE function keys V Source voltage V Source l Source current l Source Aand V Increase decrease source or compliance value Operation keys EDIT Select source or compliance reading for editing TOGGLE Toggle display positions of source and measure readings or display V and measurements LOCAL Cancel remote operation REL Enable disable relative reading on present function FILTER Display digital filter status for present function and toggle filter on off LIMIT Perform configured limit tests TRIG Trigger a measurement from the front panel 240
368. mps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for ohms Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto range 1 or ON Enable auto range Query AUTO Query state of auto range Description This command is used to control auto ranging With auto ranging enabled the instrument automatically goes to the most sensitive range to perform the measurement When this command is used to disable auto range the instrument remains at the automatically selected range When a range is manu ally selected auto range is disabled See previous command NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range cannot be enabled error 831 LLIMit lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for ohms Parameters lt n gt 105e 6 to 105e 6 Amps lower limit 21 to 21 Volts lower limit 2 1e8 to 2 1e8 Ohms lower limit 2400 and 2410 2 1e7 to 2 1e7 Ohms lower limit 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Query LLIMit Query auto range lower limit Description Auto range lower limits are intended primarily for SYST RCM MULT support See SYSTem subsystem page 18 103 The lower limit for all three functions is programmable and must be less than or equ
369. multiple response messages for all the queries are sent to the computer when the SourceMeter is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by com mas The following example shows the response message for a program mes sage that contains four single item query commands 0 1 1 0 Response message terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The following example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 You must always tell the SourceMeter what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instrument to the computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the SourceMeter to talk Rule 2 The complete response message must be received by the computer before another program message can be sent to the SourceMeter RS 232 interface operation NOTE The programmable aspects of RS 232 operation baud rate data bits parity and terminator are configured from the COMMUNICATION option of the Main Menu See Section 1 Main menu Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Make sure th
370. must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the user documentation The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits perform safe installations and repair products Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley Instruments products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Measurement Category and Measurement Category II as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 60664 Most measurement control and data I O signals are Measurement Category and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high transient over voltages Measurement Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often associated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category sources unless otherwise marked or described in the user documentation Exercise extreme caution when a shock ha
371. n page F 11 and Remote contact check operation page F 14 Bit 18 of the 24 Bit Status word is set if there is an open lead and can be read over the GPIB or RS 232 port if LIMIT 4 is enabled Pass Fail status for that limit is also contained in the status word See FORMat sub system page 18 47 Bit 10 of the Measurement Condition and Measurement Event Registers are set if a contact check failure occurs You can use a Service Request SRQ to query the state of these bits See Measurement Event Register page 15 13 and Figure 15 6 Auto and manual ohms Contact check can be used with either the auto or manual ohms modes See Ohms measurement procedure page 4 4 for more information F 6 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Trigger model operation Contact check can be used with the SourceMeter trigger system to delay or com pletely prevent progression through the trigger model unless the contact check is in a pass state In relation to the standard trigger models Figure 11 1 and Figure 11 8 the contact check test is performed just before the SOURCE Action block in the trigger layer NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the trigger models are shown are shown in Figure 11 8 and Figure 11 9 As with other trigger model operations there is an event detector for contact check With contact check event detection enabled operation will hold up at the detector until contact chec
372. n 4 bit mode EOT is not automatically controlled Requires digital auto clear to be enabled IEOT In 3 bit mode automatically output a LO pulse on Digital I O line 4 at end of test In 4 bit mode EOT is not automatically controlled Requires digital auto clear to be enabled Limits configuration menu tree DIGOUT AUTO SIZE MODE CLEAR CONTROL CONFIG LIMIT H W SW EOT LIMITS LIMITS PASS MODE FAIL LIM2 3 DIG 1 0 SRC MEM MODE LIM5 12 PATTERN LOC CONTROL Loum HILIM BUSY BUSY EOT 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 19 Performing front panel limit tests Perform the basic steps below to run limit tests from the front panel See Remote limit testing page 12 20 for remote commands and a programming example NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port Therefore it cannot be used with a handler to perform binning operations If using a Model 2401 for limit testing ignore all actions and information that pertain to binning Step 1 Configure test system As previously explained your test system could be as simple as connecting a DUT to the SourceMeter Section 2 Connections or could employ the use of a handler for binning operations Adding a scanner to the test system allows you to test multi element devices such as resistor networks Step 2 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source
373. n of the current sweep Specify span of the voltage sweep Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts 42 to 42 2400 LV and 2401 OA or OV 2 1A or 420V 42V 2400 LV and 2401 2400 LV and 2401 2 1A or 420V 42V 2400 LV Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 2 1A or 2200V 2 1A or 2200V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 6 3A or 128V 6 3A or 128V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 6 3A or 210V 6 3A or 210V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 21A or 210V 21A or 210V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 10 5A or 42V 10 5A or 42V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query Description STEP lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent STEP lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage STEP lt n gt Parameters SCPI Command Reference 18 87 CENTer CENTer DEFault CENTer MINimum CENTER MAXimum lt SPAN lt SPAN DEFault lt SPAN MINimum lt SPAN MAXimum A sweep can be configured by specifying center and span parame ters By specifying a center point you can sweep through the operat ing point of a device The span determines the sweep width with the operating point at the center of the sweep For example assume you are testing a device that operates at 10V and you want to sweep from 8 to 12 volts To do this you would specify the
374. n pressing the OUTPUT ON OFF key 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 13 7 Figure 13 4 Using test fixture output enable SourceM eter Test Fixture O utput Enable I l l Pin 8 I Enable Switch Lid Closed l I GND l l Pin 5 or 9 i l A SourceM eter O U TPUT can be turned on SourceM eter Test Fixture O utput Enable i i Pin 8 i Output Enable Switch Lid O pen I GND I l Pin 5 or 9 i I B SourceM eter O U TPUT turns off NOTE Output enable can be driven by Digital I O Allow 100us settling and response time The Digital I O lines are edge sensitive open collector and signals should be debounced to avoid erratic operation Front panel output configuration The output is configured from the CONFIGURE OUTPUT menu and is structured as follows Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the sweep menu while dashes indicate options Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change operate options 13 8 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configure OUTPUT menu Press CONFIG and then ON OFF OUTPUT to display the menu Figure 13 5 shows the overall menu structure NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode ENABLE is the only menu item that is displayed For the Pulse Mode the output off state is always set to NORMAL and auto output off
375. n properly and faster in the 488 1 protocol as long as it meets the above guidelines and limitations NRFD hold off OPC OPC and WAI are still functional but are not needed for the 488 1 pro tocol When sending commands the GPIB is automatically held off when it detects a terminator The hold off is released when all the commands have fin ished executing or if there is some parser or command error An exception is an initiate command which releases the hold off immediately and does not wait for all of the readings to be acquired This immediate release of bus hold off is done to support GET SDC IFC TRG RCL RST SYSTem PRESet and ABORt during data acquisition NDAC hold off NDAC hold off is included with the GPIB 488 1 protocol mode to allow a single instrument to hold off all others on the bus until it is finished executing a com mand The following command controls NDAC hold off SYSTem MEP HOLDoff ON OFF The default is OFF but NRFD hold off will still be enabled and will prevent an instrument from accepting further commands See Figure G 1 for the complete IEEE 488 handshake sequence Figure G 1 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DATA SOURCE DAV SOURCE VALID NRFD ALL ACCEPTED NDAC ACCEPTOR 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 5 Trigger on talk Trigger on talk functionality has been added for the 488 1 protocol If a query has not been received by the instrument
376. nable line is at digital low asserted The source output can be turned on Bit B12 Over Temperature OT Set bit indicates that an over tempera ture condition exists The source output cannot be turned on e Bit B13 Over Voltage Protection OVP Set bit indicates that the source is being limited at the programmed limit level Bit B14 Compliance Comp Set bit indicates that the source is in com pliance e Bit B15 Not used Figure 15 6 Measurement event status Comp OVP OT OE CC BFL BAV ROF RAV LP HL3 LL3 HL2 LL2 L1 B15 B14 mE IR L T T 13 Lo T T T T E T B0 Comp OVP OT OE CC BFL BAV ROF RAV LP HL3 LL3 HL2 LL2 L1 815 614 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO M easurement Condition Register stat meas cond M easurement Event Register stat meas To M easurement Summary Bit M SB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 stat meas enab lt N RF gt stat meas enab Measurement Event Enable Register Comp In Compliance LP Limits Pass OVP Over Voltage protection acgentcy HL3 High Limit 3 OT Over temperature LL3 Low Limit 3 OE Output Enble Asserted HL2 High Limit 2 CC Contact Check LL2 Low Limit 2 BFL Buffer Full L1 Limit 1 BAV Buffer Available ROF Reading Overflow amp Logical AND RAV Reading Available OR Logical OR
377. nator that is attached to the end of each data string IEEE 754 single precision data format 32 data bits Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 e f ign bit 0 positive 1 negative s s exponent bits 8 fraction bits 23 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 The header and terminator are sent only once for each READ During binary transfers never un talk the SourceMeter until after the data is read input to the computer Also to avoid erratic operation the readings of the data string and terminator should be acquired in 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 49 one piece The header 0 can be read separately before the rest of the string The number of bytes to be transferred can be calculated as follows Bytes 2 Rdgs x 4 1 where 2 is the number of bytes for the header 0 Rdgs is the product of the number of selected data elements arm count and trigger count 4 is the number of bytes for each reading 1 is the byte for the terminator For example assume the SourceMeter is configured to perform 10 source measure operations and send the 10 current measurements to the computer using the binary format Bytes 2 10x4 1 43 Data elements ELEMents lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents SENSe 1 lt item list gt Specify data elements for data string Parameters lt item list gt V
378. nce cccccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 Maximum compliance values ccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeesenteeaeeees 6 3 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Compliance examples cccecceeeeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesneaees 6 4 Determining compliance limit eee eeeeeeeesneeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeaas 6 4 Overheating Protection eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseennaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaas 6 6 Overheating conditions 2 0 eee ee eete tere eeetteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 6 6 Source delay Measure cycle ooo eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeeseennaeeeeeeenaaes 6 7 Sweep waveformS c cccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeteeenenes 6 9 Operating boundaries saeessseseesressessrnassesnnnanrnannaarerannaatannnaaenena 6 10 S rce Or SINK eae iaeiei aaa aaa aaa 6 10 Duty CYCIO ter vssnedeceivenddcdeevandacersipondee A vanteaseersnondveds even 6 10 I Source operating boundaries eee eeseeeeeeettteeeeeeenaees 6 15 V Source operating boundaries 2 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeentneeeeeees 6 19 Source measure and source V measure V senec 6 22 Basic Circuit configurations 0 0 0 eee eeeeette tee eeeetaeteeeeetaaeeeeeeeaees 6 23 SOUCA aapa a aei aia Eaa A a 6 23 SOUC asccavkadidecensaanuset ablvesaneeaddtustveanaleeessatadadesenaed 6 24 Measure only V OF l cecceescccccccsenceceeccvegeeceeecuesseaesevebanseeeeneanese 6 25 GUANO ieia e EAS E EE 6 27 Cable guad crai
379. nce or if the instrument displays the OVERFLOW message on a particular range select a higher range until an on range reading is displayed Use the lowest range possible without causing an overflow to ensure best accu racy and resolution 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 3 Auto ranging NOTE For the Model 2430 auto ranging cannot be performed while in the Pulse Mode Therefore all the following information on auto ranging is not applicable to the Model 2430 Pulse Mode For the Source V Measure Source Measure V and Ohms configurations press AUTO RANGE to enable auto ranging The AUTO annunciator turns on when auto ranging is selected With auto ranging selected the instrument automatically chooses the best range to measure the applied signal Note that the highest avail able range is dependent on the corresponding compliance setting Auto range considerations If the SourceMeter has to autorange the SDM source delay measure cycle is repeated to take the measurement on the new range This means that any pro grammed source delay will be applied each time the unit has to autorange For example if a 1 second source delay is programmed the unit could take 2 or more seconds to complete a reading if it has to change ranges The autorange algorithm used in the SourceMeters is as follows If the reading reaches 105 of the present range the unit will go up 3 ranges or to the highest r
380. nd 000 200mV 200pV Step 3 Select measurement function and range Select the desired measurement function by pressing MEAS V voltage or MEAS current When measuring the source i e Source V Measure V you cannot select the range using the measurement RANGE keys The selected source range deter mines the measurement range When not measuring the source i e Source V Measure I measurement range selection can be done manually or automatically When using manual ranging use the lowest possible range for best accuracy In autorange the SourceMeter automatically goes to the most sensitive range to make the measurement Step 4 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will turn on to indicate the output is on Step 5 Observe readings on the display The SourceMeter is in compliance if the Cmpl label or the units label i e mA for the displayed compliance setting is flashing If the Cmpl label is flashing real compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the displayed compliance value If the units label is flashing range compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the maximum compliance value for the present fixed measurement range For example if presently on the 2V measurement range a flashing units label for the voltage compliance value indicates that the output is clamped at 2 1V Step 6 Turn output off When finished turn the outp
381. nd R to In Out LO adversely affecting the low current or high resistance measurement of the DUT In Figure 6 17B the driven guard is connected to the metal guard plate for the insu lators Since the voltage on either end of R is the same OV drop no current can flow through the leakage resistance path Thus the SourceMeter only measures the current through the DUT Cable guard should be used when sourcing or measuring low current lt 1HA NOTE When using shielded triaxial or coaxial cabling with guard the CABLE guard setting must be used to prevent oscillations CABLE guard is the factory default setting Ohms guard The OHMS guard selection provides a low impedance lt 1Q high current up to 50mA driven guard This lets you perform in circuit ohms measurements of the DUT where other parallel resistive paths are present These measurements are typically performed in Delta or Wye configurations NOTE Ohms guard is not available for the 1A 3A and 5A 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 ranges source and measure Ohms guard cannot be selected if already on range Conversely if ohms guard is already selected the 1A 3A and 5A 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 ranges can not be selected See also Section 4 6 wire ohms measurements and Section 2 Ohms guard 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 29 If you want to measure the resistance of a single resistor in the network you must use
382. nd Reference 18 91 CURRent lt NRf list gt VOLTage lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage lt NRf list gt Parameters Query Description NOTE Define Source list Define V Source list lt NRf list gt NRf NRf NRf 2400 2400 LV 2401 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 l Source value 210 to 210 V Source value 21 to 21 2400 LV and 2401 2410 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 l Source value 1100 to 1100 V Source value 2420 NRf 3 15 to 3 15 l Source value 63 to 63 V Source value 2425 and 2430 DC Mode NRf 3 15 to 3 15 l Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2430 Pulse Mode NRf 10 5 to 10 5 l Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2440 NRf 5 25 to 5 25 l Source value 42 to 42 V Source value CURRent Query I Source list VOLTage Query V Source list These commands are used to define a list of source values up to 100 for the list sourcing mode of operation When operation is started the instrument will sequentially source each current or volt age value in the list A measurement is performed at each source level The following command shows the proper format for defining an I Source list using current source values of 10mA 130mA and 5mA SOURce 1 LIST CURRent 0 01 0 13 0 005 If using manual source ranging you can use auto range for source values that are not within a single range In order to execute a source list the selected source must be in the list sour
383. nd hybrid circuits Remote ohms programming Summarizes the basic remote commands required to program the SourceMeter for ohms measurements and gives several typical programming examples 4 2 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms configuration menu NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms cannot be enabled from the ohms configuration menu However offset compen sated ohms is available as a math function Section 8 Math opera tions To access the ohms configuration menu press CONFIG then OHMS Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to select the various items in the menu tree which is shown in Figure 4 1 Menu items include e SOURCE Select AUTO or MANUAL source mode e SENSE MODE Select 2 WIRE or 4 WIRE sense mode e GUARD Choose OHMS or CABLE guard OFFSET COMPENSATION Enable or disable offset compensated ohms not valid for Model 2430 Pulse Mode e SRC RDBK Enable or disable source readback mode The following paragraphs discuss each of these aspects in detail Figure 4 1 Ohms configuration menu tree CONFIG SEN SE OFFSET SRC SOURCE MODE GUARD COMPENSATION RDBK AUTO MANUAL 2 wiRE 4 wirE OHMS CABLE JENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 3 Ohms measurement methods NOTE For the Model 2430 the following ohms measurement procedures assume that the DC Mode of ope
384. nd zero measurements Meas Ref amp Zero are components of the off time The measurement process is split up this way to allow the shortest possible pulse width The time to perform the signal measurement depends on the speed setting NPLC of the SourceMeter and the power line fre quency Meas Sig NPLC Line Frequency Where Meas Sig is the time it takes to measure the signal NPLC is the present speed setting 0 004 to 0 100 PLC Line Frequency is the frequency of the power line 50 or 60 Hz NOTE For front panel operation the menu to set speed is displayed by pressing the SPEED key For remote operation speed is set using an NPLCycles command See Section 7 Speed for details Overhead time As shown in Figure 5 2 there is some pulse width overhead time that is inherent to the measurement process The 80usec is the minimum overhead times that can be achieved If the SourceMeter is configured to perform additional opera tions e g math calculations relative store sweep this time will be higher Pulse width delay When the pulse width setting is greater than the sum of the signal measurement and overhead times a delay is used to achieve the desired pulse width This delay is automatically calculated by the instrument using the following equation Pulse Width Delay PW Sig Meas 80usec Where PW is the pulse width setting Sig Meas is the signal measurement time 80usec is the minimum pulse width overhead t
385. nds 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 55 When a status register is queried the response message is a value that indicates which bits in the register are set For example if bits B5 B4 B2 B1 and BO of a register are set 110111 the following values will be returned for the selected data format ASCii 55 decimal value Hexadecimal H37 hexadecimal value OCTal Q67 octal value BINary B110111 binary value See Section 16 Common Commands and STATus subsystem page 18 101 for more information OUTPut subsystem This subsystem is used to control the output of the selected source and the output enable These commands are summarized in Table 18 4 Turn source on or off STATe lt b gt OUTPut 1 STATe lt b gt Turn source on or off Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Turn source off standby 1 or ON Turn source on operate Query OUTPut Query state of source Description This command is used to turn the source output on or off Measure ments cannot be made while the source is off Turning the source off places the SourceMeter in the idle state The only exception to this is when source auto clear is enabled In this mode the source turns on during each source phase of the SDM cycle and turns off after each measurement See SOURCe 1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto out put off page 18 72 NOTE The SOURce CLEar command will also turn the source off
386. ne frequency disables auto frequency See previous command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 109 Error queue NOTE See Section 15 for details on the error queue NEXT SYSTem ERRor NEXT Read oldest error code and message Description As error and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue The Error Queue is a first in first out FIFO register that can hold up to 10 messages After sending this command and address ing the SourceMeter to talk the oldest message is sent to the com puter and is then removed from the queue NOTE The STATus Queue command performs the same function as SYS Tem ERRor NEXT See STATus subsystem page 18 101 ALL SYSTem ERRor ALL Read all errors codes and messages Description This query command is similar to the NEXT command except that all messages in the Error Queue are sent to the computer when the SourceMeter is addressed to talk All messages are removed from the queue COUNt SYSTem ERRor COUNt Return the number of errors Description After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk a decimal number will be sent to the computer That is the number of messages in the Error Queue CODE NEXT SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT Read oldest error code only Description This command is identical to the NEXT command except only the code is returned The message itself is not returned The error is
387. nfiguration See Section 8 for more information on MATH Changing REL or LIMITS If you started with only a basic measurement function selected you can enable REL and or LIMITS but only the voltage current or resistance component of the operation will be stored in the buffer The results of REL and or LIMITS are not stored If you started with a MATH function enabled only the result of the MATH calculation will be stored in the buffer if REL and or LIMITS is enabled If you started with REL and or LIMITS enabled you can change REL and or LIMITS The results of new REL and or LIMITS are stored in the buffer r Range Digits Speed and Filters e Range and digits Discusses maximum readings ranging limitations manual and autoranging and display resolution e Speed Discusses speed settings which are used to control the integra tion period of the A D converter e Filters Provides information on the two types of digital filtering that can be used to reduce reading noise 7 2 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range and digits Range The selected measurement range affects the accuracy of the measurements as well as the maximum signal that can be measured Note that with the output off dashed lines are displayed i e UA to indicate that measurements are not being performed Maximum readings The full scale input for each voltage current and auto ohms
388. nfiguration menus and rules to navigate menus Main menu Use the MENU key to access the Main Menu to select configure and or perform various instrument operations The overall Main Menu structure is summarized in Table 1 3 Use the Rules to navigate menus to check and or change Main Menu options 1 20 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 1 3 Main menu Menu item Description Parameters SAVESETUP Configure setup conditions GLOBAL Control instrument settings SAVE Save present SourceMeter setup to memory location 0 to 4 RESTORE Return the SourceMeter to setup saved in memory 0 to 4 POWERON Select the power on default setup BENCH Powers on to BENCH defaults See Table 1 2 GPIB Powers on to GPIB defaults See Table 1 2 USER SETUP NUMBER Powers on to user setup 0 to 4 RESET Returns unit to BENCH or GPIB defaults See Table 1 2 SOURCE MEMORY Control memory sweep source setup configurations SAVE Save present setup configuration to memory location 1 to 100 RESTORE Return to configuration saved in memory location 1 to 100 COMMUNICATION Select and configure remote interface GPIB Select GPIB IEEE 488 Bus set primary address and 0 to 30 GPIB protocol Default 24 RS 232 Select the RS 232 interface set parameters BAUD Select baud rate 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 BITS Select number of data bits 7or8 PARITY Select parity NONE ODD EVEN TERMINATOR Select term
389. ng and reading registers Explains how to program enable registers and read any register in the status structure Status byte and service request SRQ Explains how to program the Status Byte to generate service requests SRQs Shows how to use the serial poll sequence to detect SRQs Status register sets Provides bit identification and command informa tion for the four status register sets Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Measurement Event Status and Questionable Event Status Queues Provides details and command information on the Output Queue and Error Queue 15 2 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Overview The SourceMeter provides a series of status registers and queues allowing the operator to monitor and manipulate the various instrument events The status structure is shown in Figure 15 1 The heart of the status structure is the Status Byte Register This register can be read by the user s test program to determine if a service request SRQ has occurred and what event caused it Status byte and SRQ The Status Byte Register receives the summary bits of four status register sets and two queues The register sets and queues monitor the various instrument events When an enabled event occurs it sets a summary bit in the Status Byte Register When a summary bit of the Status Byte is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the RQS MSS bit will se
390. ng conversions The first nine filtered readings are calculated using copied reading conversions NOTE Sweeping with moving average filter enabled is not recommended as it may yield incorrect results The desired readings may be changing with the sweep source values and these changes can be skewed by the aver aging technique Response time considerations The filter averaging mode and count affect the overall reading speed The moving averaging filter is much faster than the repeat averaging filter because the unit does not have to refill the filter stack for each reading Also the number of read ings averaged will affect reading speed as the number of readings averaged increases the reading speed decreases 7 10 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel filter control Configuring filter Filter type and count is configured from the CONFIGURE FILTERING menu and is structured as shown in Figure 7 2 Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change the filter configuration CONFIGURE FILTERING menu Press CONFIG and then FILTER to display the menu e AVERAGING MODE Use this menu item to select filter type MOVING or REPEAT e AVERAGE COUNT Use this menu item to specify filter count 1 to 100 readings NOTE The configured filter is the same for all measurement functions Enabling filter The filter is enabled by pressing the FILTER key The Filter
391. ng must be selected from the SENSE MODE option of the CONFIGURE V SOURCE menu For remote sensing Figure 2 3 4 wire 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 7 sensing must be selected The 2 wire sense mode is the BENCH and GPIB default See Sense selection page 2 12 for details 4 wire remote sensing When sourcing and or measuring voltage there can be errors associated with IR drops in the test leads Voltage source and measure accuracy are optimized by using 4 wire remote sense connections When sourcing voltage 4 wire remote sensing ensures that the programmed voltage is delivered to the DUT When measuring voltage only the voltage drop across the DUT is measured Use 4 wire remote sensing for the following source measure conditions e Test circuit impedance is lt 1kQ Optimum Ohms V Source and or V Measure accuracy are required NOTE Specified accuracies for both source and measure are only achieved using 4 wire remote sensing WARNING When sourcing voltage in remote sense make sure the sense leads are connected to the DUT If a sense lead becomes dis connected OV will be sensed and the SourceMeter will increase the output voltage to possibly hazardous levels to compensate For increased safety you can limit the voltage output by the SourceMeter See Section 3 V source protec tion to limit the output voltage level NOTE When the output is turned off in the 4 wire sense mode the sense
392. nimum pulse width that will occur On the 10A range source or measure the pulse width can be set up to 5ms however it will be limited to 2 5ms NOTE See Section 5 for details on Model 2430 Pulse Mode DELay lt n gt SOURce 1 PULSe DELay lt n gt Specify pulse delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 9999 99900 Specify pulse delay in seconds MINimum 0 seconds MAXimum 9999 999 seconds DEFault 0 seconds Query DELay Query pulse width DELay DEFault Query RST default pulse width DELay MINimum Query lowest allowable pulse width DELay MAXimum Query highest allowable pulse width Description This command is used to set the pulse delay for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode The pulse delay occurs during the off time of the pulse period and is used to adjust the duty cycle NOTE See Section 5 for details on Model 2430 Pulse Mode 18 98 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SOURce2 The following commands are used to set the logic level of the digital output lines and control the pulse width of limit test output patterns that are sent to component han dlers Limit tests are configured and controlled from the CALCulate2 Subsystem For details on limit testing see Section 12 Limit Testing NOTE All the SOURce2 commands are invalid for the Model 2401 and will cause undefined header errors Setting digital output LEVel lt NRf gt lt NDN gt SOURce2 TTL LEVel DEFault lt NRf gt lt NDN
393. ns the calculation will yield one result every 10 SDM cycles The fourth voltage reading vector 3 and the 10th volt age reading vector 9 are used for the calculation Now assume that the SourceMeter is configured to perform 20 source measure operations Since the vector size is still 10 two 10 reading arrays will be created The calculation will now yield two results one for each array The first result as before is based on the fourth and 10th readings of the first array The second result is based on the 14th and 20th read ings These are the fourth vector 3 and 10th vector 9 readings of the second array Note that you need complete vector arrays to acquire valid calcula tion results If in the preceding example the SourceMeter is changed to perform 25 source measure operations then the third array will be incomplete first array is 10 readings second array is 10 readings third array is only 5 readings After the SourceMeter goes back into idle the Insufficient vector data error message will be dis played and the third result will be NAN 9 91e37 To avoid incomplete vector arrays make sure the programmed num ber of source measure operations arm count x trigger count is a multiple of the vector array size In the preceding example vector array size is 10 Thus in order to avoid Insufficient vector data errors the programmed number of source measure operations has to be a multiple of 10
394. ns circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety approvals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g a data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled according to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing Table of contents Section Title Page 1 Getting Started General information 2 ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 2 Contact information cccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 1 2 Manual addenda ais sccicitaeccrvaeiececessened ceeds saan a
395. nt measure select the appropriate current range in this case 10mA press REL and note the system noise magnitude In the example the system noise current component was measured as 00 0000mA 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 11 Ohms source readback NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode ohms source readback cannot be enabled With ohms source readback enabled the instrument measures the actual source value instead of the programmed value used for ohms measurements and then uses that measured value for reading calculations Normally ohms source read back should be left enabled for optimum ohms measurement accuracy because SourceMeter measurement accuracy is better than source programming accu racy See specifications in Appendix A However disabling source readback will allow you to make valid ohms measurements with the source in compliance See Section 6 Source measure and source V measure V for more details Ohms source readback selection Use the following procedure to enable or disable ohms source readback 1 Press CONFIG then Q 2 Select SRC RDBK then press ENTER 3 Select DISABLE or ENABLE as desired then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display NOTE Readings in the compliance field will be invalid with source readback dis abled 4 12 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 6 wire ohms measurements The 6 wire ohms measurement configuration
396. nt setting of the selected source V Source or Source A compliance limit acts as a power limiter to the DUT and is set to protect the DUT from damaging currents or voltages When using the V Source a current compliance is set When using the I Source a voltage compliance is set Compliance defines the maximum absolute value the SourceMeter can output Note that compliance can also be determined by the measurement range Depending on which value is lower compliance occurs at the programmed value real compliance or at the maximum compliance value for the present fixed mea surement range range compliance For example with compliance set to 2V and the 200mV measurement range selected compliance will occur at 210mV On the 20V measurement range compliance will occur at 2V See Section 6 Compli ance limit for details on real and range compliance NOTE The SourceMeter must be in the edit mode EDIT annunciator ON to set source and compliance values The edit mode is selected by pressing the EDIT key The flashing digit for the source or compliance reading indicates that the SourceMeter is in the edit mode If no editing operation 3 16 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual is performed within six seconds the edit mode times out and is cancelled To return to the edit mode press EDIT again While in the edit mode the EDIT key toggles between the source value and the compliance value The SO
397. nt when the OUTPUT is ON To prevent damage to DUT devices under test or external cir cuitry DO NOT program the V Source to levels that exceed the voltage protection limit Use caution when floating the SourceMeter gt 30V rms Front panel V source protection To program V source protection from the front panel PoONs gt Press CONFIG then SOURCE V Select PROTECTION from the displayed choices then press ENTER Select the desired protection value then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote command V source protection Use the SOURce VOLTage PROTection command to program the V source pro tection value via remote See Section 18 Set voltage limit for details For exam ple the following command sets the protection value for the Model 2400 or 2410 to 20V SOUR VOLT PROT 20 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source delay Basic Source Measure Operation 3 13 NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The following information assumes that the Model 2430 is in the DC Mode of operation Vpls or Ipls displayed To select the DC Mode press CONFIG and then SOURCE V or I select SHAPE from the available menu items and then select DC The source delay options are used to set the settling time for the source This source delay is the delay phase of the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle See Section 6 The auto delay option is used to automatically se
398. nted measurement commands The CONFigure lt function gt and MEASure lt function gt commands are invalid and cause error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode These commands are documented in Section 17 6 source Measure Concepts e Compliance limit Discusses compliance limit including real and range compliances maximum compliance values and how to determine compli ance limit e Overheating protection Provides information on preventing SourceMe ter overheating including power equations e Source delay measure cycle Describes the various phases of the source delay measure cycle as well as sweep waveforms e Operating boundaries Covers voltage and current operating bound aries for source and sink operation source and V source and source measure modes e Basic circuit configurations Covers basic circuit configurations for source source V and measure only operating modes e Guard Covers cable guard ohms guard and guard sense Data flow Describes measurement readings math rel and limits opera tion and how data is stored in the buffer 6 2 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Compliance limit When sourcing voltage the SourceMeter can be set to limit current Conversely when sourcing current the SourceMeter can be set to limit voltage The SourceM eter output will not exceed the compliance limit 2400 2400 LV 2401 Current limit can be set from
399. nterfaced to a handler via the Digital I O port as shown in Fig ure 12 6 The I O port has four lines for output signals Out 1 through Out 4 as well as input lines for start of test SOT and OE output enable signals The out put lines are used to send the limit test pass fail signal s to the handler to perform the binning operation Figure 12 6 Handler interface connections SourceMeter Handler O Line 3 ee O Line 4 EOT or BUSY Pa O Gnd J O OE O 5V Input SOT Digital O connector These digital I O lines are available at the DB 9 Digital I O connector on the rear panel of the SourceMeter A custom cable using a standard female DB 9 connec tor is required for connection to the SourceMeter See Section 13 Digital I O port for more information O SOT Strobe Line 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 11 Digital output lines The four output lines output a specific bit pattern based on the pass fail results of the various limit tests See Types of limits page 12 2 In the 3 bit output mode Line 4 can also be used either as an end of test EOT or BUSY signal depending on the END OF TEST mode See Configuring limit tests page 12 16 EOT or Busy Line In the 3 bit mode line 4 can be used to flag the handler when the digital I O lines may be read Depending on the type of handler present either BUSY or end of test EOT may be used These signals are
400. ntrol the measurement process These commands are summarized in Table 17 1 Table 17 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary Command Description CONFigure lt function gt Configures SourceMeter for measurements on specified function Output turns on CONFigure Returns active function s FETCh Requests latest readings READ Performs an INITiate and a FETCh MEASure lt function gt One shot measurement mode Performs a CONFigure and a READ Configuring measurement function NOTE For the Model 2430 the CONFigure commands are not valid while in the Pulse Mode They result in error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode CONFigure lt function gt Parameters lt function gt CURRent DC Amps function VOLTage DC Volts function RESistance Ohms function Query CONFigure Returns active function s Description This command configures the instrument to a specific setup for measurements on the specified function The READ command is then typically used to trigger a specified number of measure ments See READ When this command is sent the SourceMeter will be configured as follows e Select specified function All controls related to the selected function are defaulted to the RST values e The event control source of the Trigger Model is set to Imme diate 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 17 3 e The count values of t
401. number of data handle An invalid floating point number or symbol other than VOLT CURR RES or TIME appears in the math expression 814 Mismatched brackets Improper use of brackets for vectored math expression indices For example CALC1 MATH EXPR VOLT 0 CURRJ 0 generates this error 815 Too many parenthesis Too many closed parentheses were detected For example CALC1 MATH EXPR In VOLT generates this error 816 Entire expression not parsed Occurs when the input expression does not produce a function for the SourceMeter to calculate 817 Unknown token Attempted to define an expression using an invalid function name 818 Error parsing mantissa Occurs when a floating point number has an invalid mantissa 18 28 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 819 Error parsing exponent Occurs when a floating point number has an invalid exponent 820 Error parsing value Occurs when an invalid floating point num ber is entered 821 Invalid data handle index An invalid array index value was assigned to a vectored expression Array indices start at 0 and can be as high as 2499 Notes e Up to five user defined math expressions can be created e A selected math expression can only be performed if CALC1 is enabled See STATe lt b gt e When the math expression is vectored the math result will not be generated un
402. nversely the current is clamped at the compliance value when the SourceMeter is acting as a voltage source Note that range compliance cannot occur if the AUTO measure ment range is selected Thus to avoid range compliance use AUTO range NOTE For the Model 2430 AUTO range is not valid in the Pulse Mode When in real compliance the source clamps at the displayed compliance value For example if the compliance voltage is set to 1V and the measurement range is 2V output voltage will clamp at 1V In this case the CMPL annunciator will flash 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 3 When in range compliance the source output clamps at the maximum compliance value for the fixed measurement range not the compliance value For example if compliance is set to 1V and the measurement range is 200mV output voltage will clamp at 210mV In this situation the units in the compliance display field will flash For example with the following display Vcmpl 10mA the mA units indica tion will flash Maximum compliance values The maximum compliance values for the measurement ranges are summarized in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Compliance limits 2400 2400 LV 2401 2410 2420 Maximum Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V
403. o create Percent Deviation as a user defined math expression Concurrent measurements With the use of the TOGGLE key you can measure display two functions con currently Using remote operation you can perform concurrent measurements on all three functions voltage current and resistance See Section 18 SENSe1 subsystem for details NOTE For the Model 2430 concurrent measurements cannot be performed while in the Pulse Mode See Section 5 for details on Pulse Mode opera tion Local to remote transition When changing from local to remote operation the following actions occur e The SourceMeter stops performing source measure operations and returns to the idle state ARM annunciator off All sweep operations are aborted All menus are exited All pending front panel commands are aborted e Source and compliance editing are disabled e Data in the sample buffer is lost i e FETCh CALC1 DATA and CALC2 DATA will not return any data until readings are taken while in remote e Concurrent measurements are enabled All other settings are not affected including those for the TRACe buffer data store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 3 Remote to local transition When changing from remote to local operation the following actions occur e The SourceMeter stops performing source measure operations and returns to the idle state ARM annunciator off All sweep
404. o three Three 10 point sweeps can then be performed for a total of 30 source delay measure actions Refer to the examples at the end of this section The maximum buffer size for the SourceMeter is 2500 readings The product of the two counter values cannot exceed 2500 For example if you set an arm count of two the maximum trigger count will be 1250 2500 2 1250 However you can set the arm count to INFINITE With an infinite arm count the maximum trig ger count is 2500 NOTE When a sweep is configured the trigger model settings will not change until the sweep is started After the sweep is finished the trigger model will reset to the previous settings Output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger via rear panel Trigger Link connector after various trigger model operations An output trigger is used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation See Trigger link page 11 19 for more information Trigger Layer Output Triggers After each action Source Delay and Measure the SourceMeter can be programmed to send out an output trigger if Trigger Link is the selected Trigger In Source For example if the Trigger Out Event for Mea sure is ON an output trigger will be sent after the Measure action When used with a scanner an output trigger after each measurement can signal the scanner to select the next channel in the scan 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 7
405. ock 3 Turn on the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on 1 position Power up sequence On power up the SourceMeter performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momentarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE For the Model 2430 there is an internal bank of capacitors that need to charge While charging the message Charging capacitor bank please wait message will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds If a problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Keithley Instruments Inc for repair If the instrument passes the self tests the model number and the firmware revi sion levels are displayed For example REV A01 A02 where A01 is the main board ROM revision A02 is the display board ROM revision Also displayed is the line frequency If the wrong frequency is displayed it can be set manually as covered below The communication interface status is briefly dis played If the IEEE 488 bus is the presently selected interface the identification message will include the primary address For example if the primary address is 24 factory default the IEEE Addr 24 message is displayed If the RS 232 interface is selected the RS 232 message is displayed After the power up sequence the instrumen
406. of the drawer and replace it with the same type Appendix Table 1 1 4 Push the fuse drawer back into the power module Table 1 1 Power line fuse SourceMeter Fuse description Keithley part number 2400 2400 LV 2401 and 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 250V 2 5A 5 x 20mm 250V 3 15A 5 x 20mm FU 72 FU 106 3 15 1 12 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Cooling fan The Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 use a cooling fan to help keep them from overheating The Models 2400 and 2401 do not have a cooling fan In either case fan or no fan proper ventilation must be maintained to prevent overheating Refer to the WARNING CAUTION located at the beginning of Section 3 for details on maintaining proper ventilation Model 2410 Uses a constant speed fan that runs continuously while the power is on Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Uses a 3 speed fan With the OUTPUT ON the fan speed setting is determined by the present current range Source or measure 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 range Fan speed 10uA 100UA 1mA Low 50 10mA 100mA Medium 75 1A 3A 3A 10A 2430 High 100 1A 5A 2440 High 100 When the OUTPUT is turned OFF the fan will either run at the low speed or stay at the speed it was at when the output was on current range dependent This speed option is set from the FAN selection of the GENERAL MENU See
407. off lt name gt ALWAYS On off with each SDM cycle TCOunt Off after trigger count Query AUTO Query state of auto output off MODE Query mode Description This command is used to control auto output off for the source With auto output off enabled an INITiate or READ or MEASure will start source measure operation The output will turn on at the begin ning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each measurement is completed With auto output off disabled the source output must be on before an INITiate or READ can be used to start source measure opera tion The MEASure command will automatically turn on the source output Once operation is started the source output will stay on even after the instrument returns to the idle state Auto output off disabled is the RST and SYSTem PRESet default For the MODE command the source will turn off after every SDM cycle with the ALWAYS option With the TCOunt option the source will turn off when the trigger count has expired WARNING With auto output off disabled the source output will remain on after all programmed source measure operations are completed Beware of hazardous voltage that may be present on the output terminals NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled This command is ignored Select function modes SHAPe lt name gt Model 2430 only SOURce 1 FUNCtion SHAPe lt name gt Select output mode Parameters
408. off state with the output off the selected output off state will be entered immediately On power up the SourceMeter will momentarily be in the HIGH IMPED ANCE output off state before going to the selected power on output off state If an Over Temperature condition or an output enable line violation occurs the SourceMeter will go into the HIGH IMPEDANCE output off state Output off states and inductive loads The output off state you select for inductive loads depends on how much energy the inductor holds The NORMAL output off state is not recommended as it lowers the compliance setting The ZERO or possibly GUARD state are better suited as ZERO does not change the compliance setting and the GUARD output off state would change the voltage source to a current source with a voltage compliance The GUARD state is typically used only for guarded ohms measurements To protect the unit from inductive energy the application may require a spark gap across the INPUT HI and LO terminals The SourceMeter does not have internal spark gap protection as some leakage current nA is associated with the protection circuits Remote output configuration Output configuration commands Table 13 2 summarizes output configuration commands These commands include those to enable and disable the output enable line as well as commands to control output offstates See Section 18 OUTPut subsystem and SOURce subsystem for more information Ou
409. ohms mode 3 Select range RES RANG 20E3 Select 20kQ range SYST RSEN ON Enable 4 wire sensing FORM ELEM RES Resistance reading 4 Output on OUTP ON Turn on output 5 Get reading READ Trigger and acquire reading 6 Output off OUTP OFF Turn off output Numbers correspond to steps in Ohms measurement procedure procedure page 4 4 9 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only e Overview Provides a summary of Pulse Mode operation e Pulse characteristics Describes the timing characteristics that make up the pulse width and output off time of the pulse period Explains how to achieve the fastest pulse output e Pulse energy limitations 10A range Covers pulse energy consump tion limitations for the 10A source or measure range e Pulse Mode configuration Explains how to select and configure the fundamental aspects of Pulse Mode operation e Pulse measure considerations Explains the operational differences between normal DC Mode and Pulse Mode operation 5 2 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Overview NOTE The Pulse Mode is only available for the Model 2430 The documentation in this section does not apply to the Models 2400 2400 LV 2401 2410 2420 2425 and 2440 While in the Pulse Mode the Model 2430 can output one or more pulses A pulse is formed by turning the output on for a period of time and then turning the out
410. ommand is used to select the input path for the limit tests With CALCulate 1 selected the specified limits will be compared to the result of CALC1 With VOLTage selected limits will be compared to the voltage measurement With CURRent or RESistance selected limits will be compared with the respective current or resistance mea surement 18 34 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Null feed reading OFFSet lt n gt CALCulate2 NULL OFF Set lt n gt Specify null offset REL for feed Parameters lt n gt 9 999999e20 to Specify null offset value 9 999999e20 Query OFFSet Query null offset value Description This command lets you establish a null offset REL for the selected feed When Null Offset is enabled the result is the algebraic differ ence between the feed reading and the offset value CALC2 reading feed reading null offset ACQuire CALCulate2 NULL ACQuire Automatically acquire REL value Description This command automatically acquires the null offset value If no reading is available then the next available reading will become the null offset value STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 NULL STATe lt b gt Control null offset Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable null offset 0 or OFF Disable null offset Query STATe Query state of null offset Description This command is used to enable or disable null offset When enabled the CALC2 reading will include the null offset value See OFFS
411. ompensated ohms SENSe 1 RESistance OCOMpensated Enable disable filter SENSe 1 AVERage STATe Filter type SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol Filter count SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt 2430 pulse function SOURce 1 FUNCtion SHAPe Source mode SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE Source delayt SOURce 1 DELay Source auto delayt SOURce 1 DELay AUTO Scaling factor SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor Enable disable scaling SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor STATe 2430 pulse width SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh 2430 pulse delay SOURce 1 PULSe DELay Source Value Range Auto Range Sense Protection Range Auto Range Enable disable auto zero SYSTem AZERo STATe Enable disable remote sense SYSTem RSENse Front rear terminals ROUTe TERMinals Enable disable CALC1 CALCulate1 STATe CALC1 math expression CALCulate1 MATH EXPRession NAME CALC2 input path CALCulate2 FEED REL value CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet REL on off CALCulate2 NULL STATe Limit 1 on off CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe Limit 1 fail conditions CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL 10 10 Sweep Operation Table 10 2 cont 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source memory saved configurations Mode Remote command Limit 1 bit pattern Enable disable Limit X Limit X upper limit Limit X upper bit pattern Limit X lower limit Limit X lower bit pattern Composite limits bit pattern Next pass memory location Trigger delayt Guard type CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMit
412. ompliance limit See Section 18 Set compliance parameters for more details on these commands To program the compliance simply send the command using the desired parame ter For example the following command sets the current compliance to 50mA SENS CURR PROT 50E 3 Similarly the following command sets the voltage compliance to 4V SENS VOLT PROT 4 Table 3 3 Compliance commands Command Description SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt Set current compliance n compliance SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt Set voltage compliance n compliance 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 9 Basic circuit configurations The fundamental source measure configurations for the SourceMeter are shown in Figure 3 1 When sourcing voltage you can measure current or voltage config uration A When sourcing current you can measure voltage or current configura tion B See Section 6 Basic circuit configurations for more detailed information on these circuit configurations Figure 3 1 Fundamental source measure configuration A Source V Source B Source 3 10 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Operation considerations The following paragraphs discuss warm up period auto zero V source protection and source delay Warm up The SourceMeter must be turned on and allowed to warm up for at least
413. ompted to enter the START and STOP levels and specify the number of measurement points CUSTOM With the custom sweep selected you specify the number of measurement points POINTS in the sweep and the source level at each point ADJUST POINTS With the INIT option you can set a consecutive range of measurement points in the sweep to a specific level For example assume that for a 20 point custom voltage sweep POINTS 20 you want points 10 through 15 to be set for 1V After selecting the INIT option set the VALUE to 1 000000V set the START PT to 10 and set the STOP PT to 15 SRC MEMORY With the Source Memory Sweep selected you specify the memory location START point to start the sweep 1 is the default and the number of memory location points POINTS in the sweep When configured to sweep past point 100 the sweep automati cally wraps around to point 1 SWEEP COUNT Use this menu item to specify how many sweeps to perform FINITE Use this option to enter a discrete number of sweeps to per form with the results stored in the data store buffer The maximum num ber of finite sweeps that can be performed is determined as follows maximum finite sweep count 2500 Points in sweep INFINITE Select this option to continuously repeat the configured sweep Use the EXIT key to stop the sweep Data is not stored in the buffer 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 13 Figure 10 4 SOU
414. on DELay lt n gt lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto clear 1 or ON Enable auto clear AUTO Query auto clear This command is used to enable or disable auto clear for the digital output lines When enabled the output pattern will clear automati cally after the pass or fail output bit pattern of a limit test is sent to a handler via the digital output lines The DELay command specifies the pulse width of the limit test bit pattern See next command After the delay period times out the digital output clears back to the output pattern programmed by the TTL LEVel command When auto clear is disabled the digital output pattern can only be cleared by the IMMediate command On power up auto clear is enabled See CALCulate2 subsystem and Section 12 Limit Testing for details on limit tests SOURce2 CLEar AUTO DELay lt n gt Set delay for auto clear Parameters Query Description lt n gt 0 to 60 Specify delay in seconds DEFault 100usec delay MINimum 0 sec MAXimum 60 sec DELay Query delay DELay DEFault Query RST default delay DELay MINimum Query lowest allowable delay DELay MAXimum Query maximum allowable delay This command is used to set the delay for digital output auto clear This delay determines the pulse width of the limit test output pattern as required by the handler After the delay the output returns clears to the pattern programmed by the TTL LEVel command The del
415. on before performing the initiation WARNING With auto output off disabled the source output will remain on after all programmed source measure operations are completed Beware of hazardous voltage gt 30VDC 42 4 peak to peak that may be present on the output terminals With auto output off enabled an initiation will start operation immedi ately The source output will automatically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each measurement is completed Abort source measure cycle ABORt Abort operation Description When this action command is sent the SourceMeter aborts opera tion and returns to the idle state A faster way to return to idle is to use the DCL or SDC command With auto output off enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON the out put will remain on if operation is terminated before the output has a chance to automatically turn off Program trigger model COUNt lt n gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt n gt Set arm count TRIGger SEQuence 1 COUNt lt n gt Set trigger count Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify count see NOTE DEFault Sets count to 1 MINimum Sets count to 1 MAXimum See NOTE INFinite ARM COUNt only 18 118 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE The product of arm count and trigger count cannot exceed 2500 Query Description COUNt Queries programmed count COUNt DEFault Queries RST default count
416. operations are aborted All user defined display messages are cancelled e The display is turned on if it was previously turned off e Source autoranging is disabled e Concurrent measurements are enabled e If resistance was enabled source readback is enabled e The display is set to the default toggle state e Readings are continuously taken if OUTPUT is on Selecting an interface The SourceMeter supports two built in remote interfaces e GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus e RS 232 interface You can use only one interface at a time The factory interface selection is the GPIB bus You can select the interface only from the front panel The interface selection is stored in non volatile memory it does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 interface You must select a unique address for the Source Meter The address is displayed when the instrument is turned on At the factory the address is set to 24 The RS 232 interface is a serial interface An interface is selected and configured from the COMMUNICATIONS option of the Main Menu Section 1 Main menu For details on the programmable aspects of the interfaces see Primary address page 14 4 and RS 232 inter face operation page 14 13 NOTE When changing interface selections the SourceMeter performs a power on reset To check and or change options of the selected interface you must re
417. or OFF disables the operation Upper case characters indicate the short form version for each command word Default Parameter Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRE Set defaults unless noted otherwise Notes are located at the end of each table SCPI A checkmark v indicates that the command and its parameters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is a SCPI command but does not conform to the SCPI standard set of commands It is not a recog nized command by the SCPI consortium SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parameters are explained by notes Source Memory A checkmark v indicates that the parameters associated with the specified command are saved in any one of 100 memory locations by the SOURce 1 MEMory SAVE command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 3 Table 18 1 CALCulate command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate 1 Subsystem to control CALC1 v MATH Path to configure and control math v expressions EXPRession lt form gt Define math expression using standard v math operator symbols EXPRession Query math expression v CATalog Query list of math expression names v NAME lt name gt Create name for new user defined Power v v expression NAME Query created name y DEFine lt form gt Same as EXPRession lt form gt v command DELete Path to delete user defined expres
418. our computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem Figure 14 1 RS 232 interface connector RS232 54321 gt s e 9876 Rear Panel Connector 14 16 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 14 2 RS 232 connector pinout Pin numbezr Description Not used TXD transmit data RXD receive data Not used GND signal ground Not used RTS ready to send CTS clear to send Not used OONDABRWNDY NOTE CTA and RTS are tied together Table 14 3 provides pinout identification for the 9 pin DB 9 or 25 pin DB 25 serial port connector on the computer PC Remote Operations 14 17 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 14 3 PC serial port pinout Signal DB 9 pin number DB 25 pin number DCD data carrier detect RXD receive data TXD transmit data DTR data terminal ready GND signal ground DSR data set ready RTS request to send CTS clear to send RI ring indicator OONDARWHDH NRarkoanNnwo Error messages See Appendix B for RS 232 error messages 15 Status Structure Overview Provides an operational overview of the status structure for the SourceMeter Clearing registers and queues Covers the actions that clear reset registers and queues Programmi
419. ource values are appended to the end of the list By using multiple appended lists up to 2500 points can be in a list SOURce 1 LIST CURRent POINts SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage POINts Description Query length of l Source list Query length of V Source list This command is used to determine the length of the specified source list The response message indicates the number of source values in the list 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 93 STARt lt n gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent STARt lt n gt Set current list start point SOURce 1 LIST VOLTaget STARt lt n gt Set voltage list start point Parameters lt n gt 1 to 100 Set start point of list sweep MINimum 1 MAXimum 100 DEFault 1 Description These commands set the starting point in the current or voltage list sweep The lt n gt parameter is 1 based and it must be less than or equal to the number of points in the sweep The new starting location will only be used when the direction of the sweep is up SOUR LIST CURR DIR UP for example Changing the direction to down will make the sweep start at the last point in the list but the starting point will be restored when the direction is changed to up If the sweep reaches the end of the list the sweep will continue from the first point in the list The starting points for voltage and current sweeps are saved separately and are part of a user saved setup Configure memory sweep A memor
420. output voltage v LEVel lt NRf gt Specify voltage limit level Note 2 v LEVel Query voltage limit y TRIPped Voltage limit detected 1 yes 0 no v STARt lt n gt Specify start level for V sweep 0 v STARt Query start level for voltage sweep v STOP lt n gt Specify stop level for V sweep 1 0 v STOP Query stop level for voltage sweep v STEP lt n gt Specify step value for V sweep 1 0 STEP Query step value for voltage sweep SPAN lt n gt Specify span 0 v SPAN Query span v CENTer lt n gt Specify center point 0 v CENTer Query center point v SOAK lt NRf gt Set first sweep point soak time 0 00000 to 0 00000 v 9999 999s SOAK Query soak time y 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed infor mation on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2 SYSTem PRESet default is 40 RST default is NONE 3 If source V is active 18 18 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 SWEep Configure SWEep source mode v SPACing lt name gt Select sweep spacing type LINear or LiNear v LOGarithmic SPACing Query sweep spacing v POINts lt n gt Specify number of sweep points 2 to 2500 v 2500 POINts Q
421. pecified source will output a fixed level Use the RANGe and AMPLitude commands to specify the fixed source level See Select range page 18 74 and Set amplitude for fixed source page 18 77 LIST In this mode the source will output levels that are specified in a list See Configure list for commands to define and control the execution of the list SWEep In this mode the source will perform a voltage current or memory sweep See Configure voltage and current sweeps page 18 83 and Configure memory sweep page 18 93 for com mands to define the sweep NOTE The sourcing mode will default to FIXed whenever the SourceMeter goes to the local state 18 74 SCPI Command Reference Select range RANGe lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent RANGe lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Parameters 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select range for Source Select range for V Source Specify Source level amps Specify V Source level volts 21 to 21 for 2400 LV and 2401 100A range I Source 20V range V Source 1yA range I Source 200mV range V Source 20V range 2400 LV and 2401 1A range I Source 200V r
422. pecify SOURce2 data format ASCii ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BIN SOURce2 Query SOURce2 data format Note Byte order RST default is NORMal SYSTem PRESet default is SWAPped Table 18 4 OUTPut command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory OUTPut 1 y STATe lt b gt Turn source on or off OFF v STATe Query state of source v ENABIe Path to control output enable STATe lt b gt Enable or disable output enable OFF STATe Query state of output enable TRIPped Output enable tripped 1 no or 0 yes SMODe lt name gt Select output off mode HIMPedance NORMal NORMal2 v ZERO or GUARd SMODe Query output off mode 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off mode is always NORMal This command is invalid error 831 2 For the Model 2410 default is GUARd 18 10 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 5 ROUTe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory ROUTe TERMinals lt name gt Select in out terminals FRONt or REAR FRONt y v TERMinals Query in out terminals 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 11 Table 18 6 SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 Sense 1 Subsystem v DATA Path to SENSe 1 data y LATest Return only most recent reading FUNCtion Se
423. perating within the trigger model ARM indicator on most commands will not be executed until the SourceMeter completes all of its programmed source measure operations and returns to the idle state The IFC interface clear SDC selected device clear and DCL device clear commands can be executed under any circumstance while operating within the trigger model They will abort any other command or query ABORt e SYSTem PRESet e TRG or GET e RST e RCL NOTE SDC DCL or ABORt place the SourceMeter in the idle state For fastest response use SDC or DCL to return to idle Event detection Once the instrument is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions In general operation is held up at an event detector until the programmed event occurs Note however that if an event detector has a bypass DIRection opera tion can be programmed to loop around the event detector Arm layer Event D etector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 3 there is a bypass ARM DIRec tion for the Arm Event Detector This bypass can only be used if TLINk NSTest PSTest or BSTest is the selected Arm In Event The bypass serves to jump start operation With the bypass set to SOURCce operation will loop around the Arm Event Detector when an INITiate command is sent assuming the output is turned ON The programmable arm in events for the Arm Layer are described as fol
424. peration Note that in quadrants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 1A range are derated as fol lows 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 11 If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 3 Model 2410 and 2420 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2410 and Model 2420 are shown in Figure 6 4 and Figure 6 5 Figure 6 3 Model 2400 2400 LV 2401 operating boundaries Tmp 30 C l III Source 2400 LV and 2401 2400 LV 7 and 2401 100 Duty I 60 Duty Cycle 6 12 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 4 Model 2410 operating boundaries Tmp 30 C I Source III Source 100 DutyCycle _ lt 60 Duty Cycle 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 13 Figure 6 5 Model 2420 operating boundaries Tp 30 C I Source III Source 100 Duty Cycle lt 60 Duty Cycle Models 2425 and 2430 SourceMeters The general operating boundaries for the Models 2425 and 2430 are shown in Figure 6 6 The boundaries for the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode are shown in Figure 6 6A and the boundaries for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode are shown in Figur
425. ptions Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change trigger options ARM LAYER Use this menu item to configure the arm layer of the trigger model ARMIN Use to select the detection event for the arm layer IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately 11 8 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMER Initially event detection is satisfied immediately Subse quent event detection occurs after the timer interval elapses After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to specify the timer interval in seconds MANUAL Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is pressed TLINK After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the input line for the Trigger Link and the state of the event detection bypass With ONCE selected operation will loop around the arm event detector on each new pass through the trigger model With NEVER selected operation always waits for the input trigger ISTEST Event detection occurs when the SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detection bypass With ONCE selected operation will loop around the arm event detector on each new pass through the trigger model With NEVER selected operation always waits for the input trigger T STEST Event d
426. put off OV or OA A single pulse period is shown in Figure 5 1 The Model 2430 can output current pulses up to 10 5A at 105V or voltage pulses up to 105V at 10 5A Pulse output polarity can be positive or negative While in the fixed source mode the output will alternate between the set pulse level and zero OV or 0A When performing a sweep the output will alternate between each sweep step point and zero See Section 10 for details on sweep operation A pulse reading is only performed while the output is on When the output is off OV or OA a reading is not performed For remote operation the pulse reading can be disabled Auto and manual ohms measurements can be performed while in the Pulse Mode Also offset compensated ohms is available as a math function FCTN However ohms source readback cannot be enabled in Pulse Mode Figure 5 1 Pulse period Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time gt OV or OA i lt Pulse Period gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 3 Pulse characteristics NOTE For the purpose of discussion positive polarity pulses are shown in the following illustrations Keep in mind that the Model 2430 can output neg ative pulses As shown in Figure 5 1 a pulse period consists of an output on time pulse width and an output off time Depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width can be as shor
427. quired 7 4 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the delay phase of the first SDM cycle after an initial sweep trigger See Figure 11 1 for an overview of the trigger model Selecting the auto range change mode To configure the auto range change mode press CONFIG then AUTO Choose SINGLE SRC MTR or MULTIPLE as desired from the AUTO RANGE TYPE menu If you choose MULTIPLE you will also be prompted to enter the SOAK time which can be programmed in the range of 0 000s to 9999 999s Auto range limits Auto range limits are included to support the auto range change mode For volt age and current the upper limit is controlled by the compliance range and cannot be programmed For the auto ohms mode however the lower limit is adjustable The lower limit for all three functions is programmable and must be less than or equal to the upper limit If the lower limit is equal to the upper limit auto ranging is effectively disabled When auto ranging is disabled you can manually change to any range below the lower limit V or Ohms or any range above the upper limit Ohms only Setting auto range limits To set the upper or lower auto range limit press CONFIG or CONFIG f respec tively then use the s and o keys to set the limit at the ULIMIT or LLIMIT prompt Remember that you cannot set the upper limit in the V and modes but the unit wil
428. r User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 27 Table 10 9 provides a typical remote command sequence for performing the 3 point Pulse Model linear staircase sweep shown in Figure 10 5 Table 10 9 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SOUR FUNC PULS Select Pulse Mode SOUR PULS WIDT 0 005 5ms pulse width SOUR PULS DEL 0 003 3ms pulse delay SENS VOLT NPLC 0 1 Measure speed 0 1 PLC TRIG COUN 3 Pulse count sweep points SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function SENS FUNC CURR Current sense function 1 SENS CURR PROT 0 1 100mA current compliance SOUR VOLT START 1 1V start voltage SOUR VOLT STOP 3 3V stop voltage SOUR VOLT STEP 1 1V step voltage SOUR VOLT MODE SWE Select volts sweep mode READ Trigger sweep request data 1 These commands are not required in this case since unit assumes these operating states after RST but are included to demonstrate complete pro gramming steps 2 Trigger count should equal number of points in sweep Points Stop Start Step 1 You can use SOUR SWE POIN query to read the number of points 3 This command should normally be sent after START STOP and STEP to avoid delays caused by rebuilding sweep when each command is sent 11 Triggering Front panel trigger operation Discusses front panel triggering includ ing the trigger model various layers event detection delay
429. r NEXT next location Specify fail source memory location Location NRf memory or NEXT next location Control I O port pass fail update Name IMMediate at failure or END end of sweep Clear test results reset I O port Enable disable auto clear state ON or OFF Select Digital I O control mode name GRADing or SORTing LIMitX LIMit2 LIMit3 LIMit5 through LIMit12 LIMit4 Contact check option not shown see Table 18 1 and Appendix F 12 22 Limit Testing Table 12 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Commands to control Digital I O port for limit testing not valid for the Model 2401 Command SOURce2 BSIZe lt n gt SOURce2 TTL lt NRf gt lt NDN gt SOURce2 TTL SOURce2 TTL4 MODE lt name gt SOURce2 TTL4 BSTate lt state gt SOURce2 CLEar SOURce2 CLEar AUTO lt state gt Description Set Digital I O port bit size n 3 or 4 Set I O port bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Query actual output pattern Set Digital I O line 4 mode name EOTest or BUSY Set BUSY and EOT polarity HI or LO Clear digital output lines Enable disable I O port auto clear state ON or OFF SOURce2 CLEar AUTO DELay lt n gt _ Set auto clear delay n delay Table 12 3 Invalid limit commands for the Model 2401 Command Description CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer SOURce2 lt NRf gt
430. r has an over temperature protection circuit that will turn the out put off in the event that the SourceMeter overheats If the output trips due to over heating a message indicating this condition will be displayed You will not be able to turn the output back on until the SourceMeter cools down NOTE Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 The cooling fan will run at high speed while in the overheated state CAUTION Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 If after 90 seconds the SourceMeter is still overheated the OVER TEMP FAILURE message may appear In that event turn off the SourceMeter immediately and allow it to cool for 30 minutes With the SourceMeter off check all the cooling vents to make sure they are not blocked DO NOT touch the heat sink as it may be hot enough to cause burns After turning the SourceMeter back on verify that the cooling fan is running If the failure message persists contact Keithley to facilitate repairs Leaving the SourceMeter on with the failure message displayed may result in damage to the unit Overheating conditions Assuming proper ventilation is maintained the SourceMeter will not overheat and subsequently turn off the output when the SourceMeter is operating as a source not sink and the ambient temperature is 30 C Above 30 C for both source and sink operation the SourceMeter will not over heat if the high power range s is not used For the Models 2400 and 2410 the high po
431. r of measurement points in the sweep and the source level at each point When this sweep is started the output goes from the bias level to the first source measure point in the sweep The sweep will continue through the source measure points in the order they were programmed and stop after the last source measure point With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC set ting This delay is the same for all sweep points Source memory sweep For a source memory sweep up to 100 setup configurations can be saved in memory When the sweep is performed the setup at each memory point is recalled This allows multiple functions and math expressions to be used in a sweep For example the first point in a source memory sweep may source volt age and measure current the next point may source current and measure volt age the third point may source voltage and measure voltage and the last point may use a math expression This feature allows you to customize each sweep point with specific instrument settings instead of being tied to one set of settings for all sweep points Once source memory setups are saved and the sweep is initiated the SourceMe ter then sequences through the setups very rapidly This feature allows you to use the instrument as a fast automatic test sequencer NOTE NPLC caching can be used to speed up source memory sweeps
432. range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y Vai AUTO Query auto range v ULIMit Returns compliance range y LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit 105e 6 1e 6 y to 105e 6 LLIMit Query auto ranging lower limit y NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 y vt 0 01 to 10 3 NPLCycles Query integration rate y PROTection Path to configure current compliance y LEVel lt n gt Specify current limit for V Source 1 1 05e 4 y va LEVel Query current compliance limit y TRIPped In current compliance 1 yes 0 no y RSYNchronize lt b gt Enable or disable measure and OFF compliance range synchronization RSYNchronize Query range synchronization VOLTage DC Path to configure volts y RANGe Configure measurement range y UPPer Select range by specifying the expected 21 y s5 lt n gt UP DOWN voltage reading UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y s5 AUTO Query auto range y ULIMit Returns V compliance range y LLIMit lt n gt Set auto range lower limit 0 21 y LLIMIt Query auto range lower limit y NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 y s5 0 01 to 10 3 NPLCycles Query integration rate y PROTection Path to configure voltage compliance y LEVel lt n gt Specify voltage limit for l Source 1 21 v s5 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command r
433. ration is selected Vsrc or Isrc dis played in the source field If in the Pulse Mode Vpls or Ipls dis played you can select the DC Mode by pressing CONFIG V or I selecting the SHAPE menu item and then selecting DC Pulse Mode operation is covered in Section 5 There are two methods to measure ohms auto ohms and manual ohms When using auto ohms the SourceMeter operates as a conventional constant current source ohmmeter or DMM To use this method simply select an ohms measure ment range or use autorange and take the reading from the display When using auto ohms the default test current varies with the ohms range as summa rized in Table 4 1 NOTE You cannot change the test current in the auto ohms mode If you attempt to change the source current in auto ohms the SourceMeter will display an error message With the manual ohms mode you can select either source V or source to make ohms measurements and the unit will automatically compute the resistance read ing using the V I measurement method After configuring the desired source and selecting a voltage or current measuring range select the Q measurement method to display the calculated V I ohms reading NOTE To achieve optimum accuracy the SourceMeter measures both V and I and uses these values in ohms calculations with source readback enabled The measured source value is more accurate than the pro grammed source value For remote operation t
434. rd Event 5 114 Header suffix out of range EE Standard Event 5 113 Undefined header EE Standard Event 5 112 Program mnemonic too long EE Standard Event 5 111 Header separator error EE Standard Event 5 110 Command header error EE Standard Event 5 109 Missing parameter EE Standard Event 5 108 Parameter not allowed EE Standard Event 5 105 GET not allowed EE Standard Event 5 104 Data type error EE Standard Event 5 103 Invalid separator EE Standard Event 5 102 Syntax error EE Standard Event 5 101 Invalid character EE Standard Event 5 100 Command error EE Standard Event 5 000 No error SE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 5 Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Error message Event Status register Bit Measurement events 100 Limit 1 failed SE Measurement Event 0 101 Low limit 2 failed SE Measurement Event 1 102 High limit 2 failed SE Measurement Event 2 103 Low limit 3 failed SE Measurement Event 3 104 High limit 3 failed SE Measurement Event 4 105 Active limit tests passed SE Measurement Event 5 106 Reading available SE Measurement Event 6 107 Reading overflow SE Measurement Event 7 108 Buffer available SE Measurement Event 8 109 Buffer full SE Measurement Event 9 110 Limit 4 failed SE Measurement Event 10 111 OUTPUT enable asserted SE Measurement Event 11 112 Temperature limit exceeded SE Measurement Event 12 113 Voltage limit exceed
435. re will not be recalled and no further contact checks will be performed until the end of the sweep points If the sweep is to be repeated the new sweep will start with a contact check and normal measurement operation will resume Auto clear on immediate binning Bin control at end of each point sweep CALC2 CLLM BCON IMM If contact check detects an open lead the output is not turned on for that particu lar location and that sweep point is not recalled and will be skipped The sweep proceeds to the next sweep point and a contact check test is performed Auto clear off end binning Source auto clear off SOUR CLE AUTO OFF Bin control occurring at end of sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON END The output is kept on throughout the entire sweep If an open lead is found during the sweep the output is turned off no more contacts are checked sweep memory locations are not recalled and triggers are maintained until the last sweep point If multiples of the same sweep are desired the following sweep after the open lead 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 11 will start with a contact check for each sweep point and normal measurement operation if no other failures occur Auto clear off immediate binning Bin control at end of each point is sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON IMM The output will remain on between each sweep point if no contact check failure occurs If a contact check failure occurs before the execution of a s
436. re 6 14 Source o GUARD o GUARD SENSE IN OUT HI Remote o SENSEHI l Source oRemote o SENSE LO Local IN OUT LO Source V When configured to source voltage V Source as shown in Figure 6 15 the SourceMeter functions as a low impedance voltage source with current limit capa bility and can measure current l Meter or voltage V Meter Sense circuitry is used to continuously monitor the output voltage and make adjustments to the V Source as needed The V Meter senses the voltage at the Input Output terminals 2 wire local sense or at the DUT 4 wire remote sense using the sense terminals and compares it to the programmed voltage level If the sensed level and the programmed value are not the same the V Source is adjusted accordingly Remote sense eliminates the effect of voltage drops in the test leads ensuring that the exact programmed voltage appears at the DUT NOTE The voltage error feedback to the V Source is an analog function The source error amplifier is used to compensate for IR drop in the test leads 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 25 Figure 6 15 Source V o GUARD o GUARD SENSE IN OUT HI SEN SE HI Sense Output Adjust V Source Feedback SEN SE LO o IN OUT LO Measure only V or I Figure 6 16 shows the configurations for using the SourceMeter exclusively as a voltmeter or ammeter As shown in Figure 6 16A the SourceMeter is configured to
437. re only programming example Step Action Commands Comments RST Restore GPIB defaults 1 Select measure source functions SOUR FUNC CURR Current source function SOUR CURR MODE FIXED Fixed current source mode SENS FUNC VOLT Volts measure function 2 Set source and compliance SOUR CURR RANG MIN Lowest source range SOUR CURR LEV 0 OA source level SENS VOLT PROT 25 25V compliance 3 Select volts measure range SENS VOLT RANG 20 20V range FORM ELEM VOLT Volts only 5 Turn on output OUTP ON Output on before measuring 6 Read data READ Trigger acquire reading 7 Turn off output OUTP OFF Output off after measuring 1 Steps correspond to front panel steps listed previously in Front panel measure only 2 Commands must be sent in order given 3 Instrument must be addressed to talk after READ to acquire data 3 22 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sink operation When operating as a sink V and have opposite polarity the SourceMeter is dis sipating power rather than sourcing it An external source i e battery or an energy storage device i e capacitor can force operation into the sink region For example if a 12V battery is connected to the V Source In Out HI to battery high that is programmed for 10V sink operation will occur in the second quad rant Source V and measure l CAUTION When using the I Source as a sink ALWAYS s
438. ress EXIT to return to normal display Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The SourceMeter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 6 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information See Section 9 Data Store Performing a custom sweep Step 1 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows 1 Select the desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I 2 Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values 3 Press MEAS V or MEAS to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SWEEP 2 Select TYPE then press ENTER 3 Select CUSTOM then press ENTER 4 Use the displayed menu selections to enter the desired POINTS individ ual point values ADJUST POINTS and INIT initial value 5 From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired 6 Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANG
439. ring aa a or aa a Indefinite Block 0aa a Definite Block XYaa a where Y number of characters in message Up to 20 for top display Up to 32 for bottom display X number of digits that make up Y 1 or 2 Query DATA Query the defined text message Description These commands define text messages for the display A message can be as long as 20 characters for the top display and up to 32 characters for the bottom display A space is counted as a character Excess message characters result in an error An indefinite block message must be the only command in the pro gram message or the last command in the program message If you include a command after an indefinite block message on the same line it will be treated as part of the message and is displayed instead of executed STATe lt b gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control message top display DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control message bottom display Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable text message for specified display 1 or ON Enable text message for specified display Query STATe Query state of message mode for specified display 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 47 Description These commands enable and disable the text message modes When enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display GPIB Operation A user defined text message remains
440. rized by the block diagram shown in Fig ure C 1 Refer to this block diagram for the following discussion Figure C 1 Data flow block diagram SEN SE M easurements Sample Volts Amps Ohms Buffer Timestamp Filter Limit Tests NULL Rel Data Store CALC3 Min Max Sdev Mean Pk Pk FETCh READ MEAS CALC3 DATA CALC2 DATA CALC1 D ATA TRACe D ATA 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Flow C 3 The SENSE block represents the basic measured readings of voltage current and resistance If Filter is enabled the readings will be filtered The SENSE block also measures time for the timestamp When the INITiate command is sent the programmed number of source measure operations are performed and the respective data is temporarily stored in the Sample Buffer For example if 20 source measure operations were performed then 20 sets of data will be stored in the Sample Buffer Data from this buffer is then routed to other enabled data flow blocks Assuming that all functions are enabled the data that is output by the read com mands FETCh CALC1 DATA CALC2 DATA TRACe DATA and CALC3 DATA depend on which data elements are selected With all elements selected available data will include voltage current and resistance readings as well as the time stamp and status information Note that if a measurement func tion is not enabled then either the NAN not a number value or the source read ing
441. rly due to some internal condition Bit B4 Execution Error EXE Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter detected an error while trying to execute a command Bit B5 Command Error CME Set bit indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors include e EEE 488 2 syntax error SourceMeter received a message that does not follow the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard e Semantic error SourceMeter received a command that was mis spelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that is not imple mented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a pro gram message Bit B6 User Request URQ Set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the SourceMeter front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power ON PON Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read 15 12 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 15 4 Standard event status Standard B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register Standard To ae i ESE Event Status ummary al ESE Enable ESB of Status Register ister ee PON Power On DDE Device Dependent Error i URQ User Request QYE Query Error CME Command Error OPC Operation Complete EXE Execution Error amp Logical AN D OR Logical OR O peration Event Register The used bits of the Operation Event Register shown in Fi
442. rn lt Note Limit 4 contact option not shown see Appendix F Press LIMIT 12 6 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE _ Ifusing the contact check option see flowchart Figure F 4 in Appendix F Binning control The binning control selection determines when the testing process stops and the appropriate binning operation occurs The results are communicated through the Digi tal I O port based on limit test data See Binning systems page 12 10 There are two types of binning control for the grading mode immediate and end NOTE Binning affects contact check tests See Appendix F for details Immediate binning Use immediate binning when you want to stop all testing after the first failure occurs Any pending tests will be cancelled and the DUT will be placed in the bin assigned to that test failure If no failures occur all enabled tests will be performed and the DUT will be placed in the assigned pass bin This process is demonstrated in Figure 12 3 Figure 12 3 Immediate binning Digital 1 0 Notification Pass Fail Pass End binning End binning allows a sweep to finish before performing the bin ning operation In the event of a failure the first test failure determines the bin assignment See Figure 12 4 Figure 12 4 End binning Test1 Test2 Test3 Digital 1 0 Fail Pass condition For this discussion assume that all grading mode limit tests pass After the three
443. ro drift for the reading is reduced A D conversion time is programmable with 0 01 power line cycle resolution When Auto Zero is enabled all three phases are measured each time the SourceMeter is triggered With Auto Zero disabled only the signal is measured Hence speed is increased at the expense of long term drift Firmware overhead This is the time associated with A D communication reading calibration and other operations necessary to perform the SDM cycle This time is not illustrated in the following timing diagrams Timing diagrams Case l Auto Zero enabled and measuring a single function Figure A 1 Case Timing Diagram A D Trigger Trigger Source Source Conversion A D A D Conversion Conversion ref phase ref zero phase Latency Delay Configuration Delay current signal phase Source On Time AAA gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 50ysec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185 Firmware Overhead 1 8msec for Source V 2 15msec for Source 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 5 Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay 3 x A D Conversion Firmware Overhead Example Source Delay Ousec NPLC Setting 0 01 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50usec 0 3x 0 01 x 1 60 185ysec 1 6msec 2 9msec for Source V 3 25msec for Source Case Il Auto Z
444. rocess for that DUT is terminated Binning Even though no additional equipment is required to perform limit tests on the DUT a component handler can be interfaced to the SourceMeter Digital I O port to perform binning operations After the testing process the DUT will be placed in an assigned bin NOTE The Model 2401 does not have a handler interface Therefore it cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations For the grading mode the binning system can be further automated by adding a scan ner With the use of a scanner the tests can be repeated cycled to test individual ele ments of a single package i e resistor network See Binning systems page 12 10 for more information on using component handlers and scanners to perform binning operations Operation overview Grading mode Grading mode limits operation is detailed by the flowchart in Figure 12 2 A test is only performed if it is enabled If disabled operation proceeds to the next test The follow ing assumes the first three limit tests are enabled and the digital output of the SourceMeter is connected to a component handler for DUT binning See Binning systems page 12 10 If a handler is not used ignore digital input output handler interface actions NOTE The Model 2401 does not have a handler interface Therefore it cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations With the limit tests properly configur
445. rogramming example As an example of linear staircase sweep operation assume the SourceMeter is to be used to generate the l V characteristics of a diode Many diode tests such as breakdown voltage and leakage current require only single point measurements Some such as quality assurance analysis of marginal parts involve performing a complete l V sweep for detailed analysis 10 20 Sweep Operation Table 10 4 lists the command sequence for the diode programming example Table 10 4 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Staircase sweep programming example diode test Command RST SENS FUNC CONC OFF SOUR FUNC CURR SENS FUNC VOLT DC SENS VOLT PROT 1 SOUR CURR START 1E 3 SOUR CURR STOP 10E 3 SOUR CURR STEP 1E 3 SOUR CURR MODE SWE SOUR SWE RANG AUTO SOUR SWE SPAC LIN TRIG COUN 10 SOUR DEL 0 1 OUTP ON READ Description Restore GPIB default conditions Turn off concurrent functions Current source function Volts sense function 1V voltage compliance 1mA start current 10mA stop current 1mA step current Select current sweep mode Auto source ranging Select linear staircase sweep Trigger count sweep points 100ms source delay Turn on source output Trigger sweep request data 2 1 This command should normally be sent after START STOP and STEP to avoid delays caused by rebuilding sweep when each command is sent 2 For single
446. ront panel output configuration ccsececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaees 13 7 Configure OUTPUT Menu eceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeettteeeeereee 13 8 Ou tp toff States eisiaa inaia aaia ea nee 13 9 Output off states and inductive loads eeeeeeee 13 11 Remote output Configuration ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeettteeeeeeeaaes 13 12 Output configuration COMMAMNAS cceeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeeee 13 12 14 Remote Operations Differences remote vs local operation eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 14 2 Operation enhancements remote operation e e 14 2 Local to remote transition cc cceeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeenaaees 14 2 Remote to local transition ccecceeecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesteeeeeeeaas 14 3 Selecting an interlace cciscsccceceeseseaeeceusecceeecevbeseaeeecenessecedevienes 14 3 GPIB OPeCratlOn nienia mnai ai a AE d aa aa aA aaa 14 4 GPIB Stannard ee O O a 14 4 GPIB connections senikan sel e deere 14 4 Primary address sisses ooissiiiiii oeiee ETER 14 4 General bus COMMANAS isioinidiinrsniiinianiddirasi aiiin andini 14 5 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table of Contents Front panel GPIB operation cccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeesenaees 14 5 Error and status MESSAGES cece eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaas 14 5 GPIB status indicators saiisine aAa anA 14 5 LOCAL KEY cies ceestttpeccears sascteits eis deedhaasacedeueleaaededeatan dete
447. ry Description UNITs Query units for user defined calculation This command is used to specify the units suffix name for a user defined math calculation Use three ASCII characters for the units suffix name If using fewer than three characters add spaces to the right of the units name in the string For example if the units name is Z send it as follows calc math unit Z The units name can also be enclosed in single quotes as follows calc math unit Z Define math expression EXPRession lt form gt or DEFine lt form gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession lt form gt Define math formula CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DEFine lt form gt Define math formula Parameters lt form gt mathematical formula using instrument readings numbers and standard math operator symbols See Description for details Query MATH Query user defined math expression Description Use either of these two commands to define a math formula using measure and source readings numeric constants and standard math operator symbols After the math expression is defined it will be assigned to the name that was created using the NAME com mand and will become the selected math expression See NAME lt name gt page 18 26 for more details Valid parameter names for measure and source readings include VOLTage Use V Measure or V Source reading CURRent Use I Measure or I Source reading RESistance Use ohms reading
448. s Front rear terminals selection The OUTPUT HI and LO and SENSE HI and LO terminals are accessible from both the front and rear panels The GUARD GUARD SENSE and EARTH chas sis ground terminals are only accessible from the rear panel Front panel terminals selection The FRONT REAR TERMINALS key is used to control which set of terminals is connected to the SourceMeter Pressing this key toggles the SourceMeter con nections between the front and rear terminals When the REAR annunciator is on the rear terminals are connected to the SourceMeter When REAR is off the front terminals are selected NOTE When the FRONT REAR TERMINALS key is pressed the OUTPUT will turn OFF 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 3 Remote command terminals selection Use the ROUTe TERMinals Section 18 command to select the front or rear panel terminals via remote Test fixture output enable A test fixture switch can be used with the SourceMeter to help protect the DUT The SourceMeter output will turn off when the lid of the test fixture is opened However you must ALWAYS assume that power is present until you verify that the SourceMeter output is off See Section 13 for details Connections to DUT The maximum allowable voltage differentials between terminals are labeled on the SourceMeter Figure 2 1 shows these voltage differentials for the various SourceMeter models WARNING To prevent electric shock and or damag
449. s See NAME lt name gt page 18 26 to assign names to user defined expressions NAME lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPression NAME lt name gt Select math expression Parameters lt name gt POWER Instantaneous power equation OFFCOMPOHM Offset compensated ohms equation VOLTCOEF Resistor voltage coefficient equation VARALPHA Varistor alpha equation user name Assigned name for user defined expression where the user name is made up of ASCII characters up to 10 Query NAME Query selected math expression Description This command can be used to select a math expression that already exists built in or user defined Math expression names that already 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 27 exist can be listed using the CATalog command The actual math expression can be read using the MATH command The built in math expressions except POWER require a two point sweep in order to perform the calculation The Program fragments show how to configure the SourceMeter for these math expressions When you want to create a new user defined math expression per form the following steps in order 1 If desired assign units to the calculation result See UNITs lt name gt page 18 28 Units is stored for the calculation 2 Assign a name to the expression using up to 10 ASCII charac ters using this command 3 Define the expression using the DEF
450. s With T ISTEST selected either a high or low SOT pulse starts the testing process Output enable line The output enable line OE is intended for use with an output enable circuit on a device handler or test fixture See Output enable page 13 5 for more details 5V output The Digital I O Port provides a 5V output that can be used to drive external logic circuitry Maximum current output for this line is 300mA This line is protected by a self resetting fuse one hour recovery time Digital output configuration There are two basic methods to connect external components to the digital output lines sink operation and source operation Sink operation Figure 13 2 shows the basic output configuration for sink operation Note that the external relay coil is connected between the digital output line pins 1 to 4 and 5V pin 7 With this configuration the digital output line must be set LO to ener gize the relay and the maximum sink current is 500mA 13 4 Digital I O Port Output Enable amp Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 13 2 Sink operation SourceM eter External To other Circuits Digital 1 0 Port Source operation Figure 13 3 shows the basic output configuration for source operation In this case the external relay coil is connected between the digital output line pins 1 to 4 and ground pin 9 With this configuration the digital output line must be set HI to
451. s compliance coarse limits and fine limits Also summarizes the two operating modes grading and sorting e Operation overview Covers binning control and pass fail condition for the grading and sorting modes e Binning systems Details the handler interface as well as single ele ment and multiple element binning and digital output clear pattern that occurs after a binning operation NOTE The Model 2401 does not use the digital output lines of the Digital I O port The Model 2401 does not have a handler interface and therefore cannot be used with a component handler to perform binning operations e Configuring and performing limit tests Describes how to configure the SourceMeter for limit testing and summarizes a typical test procedure Remote limit testing Summarizes limit commands and provides a basic programming example 12 2 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Types of limits As shown in Figure 12 1 there are 11 limit tests that can be performed on a DUT These limits include e Limit 1 compliance test e Limit 2 course limits Limits 3 5 12 fine limits NOTE Limit 4 is reserved for the contact check option See Appendix F for details A test is only performed if it is enabled Thus you can perform one two or all 11 tests The tests are always performed in the order shown in the drawing Figure 12 1 Limit tests Limit 1 Test Pass or Fail on Compliance Compliance Li
452. s 15 5 Programming enable registers cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaes 15 5 Reading registers cccccccceeeeeeccceeeeeecaeeeeeeeccaeeeeeseaaeeneeseaes 15 6 Status byte and service request SRQ ecseeeeeesteeeeeeenees 15 7 Status byte register eceee cette eee eeteeeeeeeseneeeeeeetiaeeeeees 15 8 Service request enable register eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 15 9 Serial polling ANd SRQ ou eceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 15 9 Status byte and service request commands 0eee 15 10 Status register sets 2 0 2 cece ee eect eee eeeetteeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeee 15 11 Register bit descriptions 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeteteteeeeereee 15 11 Condition registers cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 15 16 Event registers 2 cicccetiesscecedia ii annin 15 16 Event enable registers cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeenieeeeeeentieeeeeeeae 15 17 QUEUES iiss dah ier tintin ait Wii de eee 15 18 Output QUCUEC ceceeeeeeeeeee cece cece eee ee tee eeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeteteees 15 18 Error g Senan naa a aa a nets 15 19 Table of Contents 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 16 Common Commands Command SUMMALY ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeaaas 16 2 Command reference 2 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 16 3 IDN identification query ce eeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeettteeeeeeeee 16 3 OPC operation complete
453. s SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 11 NPLC caching NPLC caching speeds up source memory sweeps by caching A D reference and zero values When NPLC caching is enabled using the NPLC CACHE ENABLE menu selection the A D reference and zero values will be saved for up to the 10 most recent voltage current and resistance measurement functions settings Whenever the integration rate is changed via the SPEED key a recalled user setup using the SAVESETUP RESTORE menu selection or during a source memory recall either with the MEMORY RESTORE menu or during a source memory sweep NPLC caching will occur If the integration rate is already stored in the cache the stored reference and zero values are recalled and used Other wise a reference and zero value are acquired and stored in the cache If there are already 10 NPLC values stored the oldest one will be overwritten by the newest one NOTE Auto zero should be disabled for maximum source memory sweep speed otherwise the cache is of little use With auto zero enabled new A D reference and zero values are taken for every reading and saved into the cache slowing down sweep operation However with auto zero disabled measurements may drift and become erroneous To minimize drift when using NPLC caching with auto zero disabled periodically select AUTO ZERO ONCE in the A D CTRL menu to force an immediate auto zero update NPLC cache setup Follow the steps belo
454. s command is ignored 2 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the filter cannot be enabled This command is invalid error 831 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 15 Table 18 7 SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 Path to control sourcing v CLEar Path to clear source IMMediate Turn selected source off AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear for source AUTO Query state of auto clear OFF MODE lt name gt Specify auto clear mode ALWays or ALWays TCOunt MODE Query auto clear mode FUNCtion Source selection J SHAPe lt name gt Model 2430 Only Select output mode DC y DC or PULSe SHAPe Query output mode MODE lt name gt Select source mode VOLTage CURRent VOLTage y y or MEMory MODE Query source selection y DELay lt n gt Specify settling time in sec 0 to 0 9999 999 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto settling time ON AUTO Query state of auto settling time DELay Query source settling time CURRent Path to configure I Source y MODE lt n gt Select l Source mode FlXed SWEep or FIXed A LIST MODE Query l Source mode y RANGe lt n gt UP DOWN Select fixed l Source range 1 05e 4 y i AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable autoranging ON v AUTO Query state of autoranging y RANGe Query l Source range setting y LEVel Set I Source level in amps y IMMediate Set lev
455. s taken Note that this delay is the same for both the I Source and V Source Do not confuse this source delay with the trigger delay The source delay is part of the device action SDM cycle while the trigger delay occurs before the device action See Section 11 Trigger models for more information Auto delay can instead be used to automatically set the source delay See next command Query delay Query RST default delay Query lowest allowable delay Query highest allowable delay Description AUTO lt b gt SOURce 1 DELay AUTO lt b gt Enable disable auto delay for source Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto delay 1 or ON Enable auto delay Query AUTO Query state of auto delay Description This command is used to enable or disable auto delay When enabled the instrument will automatically select a delay period that is appropriate for the present source measure setup configuration Table 3 4 RST and SYST PRES default is ON 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 83 Configure voltage and current sweeps There are two methods to configure the start and stop levels of a sweep You can use either the STARt and STOP commands or you can use the CENTer and SPAN commands NOTE In order to run a sweep the selected source must be in the sweep sourcing mode and the trigger count should be the same as the number of source measure points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE
456. s the information or references the manual for that information Table E 2 lists the coupled commands used by the SourceMeter The SourceMeter complies with SCPI version 1996 0 Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 list the SCPI confirmed commands and the non SCPI commands imple mented by the SourceMeter 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table E 1 IEEE 488 documentation requirements IEEE 488 amp SCPI Conformance Information E 3 Requirements Description or reference 1 IEEE 488 Interface Function Codes the range 0 30 4 Power On Setup Conditions 5 Message Exchange Options a Input buffer size unit c Queries that generate a response when parsed d Queries that generate a response when read e Coupled commands 6 Functional elements required for SCPI commands 7 Buffer size limitations for block data 8 Syntax restrictions 9 Response syntax for every query command rules of the standard 11 Block data response size 12 Common Commands implemented by SourceMeter 13 Calibration query information 14 Trigger macro for DDT 15 Macro information 16 Response to IDN identification 17 Storage area for PUD and PUD 18 Resource description for RDT and RDT 19 Effects of RST RCL and SAV 20 TST information 21 Status register structure 22 Sequential or overlapped commands 23 Operation complete
457. s turned on and remains on until the source is turned off As shown in the two timing diagrams the static source remains on for every measurement cycle The Source Delay portion of the SDM cycle is omitted With Trigger Delay set to zero Trigger Latency is the time from when the trigger event occurs to when the SourceMeter begins an A D conver sion Status and Error Messages B 2 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction This Appendix contains a summary of status and error messages which status register bits are set when messages occur and methods to avoid or eliminate most common SCPI errors Status and error messages Table B 1 summarizes status and error messages which are stored in the Error Queue Each message is preceded by a code number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages Note that error and status conditions will also set specific bits in various status registers as summarized in Table B 1 Section 15 has detailed information on registers and queues Briefly you can use the following queries to obtain error and status information e SYST ERR reads Error Queue e ESR reads Standard Event Status Register e STAT OPER reads Operation Event Register e STAT MEAS reads Measurement Event Register e STAT QUES reads Questionable Event Register NOTE SCPI confirmed
458. se and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Remote command sense selection Use the SYSTem RSENse command Section 18 SYSTem subsystem to choose between local and remote sensing via remote For example send the fol lowing command to enable remote sensing SYST RSEN ON Conversely send this command to disable remote sensing enable local sensing SYST RSEN OFF 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 13 Guard selection Cable guard is used for high impedance guarding for cables i e coax and triax and test fixtures Ohms guard provides a high current guard output which allows in circuit guarded ohms measurements On power up cable guard is selected NOTE For 6 wire ohms measurements use the guard output off mode See Section 13 Front panel output configuration for details on the various output off states and how to select the guard output off state See also Section 4 6 wire ohms measurements Front panel guard selection Perform the following steps to check or change the guard selection 1 Press CONFIG and then SOURCE V SOURCE I or Q Changing guard in one configuration menu changes it in all of the others 2 Using the SOURCE arrow keys place the cursor flashing menu item on GUARD and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the present guard selection OHMS or CABLE To retain the present selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu
459. se rational numbers For example to select 4 5 digit resolution you can send a parameter value of 4 5 instead of 5 The SourceMeter rounds the rational number to an integer 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 45 ENABle lt b gt DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Control display circuitry Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable display circuitry 1 or ON Enable display circuitry Query ENABle Query state of display Description This command is used to enable and disable the front panel display circuitry When disabled the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen with the following message FRONT PANEL DISABLED Press LOCAL to resume As reported by the message all front panel controls except LOCAL and OUTPUT OFF are disabled Normal display operation can be resumed by using the ENABle command to enable the display or by putting the SourceMeter into local ATTRibutes DISPlay WINDow 1 ATTRibutes Query attributes top display DISPlay WINDow2 ATTRibutes Query attributes bottom display Description This query command is used to determine which characters on the CNDisplay DISPlay CNDisplay Description display are blinking and which are not The response message pro vides that status of each character position for the specified display The primary display consists of 20 characters and the secondary dis play consists of 32 characters 1 Character is blink
460. select format FORMat SREGister is documented in Table 15 2 To determine the exact nature of the error you will have to read the Error Queue see Queues page 15 18 Table 15 4 Status byte programming example Command Description CLS Clear Error Queue SRE 4 Enable EAV FORM SREG BIN Select binary format XYZ Generate error STB Read Status Byte Register 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 11 Status register sets As shown in Figure 15 1 there are four status register sets in the status structure of the SourceMeter Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Measure ment Event Status and Questionable Event Status NOTE See Appendix B for details on which register bits are set by specific error and status conditions Register bit descriptions Standard Event Register The used bits of the Standard Event Register shown in Figure 15 4 are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete Set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the SourceMeter is ready to accept new commands This bit only sets in response to the OPC query com mand See Section 16 for details on OPC and OPC Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Query Error QYE Set bit indicates that you attempted to read data from an empty Output Queue Bit B3 Device Dependent Error DDE Set bit indicates that an instru ment operation did not execute prope
461. separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any command level and will not affect the path pointer Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program message terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line feed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The bus will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a multiple command program message must be terminated outp on lt PMT gt Command execution rules e Commands execute in the order that they are presented in the program message e An invalid command generates an error and of course is not executed e Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored Response messages A response message is the message sent by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command program message Sending a response message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the Output Queue When the SourceMeter is then addressed to talk the response message is sent from the Output Queue to the computer 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 13 Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple command messages page 14 11 the
462. sions v SEL lt name gt Delete specified expression v ALL Delete all user defined expressions v UNITs lt name gt Define units name for math expression W v 3ASCII characters UNITs Query math expression units name STATe lt b gt Enable or disable math expression OFF v v STATe Query state of math expression v DATA Path to CALC1 data y LATest Return only most recent math result DATA Read result of math expression v CALCulate2 Subsystem to control CALC2 v FEED lt name gt Select input path CALCulate 1 CURRent VOLT v v VOLTage or RESistance FEED Query CALC2 feed y NULL Path to configure and control REL OFFSet lt NRf gt Specify REL value 9 999999e20 to 0 v 9 999999e20 OFFSet Query REL value STATe lt b gt Enable or disable REL OFF v STATe Query state of REL ACQuire Automatically acquire REL value DATA Path to CALC2 data y LATest Return only most recent REL or LIMIT result DATA Read math result of CALC2 v 18 4 Table 18 1 continued SCPI Command Reference CALCulate command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 LIMit 1 Path to control LIMIT 1 test v COMPliance Configure Limit 1 test FAIL lt name gt Specify fail condition IN or OUT of IN v compliance FAIL Query fail condition SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail
463. sis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Step 1 Select and configure pulse mode Basic parameters for the Pulse Mode include pulse width pulse delay pulse mea surement speed and pulse count Refer to Section 5 Pulse Mode configuration to select the Pulse Mode and set the pulse parameters Step 2 Set compliance limit and select measurement function and range Configure the Model 2430 for these aspects of operation as explained in steps 1 through 3 Section 3 Basic source measure procedure Note that the AUTO measurement range is not valid in the Pulse Mode Make sure the fixed measurement range that you select can accommodate every mea surement point in the sweep Step 3 Configure sweep Select and configure the sweep as explained in Configuring and running a sweep Step 4 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the last pulse in the sweep is sourced the output will turn off and stay off A sweep that is in progress can be stopped at any time by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key or the EXIT key Step 5 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information See Section 9 Data Store Remote Pulse Mode sweep operation The commands for Pulse Mode operation are provided in Section 5 while the staircase sweep commands are provided in Table 10 3 2400 Series SourceMete
464. sta tus reading of 48 132 indicates that bits 2 10 11 12 13 and 15 of the status word are set SOURce2 lt name gt FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt Set SOUR2 and TTL response formats Parameters lt name gt ASCii ASCII format HEXadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format Query SOURce2 Query response format Description This command controls the response format for all CALC2 XXXX SOUR2 and SOUR2 TTL queries in a manner similar to formats set by the FORM SREG command See Calculate sub systems page 18 26 and SOURce subsystem page 18 71 for details CALC data elements CALCulate lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents CALCulate lt item list gt Set CALC data elements Parameters lt item list gt CALC Include CALC1 or CALC2 data TIME Include timestamp STATus Include status information NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma for example CALCu late CALC TIME STAT Query Description CALCulate Query CALC data element list This command allows you to retrieve timestamp and status informa tion with the CALC1 DATA And CALC2 DATA queries It also allows you to retrieve timestamp and status information when TRACe FEED is set to CALC1 or CALC2 See Calculate sub systems page 18 26 for a complete description of CALC1 and CALC2 See Data elements page 18 49 for a description of TIME and STATus information 18 54 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMet
465. t NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Questionable Event Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Operation Event Enable Register Description These commands are used to set the contents of the event enable registers Read condition registers CONDition STATus MEASurement CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus OPERation CONDition Read Measurement Condition Read Questionable Register Read Operation Condition Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the condi tion registers 18 102 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select default conditions PRESet STATus PRESet Return registers to default conditions Description When this command is sent the following SCPI event registers are cleared to zero 0 1 Operation Event Enable Register 2 Event Enable Register 3 Measurement Event Enable Register NOTE The Standard Event Register is not affected by this command Error queue NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT Read Error Queue Description As error and status messages occur they are placed into the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages See Appendix B for a list of messages NOTE The STATus QUEue NEXT query command performs the same function as the SYSTem ERRor query command See SYSTem subsystem page 18 103 CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This a
466. t as 150usec or as long as 5msec With measurement enabled the output off time can be as short as 2 9msec or as long as 10 000sec The shortest output off time is 1 1msec with measurements disabled See Table 5 1 SourceMeter pulse mode timing summary for details Figure 5 2 shows the components that make up the pulse width and the output off time NOTE See the Model 2430 specifications in Appendix A Figure 5 2 Pulse measure timing for default source measure configuration Delay gt k 80ps Mas Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time OV or OA Meas 2 9ms Ref amp PD Delay Pulse width delay used to achieve pulse width setting a 80us Minimum pulse width overhead Meas Sig Signal measurement 2 9ms Minimum output off time overhead Meas Ref amp Zero Reference and zero measurement PD Pulse delay setting used to determine time between pulses Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 5 1 SourceMeter pulse mode timing summary Maxi Minimum mum Minimum W Dis Pulse Pulse Output play Dis Width Width Off Time abled Setting msec msec msec msec Default source measure cycle with auto zero on current 0 15 5 0 5 0 4 0 range lt 10A Source Measure cycle with auto zero off current range 0 15 5 0 2 9 1 9 lt 10A Source only current range lt 10A 0 15 5 0 2 9 1 9 Source Measure cycl
467. t form version of any SCPI com mand If the length of the command word is four letters or less no short form ver sion exists Example e auto auto These rules apply to command words that exceed four letters sy 9 e lf the fourth letter of the command word is a vowel including y delete it and all the letters after it Example immediate imm If the fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it Example e format form e Ifthe command contains a question mark query or a non optional num ber included in the command word you must include it in the short form version Example e delay del Command words or characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message NOTE For fastest response to commands always use short forms Program messages A program message is made up of one or more command words sent by the com puter to the instrument Each common command is a three letter acronym pre ceded by an asterisk SCPI commands are categorized in the STATus subsystem and are used to explain how command words are structured to formu late program messages STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABIe lt NRf gt Command and parameter ENABIe Query command PRESet Command Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root command
468. t goes to its normal display state with the output off OUTPUT indicator light off With the output off the OFF message is displayed and dashes replace the reading 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Line frequency setting Getting Started 1 11 At the factory the SourceMeter is configured to sense the power line frequency and automatically select the frequency setting If however the line power source is noisy the SourceMeter may select the wrong setting on power up If this situa tion occurs noisy measurement readings will result and accuracy may be affected You can manually set the line frequency from the front panel MENU AD CTRL LINE FREQ selection or SYST LFR by remote Fuse replacement A rear panel fuse protects the power line input of the SourceMeter If the line fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage replace the fuse only with the type and rating listed If the instrument repeat edly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the problem before replacing the fuse 1 The fuse is located in a drawer above the AC receptacle Figure 1 2 At the bottom of the fuse drawer is a small tab At this location use a small bladed screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer open 2 Slide the fuse drawer out to gain access to the fuse Note that the fuse drawer does not pull all the way out of the power module 3 Snap the fuse out
469. t is 2500 NOTE With front panel operation only when a sweep is configured the trigger model settings will not change until the sweep is started After the sweep is finished the trigger model will reset to the previous settings 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 17 Output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger via rear panel Trigger Link connector after various trigger model operations An output trigger is used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation The default is no output trig gers See Trigger link later in this section for more information Trigger layer output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger after each action of the SDM cycle Source Delay and Measure Output triggers are controlled with the TRIGger OUTPut command For example to output a trigger after the Measure Action the following command must be sent TRIGger OUTPut SENSe The above command disables output triggers for the Source and Delay Actions since their parameter names SOURce and DELay are not included in the param eter list When used with a scanner an output trigger after each measurement can signal the scanner to select the next channel in the scan Arm layer output trigger As shown in Figure 11 3 the SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger when operation leaves the Arm Layer and enters the Trigger Layer or after operation leaves the Tr
470. t n gt Set arm count n count ARM SOURce lt name gt Specify arm control source Name IMMediate TLINk TIMer MANual BUS NSTest PSTest or BSTest ARM TIMer lt n gt Set arm layer timer interval n interval ARM DIRection lt name gt Control arm bypass Name SOURce or ACCeptor ARM ILINe lt NRf gt Select arm layer input line NRf input line ARM OLINe lt NRf gt Select arm layer output line NRf output line ARM OUTPut lt event list gt Select arm layer output events Event list TENTer TEXit or NONE TRIGger CLEar Clear any pending input triggers immediately TRIGger COUNt lt n gt Set trigger count n count TRIGger DELay lt n gt Set trigger delay n delay TRIGger SOURce lt name gt Specify trigger control source Name IMMediate or TLINk TRIGger DIRection lt name gt Control trigger bypass Name SOURce or ACCeptor TRIGger ILINe lt NRf gt Select trigger layer input line NRf input line TRIGger OLINe lt NRf gt Select trigger layer output line NRf output line TRIGger INPut lt event list gt Select trigger input layer events Event list SOURce DELay SENSe or NONE TRIGger OUTPut lt event list gt Select trigger layer output events Event list SOURce DELay SENSe or NONE TRG Trigger SourceMeter if BUS source selected 1 Invalid ignored for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Man
471. t procedure cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeees 4 4 Ohms SENSING ccc eeeeeee eee eeeeee eee eeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaeeeeeseenaeeeeeseeaas 4 6 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table of Contents SENSE Selector se ciactecstsaadincstendsacedarardacedanvaesaedensreanceeersaaaaaceen 4 7 Offset compensated ORMS ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteennenea 4 8 Enabling disabling offset compensated OhMs ceeeee 4 8 Ohms accuracy calculations cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeee 4 9 Ohms source readback ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceecnceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 11 Ohms source readback Selection eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 11 6 wire ohms Measurements cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 12 Remote ohms programming ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaes 4 13 Remote ohms commands cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeaeees 4 13 Ohms programming example ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 14 5 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only OVERVIGW ve ceceedadisciiydecccaiieal ai es eae teers depended 5 2 Pulse characteristics c ceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 3 Pulse width 2 202 peantevasi ah cgedeniatattbendealeds ici dea a stein 5 4 Output off time 2 2 eee cece cece cee ee eee ee eee te ceaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneees 5 6 Pulse duty CyGle seruccnccncrans caran a 5 6 Fast pulse output
472. t range 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Expected reading in amps 42 to 42 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 10 5 volts 2 1e4 ohms MINimum 0 amps 0 volts O ohms MAXimum 5 25 amps 42 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range RANGe Query measurement range RANGe DEFault Query RST default range RANGe MINimum Query lowest range returns 0 RANGe MAXimum Query highest range This command is used to manually select the measurement range for the specified measurement function The range is selected by specifying the expected reading The instrument will then go to the most sensitive reading that will accommodate that reading For example if you expect a reading of approximately 50mV then simply let lt n gt 0 05 or 50e 3 in order to select the 200mV range You can also use the UP and DOWN parameters to select range Each time UP or DOWN is sent the next higher or lower measure ment range is selected When on the maximum range sending UP is a No Op no operation When on the lowest range sending DOWN is a NO Op Measurement ranges can instead be automatically selected by the instrument See AUTO lt b gt page 18 42 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 65 Select auto range AUTO lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for a
473. t the delay The delay period is range dependent Table 3 4 The delay option is used to manually set the delay from 000 00000 seconds to 9999 99900 seconds Manually setting the delay disables auto delay Table 3 4 Auto source delay Auto 2400 2400 LV 2401 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 Auto delay delay l range l range l range l range l range Source V Source I 1yA 1A 10A 10A 10pA 3msec 3msec 10A 10A 100A 100A 100A 2msec 1msec 100A 100A 1mA 1mA 1mA 1msec 1msec 1mA 1mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 1msec 1msec 10mA 20mA 100mA 100mA 100mA 1msec 1msec 100mA 100mA 1A 1A 1A 1msec 1msec 1A 1A 3A 3A 10A 5A 1msec 2msec 10A range only on Model 2430 Front panel source delay To set the manual source delay from the front panel Pe eS Press CONFIG then SOURCE V Select DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER Enter the desired DELAY value then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display To set the auto source delay state from the front panel 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V 2 Select AUTO DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Select ENABLE or DISABLE as desired then press ENTER 3 14 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote command source delay Use the SOURce DELay or SOURce DELay AUTO commands to program the source delay via remote See Section 18 Set delay for details For e
474. t to indicate that an SRQ has occurred Status register sets A typical status register set is made up of a condition register an event register and an event enable register A condition register is a read only register that con stantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset When an event register bit is set and its cor responding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output Summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register Queues The SourceMeter uses an Output Queue and an Error Queue The response mes sages to query commands are placed in the Output Queue As various program ming errors and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue When a queue contains data it sets the appropriate summary bit of the Status Byte Register 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 3 Figure 15 1 SourceMeter status register structure Questionable Questionable Questionable Event Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Logical OR Calibration Summary Error Queue Command Warning Always Zero Output Queue Service Status Request Byte Enable Register Register Standard z Standard Event MSB
475. tact with the conductors Safe installation requires proper shields barriers and grounding to prevent contact with conductors Operator protection and safety are the responsibility of the person installing the product When handling the SourceM eter NEVER touch the heat sink located on the left side of the case T his heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns Line power connection The SourceMeter operates from a line voltage in the range of 100 to 240V at a fre quency of 50 or 60Hz Line voltage and line frequency are automatically sensed Therefore there are no switches to set Check to be sure the operating voltage in your area is compatible CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage possibly voiding the warranty Perform the following steps to connect the SourceMeter to line power and turn it on 1 2 Before plugging in the power cord make sure the front panel power switch is in the off 0 position Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC receptacle on the rear panel 1 10 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The power cord supplied with the SourceM eter contains a separate ground for use with grounded outlets W hen proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death due to electric sh
476. tatus registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Regis ter These summary bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely depen dent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the Standard Event Register is read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will reset the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows Bit BO Measurement Summary Bit MSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Error Available EAV Set summary bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the Error Queue Bit B3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled questionable event has occurred Bit B4 Message Available MAV Set summary bit indicates that a response message is present in the Output Queue Bit B5 Event Summary Bit ESB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred Bit B6 Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Set bit indicates that an enabled summary bit of the Status Byte Register is set Bit B7 Operation Summary OSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred Depending on how it is used Bit B6 of the Status Byte Register is either the Request for Service RQS
477. ted measure ment CAUTION When using the SourceMeter as a voltmeter V Compliance must be set higher than the voltage that is being measured Failure to do this could result in instrument damage due to excessive current that will flow into the SourceMeter Select range Use the RANGE arrow keys to select a fixed measurement range that will accommodate the expected reading Use the lowest possible range for best accuracy When measuring current AUTO range can be used instead The SourceMeter will automatically go to the most sensitive range When measuring voltage DO NOT use AUTO range see the following CAUTION CAUTION When using the SourceMeter as a voltmeter only DO NOT use AUTO range and NEVER select a measurement range that is below the applied signal level For these conditions high cur rent will be drawn from the external source This high current could damage the external source or test circuit Connect voltage or current to be measured Connect the DUT to the SourceMeter using 2 wire connections Figure 2 2 Turn output on Press the ON OFF key to turn the output on Take reading from display When finished turn output off 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 21 Remote command measure only Table 3 7 summarizes the basic command sequence for measure only The steps outlined correspond to those in the Front panel measure only sequence above Table 3 7 Measu
478. ter which is based on reading conversions The dis played stored or transmitted reading is an average of a number of reading con versions from 1 to 100 There are two averaging filter types to choose from repeating and moving Figure 7 1 For the repeating filter which is the power on default the stack filter count is filled and the conversions are averaged to yield a reading The stack is then cleared and the process starts over Choose this filter for sweeping so readings for other source levels are not averaged with the present source level The moving average filter uses a first in first out stack When the stack filter count becomes full the measurement conversions are averaged yielding a read ing For each subsequent conversion placed into the stack the oldest conversion is discarded The stack is re averaged yielding a new reading When the filter is first enabled the stack is empty Keep in mind that a filtered reading is not yielded until the stack is full The first reading conversion is placed in the stack and is then copied to the other stack locations in order to fill it Thus the first filtered reading is the same as the first reading conversion Now the nor mal moving average filter process can continue Note that a true average is not yielded until the stack is filled with new reading conversions no copies in stack For example in Figure 7 1A it takes ten filtered readings to fill the stack with new readi
479. tes in use y POINts lt NRf gt Specify size of buffer 1 to 2500 v ACTual Queries number of readings stored in the buffer POINts Query buffer size v FEED lt name gt Select source of readings SENSe 1 y CALCulate 1 or CALCulate2 CONTrol lt name gt Specify buffer control mode NEVER or NEXT v CONTrol Query buffer control mode v TSTamp Path to set timestamp format FORMat lt name gt Select format ABSolute or DELTa FORMat Query timestamp format Note SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the commands in this subsystem 18 24 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 11 TRIGger command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI INITiate IMMediate Initiate source measure cycle s y ABORt Reset trigger system Goes to idle state v ARM Path to program Arm Layer v SEQuence 1 v LAYer 1 v COUNt lt n gt Specify arm count 1 to 2500 or INFinite 1 v COUNt Query arm count INFinite 9 9e37 v SOURce lt name gt Specify control source IMMediate TIMer IMMediate y MANual BUS TLINk NSTest PSTest or BSTest SOURce Query control source v TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval in seconds 0 001 to 0 1 v 99999 99 TIMer Query timer interval v TCONfigure v DIRection lt name gt Enable SOURce or disable ACCeptor ACCeptor v bypass DIRection Query state of bypass y ASYNchronous Confi
480. tes that range compliance has occurred The output is clamped at 10 5pA Determining compliance limit Table 6 2 provides examples Model 2400 for determining the actual compliance limit For the first three entries in the table the compliance setting is 150V On the 200V measurement range the actual compliance is 150V compliance setting lt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 5 measure range real compliance On the 20V and 200mV measurement ranges compliance is 21V and 210mV respectively measure range lt compliance setting range compliance The same rules apply for the next three entries for current compliance Table 6 2 Compliance examples Compliance setting Measurement range Actual compliance Display message Setting Display message Range Value Type Cmpl 0 15000kV 150V V 200V 150V Real Cmpl 0 15000kV 150V V 20V 21V Range Cmpl 0 15000kV 150V MV 200mV 210mV Range Cmpl 075 000 mA 75mA mMA 100mA 75mA Real Cmpl 075 000 mA 75mA MA 10mA 10 5mA_ Range Cmpl 075 000 mA 75mA MA 1mA 1 05mA_ Range 6 6 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Overheating protection Proper ventilation is required to keep the SourceMeter from overheating See WARNING CAUTION located at the beginning of Section 3 for details on main taining proper ventilation The SourceMete
481. th to control LIMIT 3 test v UPPer Configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v v 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v v 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 v lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v v lt NDN gt 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 3 test OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 3 test y FAIL Return result of Limit 3 test 0 pass or v 1 fail LIMit4 Path for LIMIT 4 test contact check option only SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 15 lt NDN gt 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 4 test OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 4 test y FAIL Return result of Limit 4 test 0 pass or v 1 fail 18 6 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual
482. than the output voltage at the DUT This results in leakage current and will corrupt the measurement To cancel the effect of IR drop in the GUARD test lead connect GUARD SENSE to the resistor network as shown in Figure 2 5B Guard sense ensures that the guard voltage at the resistor network is the same as the output voltage at the DUT Note that if the DUT is lt 1kQ you should use the 4 wire measurement method remote sensing by connecting SENSE HI and LO to the DUT and enabling remote sense Figure 2 5C NOTE Guard current Ig must never exceed 50mA If it does guard voltage will become less than the output voltage and corrupt the measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 2 5 Connections Guarded ohms measurements ohms guard WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA 4 WIRE SENSE INPUT OUTPUT ENTER EEE AODRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU o T o og Ea Sense Selection 2 wire local CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI A Basic connections IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL Resistor N etwork Rg lt 1kQ WARNING no INT RNAL OPERATOR SERVICA 4 WIRE SENSE INPUT OUTPUT 488 ENTEN EE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU e e oume lt Sense Selection 2 wire local CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI B Connections using guard sense RS232 o T o omo C 6 wire ohms connections CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FII
483. the SourceMeter will automatically assume a READ command has been sent when it is addressed to talk This technique increases GPIB speed by decreasing the transmission and parser times for the command Trigger on talk is extremely useful in the single shot reading mode RST default and is the main reason for a gt 2x speed improvement over the SCPI protocol Remember that the output must be on 0UTput STATe ON before you can take readings The ARM SOUR BUS and ARM COUN INF commands are not supported by READ with the 488 1 protocol selected If you send one of these commands a DCL or IFC may be required to reset the GPIB Message available The MAV message available bit in the Serial Poll byte will be set when the query is finished being processed not when there is data available in the output buffer as with the SCPI protocol For the 488 1 protocol output data will not be format ted until the first request for data is received This delay may cause unexpected time outs when using SRQ on MAV for queries that take a long time to execute General operation notes The TALK LSTN and SRQ annunciators are not functional in the 488 1 protocol This speeds up data throughput greatly The REM annunciator still operates since it is critical to fundamental GPIB operation e If the unit is in REMote the GTL command may not put the SourceMeter into the local mode Only the front panel LOCAL key is guaranteed to oper ate if not in loca
484. the detailed command reference information Detailed infor mation on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 19 Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 PULSe Model 2430 Configure pulse for Pulse v Mode WIDTh lt n gt Set pulse width 0 00015 to 0 005 sec v v WIDTh Query pulse width y DELay lt n gt Set pulse delay 0 to 9999 999 sec v y DELay Query pulse delay v SOURce2 Path to control digital output lines BSIZe lt n gt Set Digital I O bit size 3 or 4 1 4 BSIZe Query Digital I O bit size TTL LEVel DEFault Specify digital output pattern 15 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt LEVel DEFault Query default output pattern ACTual Read actual output pattern TTL4 MODE lt name gt Set Digital I O mode EOTest or BUSY EOTest MODE Query Digital I O line 4 mode BSTate lt b gt Set BUSY and EOT polarity HI or LO LO BSTate Query BUSY and EOT polarity CLEar Clear digital output IMMediate Restore clear to TTL output pattern AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear OFF AUTO Query state of auto clear DELay lt n gt Specify pulse width of pass fail pattern 0 00001 0 0000 to 60 sec DELay Query delay 1 16 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option 2 Bit range set by BSIZe
485. the next step to set the arm count Enter the desired arm count value and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Perform the following steps to set the trigger count ak Up Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu Select TRIG LAYER from the displayed choices and press ENTER Select COUNT from the displayed choices and press ENTER Enter the desired trigger count value and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Disable enable auto zero Pulse speed can be increased by disabling auto zero However zero drift will eventually corrupt the accuracy of the pulse measurement To re establish an accurate pulse measurement enable auto zero or change the speed setting 1 oe wh Press MENU to display the main menu Select A D CTRL from the displayed choices and press ENTER Select AUTO ZERO from the displayed choices and press ENTER Select DISABLE or ENABLE and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Remote command Pulse Mode configuration For remote operation the commands to select and configure the Pulse Mode are provided in Table 18 6 and Table 18 7 5 12 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse measure considerations Measurement speed Filter Measurement speed for the Pulse Mode can be set from 0 004 to 0 100 PLC If the speed setting while in the DC Mode is gt 0 10 PLC it will change to 0 004
486. the ohms guard configuration Figure 6 18B shows how to measure the resis tance of R1 Since the voltage on either side of R2 is the same no current can flow through it Thus all the programmed current I from the SourceMeter will flow through R1 The voltage across R1 is then measured and an accurate resis tance measurement is calculated in this case 20kQ NOTE Guard current Ig must not exceed 50mA If it does the guard voltage drops lower than the output voltage allowing leakage current Thus the guarded ohms measurement becomes corrupted 6 30 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 17 High impedance measurements Insulator Insulator SourceM eter IN OUT Metal Mounting Plate gt IN OUT ly Measured current Ip DUT current LO I Leakage current GUARD cable mode A Unguarded SourceM eter IN OUT V Sour i Soule Metal Mounting Plate k IN OUT Note Cable guard selected Connect to earth safety ground B Guarded using 18 AWG wire or larger 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 31 Figure 6 18 In circuit ohms measurements Source IN OUT IN OUT Source Note Ohms guard selected IN OUT B Guarded 6 32 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guard sense When the GUARD to LO resistance path is less than 1kQ remote guard sensing should be used to compensate for I
487. thmic step size for the sweep Step size for the sweep in Figure 10 2 is calculated as follows log10 stop log10 start Points 1 10g10 10 logl0 1 5 1 Log Step Size G 0 4 0 25 Thus the five log steps for this sweep are 0 0 25 0 50 0 75 and 1 00 The actual V Source levels at these points are listed in Table 10 1 the V Source level is the anti log of the log step Table 10 1 Logarithmic sweep points Measure point Log step V Source level volts Point 1 0 1 Point 2 0 25 1 7783 Point 3 0 50 3 1623 Point 4 0 75 5 6234 Point 5 1 0 10 When this sweep is triggered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start source level 1V and sweep through the symmetrical log points With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting Abort on compliance This feature aborts a sweep in progress if compliance is detected There are three modes never early and late Never turns off the feature early will abort as soon as compliance is detected at the beginning of the SDM cycle and late aborts at the end of the SDM cycle See Configuring and running a sweep on page 10 12 10 6 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Custom sweep This sweep type lets you configure a customized sweep Programmable parame ters include the numbe
488. til all source measure operations for the vector array are performed e Initializing memory SYSTem MEMory INITialize deletes all user defined math expressions and selects the POWER expres sion DELete SELected lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DELete SELected lt name gt Delete user defined math expression Parameters lt name gt user name Name of user defined math expression Description This command is used to remove delete the specified user defined math expression from the catalog Once removed that math expres sion can no longer be selected You can use the CATalog com mand to verify that the math expression is gone For example if you wish to delete a user defined math expression that is named math1 you would send the following command DELete math1 You cannot delete built in math expressions This will result in error 808 Expression cannot be deleted DELete ALL CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DELete ALL Delete all user defined math expression Description This action command will remove delete all user defined math expressions from the catalog Built in math expressions are not affected Assign unit suffix UNITs lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH UNITs lt name gt Specify units for user defined calculation Parameters lt name gt Three ASCII characters enclosed in single or double quotes 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 29 Que
489. timestamp format see Timestamp format in this section Displaying other buffer readings To display the other source readings stored in the buffer display the desired memory location number The arrow keys for SOURCE and RANGE increment and decrement the selected digit of the location number Cursor position is con trolled by the EDIT arrow keys When scrolling forward past the last stored read ing the buffer wraps to the first stored reading Conversely when scrolling in reverse past the first stored reading the buffer wraps to the last stored reading A different key click tone announces the wrap around The memory location number can also be keyed in using the 0 through 9 number keys Position the cursor on the appropriate digit and press the desired number key The cursor then moves right to the next least significant digit For example to display reading 0236 position the cursor all the way to the left MSD and press 0 2 3 6 Note that if keying in a number that exceeds the buffer size the reading at the highest memory location is displayed To exit from the data store recall mode press EXIT Buffer statistics With the data store in the recall mode buffer statistics are displayed by using the TOGGLE key Use the TOGGLE key to sequence through the statistics and return the SourceMeter to the normal data store recall state Pressing EXIT at any time returns the instrument to the normal source measure display state
490. tion 10 for details The sweep continues until the source outputs the specified stop level At this level the instrument again performs another measure ment after the SDM delay and then stops the sweep The source measure points in a sweep can be set by specifying a step size or by specifying the number of source measure points in the sweep Refer to STEP lt n gt page 18 87 and POINts lt n gt page 18 89 STARt and STOP are coupled to CENTer and SPAN Thus when start and stop values are changed the values for center and span are affected as follows Center Start Stop 2 Span Stop Start 18 86 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CENTer lt n gt SPAN lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent CENTer lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage CENTer lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent SPAN lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage SPAN lt n gt Parameters 2400 2400 LV 2401 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 420 to 420 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2410 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 2200 to 2200 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2420 lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 128 to 128 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 21 to 21 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 84 to 84 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Specify center point of current sweep Specify center point of voltage sweep Specify spa
491. tional airflow could compromise accuracy performance e When rack mounting the SourceMeter make sure there is ade quate airflow around the bottom and sides to ensure proper cooling Adequate airflow enables air temperatures within approximately one inch of the SourceMeter surfaces to remain within specified limits under all operating conditions e Rack mounting high power dissipation equipment adjacent to the SourceMeter could cause excessive heating to occur The specified ambient temperatures must be maintained around the surfaces of the SourceMeter to specified accuracies 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 3 e Agood measure to ensure proper cooling in rack situations with convection cooling only is to place the hottest equipment i e power supply at the top of the rack Precision equipment such as the SourceMeter should be placed as low as possible in the rack where temperatures are the coolest Adding spacer panels below the SourceMeter will help ensure adequate air flow 3 4 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Operation overview Source measure capabilities From the front panel the SourceMeter can be configured to perform the following operations e Source voltage Display current and or voltage measurement e Source current Display voltage and or current measurement e Measure resistance Display voltage or current component of measure
492. tore buffer capabilities Storing readings Discusses the procedure for storing readings in the internal buffer Recalling readings Provides detailed information for recalling readings stored in the buffer Buffer statistics Discusses the various statistics available on buffer data including minimum and maximum values average mean standard deviation and peak to peak values Timestamp format Explains how to select the timestamp format abso lute or delta for recalled buffer readings Remote programming Summarizes the commands to control the data store and provides a programming example 9 2 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data store overview The SourceMeter has a data store buffer to store from 1 to 2500 source mea sure readings The instrument stores the source measure readings that are dis played during the storage process Each source measure reading also includes the buffer location number and a timestamp Cmpl will flash in buffer recall if read ing is in compliance The data store also provides statistical data on the measured readings stored in the buffer These include minimum maximum mean and standard deviation NOTE When a sweep is performed the readings are automatically stored in the buffer Front panel data store Storing readings Perform the following steps to store readings 1 Set up the SourceMeter for the desired configuration 2 Press the STORE key
493. tput configuration programming example Table 13 2 Output configuration commands Command Description OUTPut ENABle STATe lt state gt Enable disable output enable state ON or OFF OUTPut ENABle TRIPped Query output enable line tripped state 1 tripped OUTPut SMODe lt name gt Select output off mode state HIMPedance NORMal ZERO or GUARg SOURce CLEar Turn output source off when in idle state SOURce CLEar AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto output off State OFF output off after measurement or ON output stays on SOURce CLEar AUTO MODE lt name gt Auto clear mode Name ALWays every reading default or TCOunt ON when trigger layer entered OFF when leaving trigger layer 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off mode is always NORMal Selecting one of the other output off states causes error 831 2 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled You can set auto output to be off but it will not dis able until the DC Mode of operation is selected Table 13 3 lists the command sequence for output configuration Table 13 3 Output configuration programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR VOLT 10 Output 10V OUTP ENAB STAT ON _ Enable output enable line OUTP SMOD HIMP Select high impedance output off mode SOUR CLE AUTO ON Enable auto off mode READ Trigger and acquire readings Connect pins 8 and
494. uA 1 055yuA 10A 10 5uA 10 55uA 10pA 10 5uA 10 55yuA 100uA 105pA 105 54A 100HA 105pA 105 5uA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055MA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 20mA 421mA 21 1mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A 1A 1 05A 1 055A 2400 only Max Power 22W_ Max Power 22W 2420 2425 2430 Range Source Measure Range Source Measure 200mV 210mV 211mV 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 2V 2 1V 2 11V 20V 21V 21 1V 20V 21V 21 1V 60V 63V 63 3V 100V 105V 105 5V 10A 10 5uA 10 55uA 10pA 10 5uA 10 55yuA 100uA 105pA 105 54A 100HA 105pA 105 5uA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055MA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 10mA 410 5mA 10 55mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A 1A 1 05A 1 055A 3A 3 15A 3 165A 3A 10A ie Max Power 66W 2425 and 2430 Max Power DC Mode 110W 105V 1 05A 66W 21V 3 15A Pulse Mode 1 1kW 2430 only 3 5 3 6 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 3 1 cont Source measure capabilities 2440 Range Source Measure 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 10V 10 5V 10 5V 40V 42V 42V 10A 10 5uA 10 55pA 100A 105pA 105 5uA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A 5A 5 25A 5 25A Max Power 66W 3 15A DC mode
495. ual Triggering 11 19 Trigger link Input and output triggers are received and sent via the rear panel TRIGGER LINK connector The trigger link has four lines At the factory line 2 is selected for out put triggers and line 1 is selected for input triggers These input output line assignments can be changed from the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Con figuring triggering page 11 7 The connector pinout is shown in Figure 11 5 Input trigger requirements An input trigger is used to satisfy event detection for a trigger model layer that is configured for the TRIGGER LINK event See Trigger models page 11 20 The input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 11 6 Figure 11 5 Rear panel pinout Rear Panel Pinout Pin Number Description 1 Trigger Link 1 2 Trigger Link 2 a 3 Trigger Link 3 OO 4 Trigger Link 4 5 Not connected 6 Not connected 7 Ground 8 Ground Figure 11 6 Trigger link input pulse specifications Triggers on Leading Edge TTL High 2V 5V TTL Low 0 5V 11 20 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output trigger specifications The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger after various trigger model actions See Trigger models page 11 20 The output trigger provides a TTL compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 11 7
496. ubsystem are not affected by RST and SYSTem PREset The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes 2 Event Registers Power up and CLS clears all bits STATus PRESet has no effect 3 Enable Registers Power up and STATus PRESet clears all bits CLS has no effect Accepts the SCPI 1995 0 mandated non decimal numeric format H Q or B 4 Error Queue Power up and CLS clears all bits of the registers 5 Error Queue Messages Power up Clears list of messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect 6 Register Query Commands The format for the response messages ASCII hexadecimal octal or binary depends on which data format is presently selected see Status register format page 18 54 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 21 Table 18 9 SYSTem command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SYSTem PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults y POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet or SAV 0 4 POSetup Query power on setup VERSion Query revision level of SCPI y ERRor Path to read messages in error queue Note 1 NEXT Return and clear oldest error code and y message ALL Return and clear all errors codes and messages COUNt Return the number of errors CODE Path to return error code numbers only NEXT Return and clear oldest error code only ALL
497. ude volts 21 to 21 2400 LV and 2401 OA or OV 1 05A or 210V 1 05A or 210V 21V 2400 LV and 2401 Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 1 05A or 1100V 1 05A or 1100V Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 63V 3 15A or 63V Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 105V 3 15A or 105V Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 10 5A or 105V 10 5A or 105V Set l Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 5 25A or 42V 5 25A or 42V 18 78 Query Description NOTE The sourcing MODE command is used to select a fixed source See Select SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CURRent CURRent DEFault CURRent MINimum CURRent MAXimum VOLTage VOLTage DEFault VOLTage MINimum VOLTage MAXimum Query programmed amplitude of Source Query RST default amplitude Query lowest allowable amplitude Query highest allowable amplitude Query programmed amplitude of V Source Query RST default amplitude Query lowest allowable amplitude Query highest allowable amplitude This command is used to immediately update the amplitude of a fixed source This command is not valid for the list or sweep mode sourcing mode page 18 73 SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude
498. uery number of points in sweep v DIRection lt name gt Sweep from start to stop UP or from stop UP to start DOWN DIRection Query sweep direction RANGing lt name gt Select source ranging mode BEST BEST AUTO or FlXed RANGing Query source ranging mode v CABort lt name gt Abort on compliance NEVer EARLy or NEVer LATE CABort Query abort on compliance state LIST Configure LIST source mode v CURRent lt NRf gt Create list of Source values APPend lt NRf gt Add Source values to end of list v POINts Query number of source values in list STARt lt n gt Specify list sweep start point 1 STARt Query list sweep start point CURRent Query l Source list v VOLTage lt NRf gt APPend lt NRf gt POINts STARt lt n gt STARt VOLTage MEMory SAVE lt n gt RECall lt n gt POINts lt n gt POINts STARt lt NRf gt STARt Create list of V Source values Add V Source values to end of list Query number of source values in list Specify list sweep start point Query list sweep start point Query V Source list Configure Source Memory Sweep Save settings at memory location 1 to 100 Recall settings from memory 1 to 100 Specify number of sweep points 1 to 100 Query number of sweep points Specify start location for Source Memory Sweep 1 to 100 Query start location 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with
499. ues separated by commas are sent to the computer The first value indicates how many bytes of memory are available and the second value indicates how many bytes are reserved to store read ings 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 115 POINts lt n gt TRACe POINts lt n gt Specify buffer size Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify buffer size MINimum 1 MAXimum 2500 DEFault 100 Query POINts Query buffer size POINts MINimum Query smallest allowable buffer size POINts MAXimum Query largest allowable buffer size POINts DEFault Query RST default buffer size Description This command is used to specify the size of the buffer ACTual TRACe POINts AC Tual Query number of stored readings Description This query command is used to determine how many stored read ings are in the buffer After sending this command and addressing the unit to talk the number of readings stored in the buffer will be sent to the computer FEED lt name gt TRACe FEED lt name gt Specify readings source Parameters lt name gt SENSe 1 Put raw readings in buffer CALCulate 1 Put Calc1 readings in buffer CALCulate2 Put Calc2 readings in buffer Query FEED Query buffer feed Description This command is used to select the source of readings to be placed in the buffer With SENSe 1 selected raw readings are placed in the buffer when storage is performed With CALCulate 1 selected math expression results Calc
500. under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock fa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The A symbol on an instrument means caution risk of danger The user should refer to the operating instructions located in the user documentation in all cases where the symbol is marked on the instrument The A symbol on an instrument means caution risk of danger Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The AN symbol on an instrument shows that the surface may be hot Avoid personal contact to prevent burns The An symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame If this symbol is on a product it indicates that mercury is present in the display lamp Please note that the lamp must be properly disposed of according to federal state and local laws The WARNING heading in the user documentation explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in the user documentation explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock and fire replacement components in mai
501. uracy SourceMeter measurement accuracy is better than sourcing accuracy see the source and measure specifications in Appendix A For that reason select the same measurement and source functions then use the measured value instead of the programmed source value for optimum accuracy 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 23 Basic circuit configurations Source When configured to source current I Source as shown in Figure 6 14 the SourceMeter functions as a high impedance current source with voltage limit capability and can measure current l Meter or voltage V Meter For voltage measurements the sense selection 2 wire local or 4 wire remote determines where the measurement is made In local sense voltage is measured at the Input Output terminals of the SourceMeter In 4 wire remote sense voltage can be measured directly at the DUT using the Sense terminals This eliminates any voltage drops that may be in the test leads or connections between the SourceMeter and the DUT NOTE The current source does not require or use the sense leads to enhance current source accuracy With 4 wire remote sensing selected the sense leads must be connected or incorrect operation will result Over voltage protection OVP can be used if the potential for sense lead disconnection exists see Section 3 V source protection 6 24 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figu
502. urce Event Detector With NEVER selected operation will wait for an input trigger TRIGGER IN EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF trig ger in events SOURCE DELAY and MEASURE With a trig ger in event ON operation will wait at that event for an input trigger With the trigger in event OFF operation will not wait It will simply continue and perform the appropriate action NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the DELAY and MEASURE events are not used Therefore the settings for those events are ignored TRIGGER OUT Use to configure the trigger layer output trigger LINE Select the Trigger Link line for the output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF output triggers that occur after the source delay and measure actions NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode an output trigger can only occur after the measure action Therefore the output trigger settings for the source and delay actions are ignored DELAY Specify the time delay in seconds for the trigger delay NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used Therefore the trigger delay setting is ignored COUNT Specify the trigger count HALT Use to return the SourceMeter to the idle state HALT does not turn off the output The programmed source level will still be available at the OUTPUT terminals The following actions will take the SourceMeter out of idle Turn the output off and then on a
503. urce memory sweep setups Section 10 Saving setups Select the various instrument operating modes you wish to save Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select SAVE then press ENTER Select the setup position 0 4 to save then press ENTER to complete the process ak wWN gt Restoring setups Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select RESTORE then press ENTER Select the setup position 0 4 to restore then press ENTER to complete the process SON Power on configuration You can also define which of the stored setups factory default or user the instru ment assumes as the power on configuration as follows 1 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 2 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 3 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select POWERON then press ENTER 4 From the SET POWER ON DEFAULT menu choose the power on configu ration BENCH or GPIB see below or USER SETUP NUMBER Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 5 If you chose to use a user setup as the power on configuration select the user setup number then press ENTER Factory default settings As summarized in Table 1 2 there are two sets of factory defaults BENCH front panel and GPI
504. urce virtu 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 21 ally OV at 50mA Regardless of the load current will never exceed the pro grammed compliance of 50mA Figure 6 13 V Source operating examples Current Limit Load Line 50mA l M eter Im Operating Point 25mA Voltage Source Load Line V Source Vs 50V l V R 50V 2kQ 25mA A Normal V source operation Current Limit O peratin Load Line P 5 Point 50mA l M eter Im Voltage Source Load Line 40V 50V V Source Vs Veal R 50mA 8009 40V B V Source in compliance 6 22 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source measure and source V measure V The SourceMeter can measure the function it is sourcing When sourcing a volt age you can measure voltage Conversely if you are sourcing current you can measure the output current For these measure source operations the measure range is the same as the source range This feature is valuable when operating with the source in compliance When in compliance the programmed source value is not reached Thus measuring the source lets you measure the actual output voltage With the use of the TOGGLE key you can display the measurement of any two of the three functions volts amps and ohms concurrently For remote operation you can measure all three functions concurrently See Section 17 and Section 18 Source readback acc
505. ured For example if configured for 20 source measure operations arm count 1 trigger count 20 then 20 sets of readings will be acquired after the Source Meter returns to the idle state When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented e INITiate e FETCh The INITiate command starts operation by taking the instrument out of idle After all source measure operations are completed the SourceMeter goes back into idle at which time the FETCh command is executed The readings are sent to the computer and displayed when the Source Meter is addressed to talk 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 17 5 Note that if auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF then the output must be turned on before you can perform a READ The output will then remain on after all source measure operations are completed If auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON then the output will automatically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each measurement NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output will turn on when the READ command is sent See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data MEASure lt funct
506. urements 4 5 WARNING To prevent electric shock do not make or break connections to the SourceMeter with the output on If on press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output off 1 Select ohms measurement function by pressing MEAS Q 2 Select the ohms measurement method AUTO or MANUAL NOTE Use the manual ohms mode and the V source method when high speed settling is required 3 For manual ohms configure source For manual ohms you can Source or Source V at the user programmed output level The lowest allowable compliance limit is based on the load and the source value For example if sourcing 1V to a 1kQ resistor the lowest allowable current compliance is 1mA 1V 1kQ 1mA Setting a limit lower than 1mA will place the source in compliance 4 Select measurement range Use the RANGE keys to select a range appropriate for the expected ohms reading or use autorange by pressing AUTO When using manual ranging selecting the most sensitive lowest range provides the best accuracy Autorange automatically goes to the most sensitive range 5 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will turn on to indicate the output is on 6 Observe reading on display The SourceMeter will go into compliance if you exceed the maximum ohms measurement range 7 Turn output off When finished turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator light will turn off 4
507. using the DIGITS key PULSE SPEED NPLC Model 2430 Pulse Mode Press SPEED or CONFIG SPEED to display the speed choices 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 NOTE Display resolution for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode is not affected by the speed setting Remote speed programming Speed commands Table 7 3 summarizes commands to control speed See Section 18 Set mea surement speed for more information NOTE The speed setting is global which means that setting the speed for one function affects the speed for the other functions However the speed setting is stored in source memory and you can use this feature to change speed during a sweep See Section 10 for details on using source memory Table 7 3 Speed commands Command Description SENSe CURRent NPLCycles lt n gt Set amps speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 SENSe VOLTage NPLCycles lt n gt Set volts speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 SENSe RESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Set ohms speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode n PLC 0 01 to 0 10 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 9 Filters NOTE For the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 filtering is not used and there fore cannot be enabled Pressing the FILTER key results in the Invalid in Pulse Mode message Filter lets you set the filter response to stabilize noisy measurements The SourceMeter uses a digital fil
508. ust be enclosed in double or single quotes i e func stat volt Description This command is used to query the state of the specified measure ment function A returned response message of 0 indicates that the specified function is disabled while a 1 indicates that the function is enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 61 RESistance MODE lt name gt SENSe 1 RESistance MODE lt name gt Select ohms measurement mode Parameters lt name gt MANual Manual ohms mode AUTO Auto ohms mode Query MODE Query ohms mode Description This command is used to select the ohms measurement mode With MANual ohms selected the user must configure the source and measure aspects of the operation When the ohms function is selected the ohms reading is simply the result of the V I calculation Range changes cannot be made in manual ohms With AUTO ohms selected the SourceMeter will be configured to Source Measure V when the ohms function is selected The current source value and voltage measurement range used depends on the ohms measurement range that is selected See Section 4 Ohms Measurements for details on manual and auto ohms RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt SENSe 1 RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Control offset compensated ohms Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable offset compensation 0 or OFF Disable offset compensation Query OCOMpensated Query state of offset
509. ut connectors INPUT OUTPUT HI and LOUse to source measure volts amps and ohms 4 WIRE SENSE HI and LOUse for 4 wire remote sensing Input output controls ON OFF FRONT REAR Handle Turns the source on or off Selects front or rear panel input output connections Pull out and rotate to desired position Rear panel summary The rear panel of the Model 2400 SourceMeter is shown in Figure 1 2 The Mod els 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 are similar The following abbreviated information should be reviewed before operating the instrument NOTE Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 are not UL listed 1 8 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 1 2 SourceMeter rear panel WARNING NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY m KEITHLEY MAQEN f le WEE c US C LISTED 250V LINE FUSE SourceMeter S PEAK AZAS LINE RATING x 100 240VAC SENSE 50 60 Hz 190VA MAX WIRE INPUT 250v SENSE i OUTPUT alk CATI FUSE DRAWER ENTEMIEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU TRIGGER l OUTPUT LINK ENABLE n sme CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING Input output connectors INPUT OUTPUT HI and LOUse to source measure volts amps and ohms 4 WIRE SENSE HI and LOUse for 4 wire remote sensing V Q GUARD Driven guard for guarded measurements GUARD SENSE Use to correct for IR drops
510. ut off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator light will turn off 3 18 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote command source measure procedure Basic source measurement procedures can also be performed via remote by sending appropriate commands in the right sequence The following paragraphs summarize the basic commands and give a simple programming example Basic source measure commands Table 3 5 summarizes basic source measure commands See Section 18 for more information on using these commands NOTE The first command in Table 3 5 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC applies only to the Model 2430 It is not valid for Models 2400 2410 2420 2425 and 2440 Table 3 5 Basic source measure commands Command Description SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC SOURce FUNCtion MODE lt name gt SOURce CURRent MODE FlXed SOURce VOLTage MODE FlXed SOURce CURRent RANGe lt n gt SOURce VOLTage RANGe lt n gt SOURce CURRent LEVel lt n gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt n gt SENSe FUNCtion lt function gt SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt SENSe CURRent RANGe lt n gt SENSe VOLTage RANGe lt n gt OUTPut lt state gt READ Select DC Mode of operation Model 2430 only Select source function name VOLTage or CURRent Select fixed sourcing mode for I source Select fixed sourcing mode for V source Select I source
511. ve loads that are 2009 and 8009 respectively For these examples the SourceMeter is programmed to source 100mA and limit 40V See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure In Figure 6 10A the SourceMeter is sourcing 100mA to the 200Qload and subse quently measures 20V As shown the load line for 200Q intersects the 100mA current source line at 20V Figure 6 10B shows what happens if the resistance of the load is increased to 800 The DUT load line for 800Q intersects the voltage compliance limit line plac ing the SourceMeter in compliance In compliance the SourceMeter will not be able to source its programmed current 100mA For the 800Q DUT the SourceM eter will only output 50mA at the 40V limit Notice that as resistance increases the slope of the DUT load line increases As resistance approaches infinity open output the SourceMeter will source virtually OmA at 40V Conversely as resistance decreases the slope of the DUT load line 6 18 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual decreases At zero resistance shorted output the SourceMeter will source 100mA at virtually OV Regardless of the load voltage will never exceed the pro grammed compliance of 40V Figure 6 10 I Source operating examples Voltage Limit Load Line 40V V Meter Operating Vm Point 20V Current Source Load Line I Source I lt 100mA Vu l R 100mA 2009 20V A Normal l Source O peration Voltage Limit
512. w to enable and use NPLC caching with a source memory sweep 1 Press the MENU key select A D CTRL then press ENTER 2 Select AUTO ZERO then press ENTER 3 Choose DISABLE then press ENTER to disable auto zero 4 From the A D CONTROLS menu select NPLC CACHE then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER to enable NPLC caching Use the EXIT key to back out of the main menu structure 7 Setup the source memory parameters and run the source memory sweep See Section 10 Performing a source memory sweep an 3 12 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual V source protection Use V source protection to select the maximum voltage level the SourceMeter can output Available settings are listed as follows SourceMeter V Source protection limit settings 2400 2401 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 20V 40V 60V 80V 100V 120V 160V NONE gt 160V 20V NONE gt 20V 20V 40V 100V 200V 300V 400V 500V NONE gt 500V 6V 12V 18V 24V 30V 36V 48V NONE gt 48V 10V 20V 30V 40V 50V 60V 80V NONE gt 80V AV 8V 12V 16V 20V 24V 32V NONE gt 40V These are absolute values with 5 tolerance The power on default is NONE WARNING Even with the voltage protection limit set to the lowest value NEVER touch anything connected to the terminals of the SourceMeter when the OUTPUT is ON Always assume that a hazardous voltage gt 30V rms is prese
513. ween the controller and the instrument lets the two devices communicate with each other about readiness to receive data The SourceMeter does not support hardware handshaking flow control Software flow control is in the form of XON and XOFF characters and is enabled when XON XOFF is selected from the RS 232 FLOW CONTROL menu When the input queue of the unit becomes more than Tfull the instrument issues an XOFF command The control program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the SourceMeter issues the XON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below half full The SourceMeter recognizes XON and XOFF sent from the controller An XOFF will cause the instrument to stop outputting characters until it sees an XON Incoming commands are processed after the lt CR gt character is received from the controller If NONE is the selected flow control there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the SourceMeter Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port is connected to the serial port of a computer using a straight through RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard Figure 14 1 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 14 2 shows the pinout for the con nector If y
514. weep commands Command Description SOURce CURRent MODE SWEep SOURce CURRent STARt lt n gt SOURce CURRent STOP lt n gt SOURce CURRent STEP lt n gt SOURce CURRent CENTer lt n gt SOURce CURRent SPAN lt n gt SOURce VOLTage MODE SWEep SOURce VOLTage STARt lt n gt SOURce VOLTage STOP lt n gt SOURce VOLTage STEP lt n gt SOURce VOLTage CENTer lt n gt SOURce VOLTage SPAN lt n gt SOURce SWEep RANGing lt name gt SOURce SWEep SPACing lt name gt SOURce SWEep POINts lt n gt SOURce SWEep DIREction lt name gt SOURce SWEep CABort lt name gt Select current source sweep mode Specify sweep start current n current Specify sweep stop current n current Specify sweep step current n current Specify sweep center current n current Specify sweep span current n current Select voltage source sweep mode Specify sweep start voltage n voltage Specify sweep stop voltage n voltage Specify sweep step voltage n voltage Specify sweep center voltage n voltage Specify sweep span voltage n voltage Select source ranging name BEST AUTO or FlXed Select sweep scale name LINear or LOGarithmic Set number of sweep points n points Set sweep direction Name UP sweep start to stop or DOWn sweep stop to start Abort on compliance Name NEVer disable EARLy start of SDM cycle or LATE end of SDM cycle Staircase sweep p
515. weep point the output will be turned off for that point The test sequence will progress and per form a contact check on the next point in the sweep The output will not be turned on until a good contact is detected Front panel contact check operation Menu selections Table F 2 summarizes the menu selections for various contact check modes Note that only those selections specific to contact check operation are shown here See Section 1 for complete menu listings and Section 11 and Section 12 for details on triggering and limit testing respectively Table F 2 Contact check menu selections Menu item Description CONFIG LIMIT Configure limit tests CONFIGURE LIMITS MENU DIGOUT Set Digital I O modes SIZE Select 3 BIT or 4 BIT fail pattern size MODE Select GRADING or SORTING mode H W LIMITS Control and set mode for Limit 1 and Limit 4 tests LIMIT1 CMPL Select Limit 1 compliance test LIMIT4 CCHk Select Limit 4 contact check test CONTROL Enable disable Limit 4 test DISABLE Disable contact check limit test ENABLE Enable contact check limit test DIGIO PATTERN Set contact check Digital I O pattern Default Setting 0 7 3 bit alternately 0 15 4 bit F 12 Contact Check Function Table F 2 cont Contact check menu selections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Menu item Description MENU Main menu MAIN MENU A D CTRL A D control selection AUTO ZERO LINE FREQ NPLC CACHE Control
516. wer range is 1A For the Model 2420 the high power ranges are 20V 3A and 60V 1A For the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode the high power ranges are 20V 3A and 100V 1A For the Model 2440 the high power ranges are 10V 5A and 40V 1A NOTE See Operating boundaries for details on source and sink operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 7 Source delay measure cycle In addition to static source and or measure operation SourceMeter operation can consist of a series of source delay measure SDM cycles Figure 6 1 During each SDM cycle the following occurs 1 Set the source output level 2 Wait for the source delay 3 Make the measurement NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The delays used for Pulse Mode are covered in Section 5 See Section 11 for details on how the SDM cycle relates to the trigger model Figure 6 1 Source delay measure SDM cycle Start of A D Conversion End of A D Source ae as Conversion Value Trigger a Eney Delay M easure 00u imc 1 msec gt If enabled The delay phase of the SDM cycle allows the source to settle before the measure ment is performed The delay period depends on how the source delay is config ured The source delay can be manually set from 0000 00000 seconds to 9999 9990 seconds If using auto delay the delay depends on which source range is presently selected as summarized in Table 3 4 see S
517. will instead be used See Section 18 FORMat subsystem for details After all source measure operations are completed the SourceMeter returns to the idle state The data stored in the Sample Buffer will remain there until data from another source measure cycle overwrites the buffer Data in the Sample Buffer is lost if the SourceMeter goes to the local state REM annunciator off NOTE With no data in the Sample Buffer the FETCh CALCulate1 DATA and CALCulate2 DATA commands to read data will display the mes sage Data corrupt or stale FETCh This command is used to read data stored in the Sample Buffer If for example there are 20 data arrays stored in the Sample Buffer then all 20 data arrays will be sent to the computer when FETCh is executed Note that FETCh does not affect data in the Sample Buffer Thus subsequent executions of FETCh acquire the same data The READ command performs an INITiate and then a FETCh The INITiate trig gers a new source measure cycle which puts new data in the Sample Buffer FETCh reads that new data The MEASure command places the SourceMeter in a one shot source measure mode and then performs a READ See Section 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands for more informa tion on READ and MEASure C 4 Data Flow 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CALCulate 1 DATA If CALCulate1 is enabled Sample Buffer data is fed to the CALC1 block where the
518. www keithley com Series 2400 SourceMeter User s Manual 2400S 900 01 Rev K September 2011 KEITHLEY AS GREAT EIR MEAS URE OTE E fey N Te ey Te Ik 6 T 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2011 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A Document Number 2400S 900 01 Rev K September 2011 KEITHLEY Safety Precautions 04 09 The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintenance information carefully before using the product Refer to the user documentation for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the product warranty may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equipment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They
519. xample the following command sets the source delay to 500ms SOUR DEL 5 Similarly send the following command to enable auto delay SOUR DEL AUTO ON 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 15 Basic source measure procedure Front panel source measure procedure Use the following procedure to perform the basic source measure operations of the SourceMeter See Section 4 Ohms Measurements to measure ohms NOTE For the Model 2430 the following procedure pertains to the DC Mode of operation Pulse Mode operation is covered in Section 5 If the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode Vpls or Ipls displayed in the source field you can select the DC Mode from the source pulse configuration menu Press CONFIG SOURCE V or l select the SHAPE menu item then select DC Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display In the DC Mode Vsrc or Isrc is displayed in the source field The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already con nected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 Connections Step 1 Select source Press SOURCE V to select the V Source or press SOURCE to select the I Source The presently programmed source value Vsprc Or Isrc and compliance level Cmpl are displayed Note that the OFF message is displayed to indicate that the source is off ON OFF indicator off Step 2 Set source level and compliance limit The source level is the voltage or curre
520. y The EOI is usually used to mark the end of a multi byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request This line is used by devices when they require service from the controller Handshake lines The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending information while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or listeners receiving the information The three handshake lines are D 6 EEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid NRFD Not Ready For Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte Figure D 2 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DAV Source Valid ll Ready Acceptor A N RFD All Accepted NDAC Acceptor Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special
521. y SPAN Query span y CENTer lt n gt Specify center point 0 y CENTer Query center point y VOLTage Path to configure V Source y MODE lt n gt Select V Source mode FlXed SWEep or FlXed J LIST MODE Query V Source mode y RANGe lt n gt UP DOWN Select fixed V Source range 21 v s2 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable autoranging ON y s AUTO Query state of autoranging v RANGe Query V Source range setting y 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed infor mation on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2 If source V is active 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 17 Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel Set V Source level in volts y IMMediate Set specified level immediately v AMPLitude lt n gt Specify voltage level 0 v z AMPLitude Query voltage level v TRIGgered Set specified level when triggered v AMPLitude lt n gt Specify voltage level 0 v AMPLitude Query voltage level v SFACtor lt n gt Set voltage scaling factor 0 Sf 999 9999e 18 to 999 9999e 18 STATe lt b gt Enable disable voltage scaling factor OFF f STATe Query voltage scaling factor state SFACtor Query voltage scaling factor PROTection Path to limit
522. y limit results control of Digital I O lines Note Use LIMit5 through LIMit12 to control Limit 5 through Limit 12 tests respectively For example send LIM5 STAT ON to enable Limit 5 send LIM10 FAIL to return the result of Limit 10 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 7 Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 CLEar Clear test results IMMediate Clear latest limit test result and reset Digital I O port back to SOURce2 TTL settings AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable clearing of test results ON when INITiate command is sent AUTO Query state of auto clear PASS Define pass digital output pattern Sorting mode only if limits 2 3 5 12 disabled SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern SMLocation lt NRf gt Specify next PASS Source Memory NEXT v NEXT Sweep location NEXT location or 1 to 100 SMLocation Query PASS memory location FAIL Define fail digital output pattern SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern SMLocation lt NRf gt Specify next FAIL Source Memory NEXT NEXT location NEXT location or 1 to 100 SMLocation Query FAIL memory location CALCulate3 Subsystem to control CALC3 v
523. y rear panel DIP switches or programmed from the front panel of the instrument The actual listen address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with H20 For example if the primary address is H16 the actual listen address is H36 H36 H16 H20 In a similar man ner the talk address is obtained by ORing the primary address with H40 With the present example the talk address derived from a primary address of 16 deci mal would be H56 H56 H16 H40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary addressing Secondary addresses lie in the range of H60 H7F Note however that many devices including the SourceMeter do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example if the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appro priate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location D 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure D 1 IEEE 488 bus configuration To Other Devices Device 1 Able to Talk Listen and Control Computer Data Bus Device 2 Able to Talk and Listen es Data Byte SourceMeter T Transfer Control Device 3 Only Able to Listen Printer General ee r4 Interface Management Device 4 Only Able ae 1
524. y sweep lets you perform a sweep using setups stored in up to 100 memory locations This allows you to sweep using multiple source measure operations and math expressions See CALCulate 1 page 18 26 subsystem NOTE In order to run a memory sweep the memory function must be selected and the trigger count must be the same as the number of memory points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the MEMory function See Select function modes page 18 72 Arm count ARM COUNt and trigger count TRIGger COUNt are set from the Trigger Subsystem When memory is initialized SYSTem MEMory INITialize all 100 memory locations for a memory sweep are initialized to the present setup configura tion of the SourceMeter with CALC1 disabled User defined math expres sions are replaced with the Power math expression Error 809 Source memory location revised occurs when a memory sweep references an expression that no longer exists The memory sweep is revised to disable CALC1 In order to execute a memory sweep the product of the arm count and trig ger count should be at least the same as the number of points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the MEMory function See Select function modes page 18 72 Arm count ARM COUNTt and trigger count TRIGger COUNTt are set from the Trigger Subsystem 18 94 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SAVE lt NRf gt SOUR
525. ystem 18 114 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TRACe subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to configure and control data storage into the buffer The commands are summarized in Table 18 10 TRACe DATA The bar indicates that TRACe or DATA can be used as the root command for this subsystem From this point on the documentation in this manual uses TRACe If you prefer to use DATA simply replace all the TRACe command words with DATA Read and clear buffer DATA TRACe DATA Read contents of buffer Description When this command is sent and the SourceMeter is addressed to talk all the readings stored in the data store are sent to the com puter The format used to send readings over the bus is controlled from the FORMat subsystem NOTE See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data CLEar TRACe CLEar Clear buffer Description This action command is used to clear the buffer of readings If you do not clear the buffer a subsequent store will overwrite the old read ings Configure and control buffer FREE TRACe FREE Read status of memory Description This command is used to read the status of storage memory After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk two val
526. zard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000V no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with impedance limited sources NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective devices to limit fault current and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument ensure that the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the connecting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separat

Series 2400 SourceMeter User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents